Home

Power Meter

1. DISP 1 4 TRAC UPP 30 DBM Upper limit of power axis in Scope mode DISP 1 4 TSL 1 First timeslot DISP 1 4 UPD NORM Frequent display updates FORM ASC Measured data in ASCII format FORM BORD NORM Big Endian byte sequence of measured data if FORM REAL MEM The settings in the MEMory command system will not be affected OUTP REC1 FEED CALCI Analog outputs are fed by the first calculate block OUTP REC2 FEED CALC2 Analog outputs are fed by the second calculate block OUTP REC 1 2 LIM LOW 20 DBM or 0 V equivalent at analog output 0 DB OUTP REC 1 2 LIM UPP 20 DBM or 3 V equivalent at analog output 10 DB OUTP RECI STA ON Analog output active OUTP REC2 STA OFF Trigger input active OUTP ROSC OFF Test generator is switched off OUTP TTL AC LOW OUTP TTL LVOLT is applied to the TTL output if a limit is violated OUTP L FAIL HIGH OUTP TTL HVOLT is applied to the TTL output if a limit is violated OUTP FEED CALC1 LIM The TTL output is fed by the limit monitoring function of calculate block de OUTP L HVOL 3 9 V High voltage at TTL output OUTP TTL LVOL 0 0 V Low voltage at TTL output SENS 1 4 AVER ON OFF Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 AVER COU NR1 Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 AVER COUN AUTO OFF Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 AVER COUN AU
2. Keyboard CO c Sky t M MENU LH Del 1TRIG d Sky2 ICT tT Sky B Sky4 O O SE Sky5 n Sky amp O K LR ESC LOCAL FREG PREJSET_ ZERO Test Result Fig 4 58 Selftest Keyboard dialog box The first stage in testing the whole keyboard is to press all the keys in any order without checking each response in the display If each key has been activated once and only once an OK message is output and the test is over Keys that are not activated during the test do not output a tone and afterwards do not exhibit any marking If a keystroke e g due to a short activates several keys a warning message is output during the test You should then repeat the test observing the response on the display inten sively 1144 1400 12 4 61 E 2 System settings System menu R amp S NRP Test generator System 2 Power Ref How to use the test generator option R amp S NRP B1 for Zeroing is described on page 4 3 As it is a high precision generator with an output power of 1 mW at 50 MHz it can also be used for other applications System menu witches th nerator on off Power Ref C Switches the test generator on o Off m d d Remote Control OUTPut ROSCillator STATe ON OFF System information Information about sensors System Info Sensor The following information about connected power sensors can be obtained with the Info Sensor dialog box e Type
3. Function name Channel Meaning create link core Opens a link to a network instrument device setting up socket connections for the core and abort channels but not for the interrupt channel destroy link core Cancels a link to a network instrument device device write core Sends an IEEE 488 2 or SCPI command as a string to a network instrument device device read core Reads responses from a network instrument device device readstb core Reads the status byte of a network instrument device device trigger core Triggers a trigger in a network instrument device and is equivalent to TRG device clear core Triggers a device clear DCL in a network instrument device In the R amp S NRP DCL and abort have the same effect Because device abort unlike device clear is transmitted over the abort channel it is not serialized with other commands but goes directly to the device and is therefore preferable device remote core Changes the network instrument device to the remote state device local core Changes the network instrument device to the local state device lock core LLO local lock out The keyboard of the network instrument device is locked device unlock core Cancels the LLO state device docmd core The network instrument device executes a command device abort abort The network instrument device aborts an in progress command See device clear create intr chan
4. 5 17 1144 1400 12 I 5 1 E 3 List of Figs and Tables Chapter 5 R amp S NRP Figs Fig 5 1 SCP command tree 5 7 Fig 5 2 Device model for remote Control 5 13 Tables Table 5 1 Synchronization with OPC OPC and swat 5 14 Table 5 2 Automatic settings for manual selection of a measurement mode ssssssssssssssrrrrenssesreene 5 15 Table 5 3 Correspondence between remote control and manual contra 5 17 1144 1400 12 5 2 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Fundamentals 5 Remote Control Fundamentals The Power Meter R amp S NRP is equipped with an interface that can be connected to a controller for remote control e EC IEEE bus interface standard equipment in line with the standards IEC 60625 1 IEEE 488 1 and IEC 60625 2 IEEE 488 2 e Ethernet 10 100 BASE T interface e USB interface for remote control and firmware update Connectors are installed at the rear of the power meter The two interfaces support the SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments standard version 1999 0 of May 1999 The SCPI standard is based on the IEEE 488 2 standard and defines a standardized command language for controlling measuring and test instruments with functions beyond the scope of the IEEE 488 2 standard In addition to the commands error handling and status management are also described The present Chapter explains the differences between remote control and manual control familiarizes th
5. 4 MENU d 4 MENU d EST Windows Measurement File System SEN A A A 50 000MHz A T T an 1144 1400 12 R amp S NRP gt Activate the global offset correction by pressing the right hand side of the rocker switch next to Global gt Accept the warning concerning the triggerlevel Global offset correction is now on The displayed value is increased or decreased depending on the sign of the offset Factors which are not or only minimally dependent on frequency can be corrected in this way gt Close the dialog box gt Close the menu If you have connected an attenuator and entered its at tenuation the R amp S NRP will display about the same value as before In the note line of the measurement window the a symbol indicates that global offset correction has been activated 2 8 E 2 R amp S NRP Q Relative power measurements Measuring average power Cont Av mode The R amp S NRP can calculate and display the relative difference between a measured value and a refer ence value The reference value can be a measured value that has been saved or an arbitrary value that is entered Sensor Windows D SES File system Window 1234 Func E aem tion BS Relative Relative orl Reset Relative Relative ott bi Reset 1144 1400 12 U U gt Using the topmost rocker switch or the cursor keys select the Measurement menu To a
6. ssssssssssss 6 77 Table 6 18 Meaning of bits used in the Questionable Status Register esses 6 78 Table 6 19 Meaning of bits used in the Standard Event Status Register sssesssss 6 79 1144 1400 12 6 3 E 3 List of Figs and Tables Chapter 6 R amp S NRP Table 6 20 Meaning of bits used in the Operation Status Register 6 80 Table 6 21 Meaning of bits used in the Operation Calibrating Status Register 6 81 Table 6 22 Meaning of bits used in the Operation Measuring Status Register 6 82 Table 6 23 Meaning of bits used in the Operation Status Hegleter 6 83 Table 6 24 Meaning of bits used in the Operation Sense Status Register eeseesereeeeerreerreereen 6 84 Table 6 25 Meaning of bits used in the Operation Lower Limit Fail Status Register 6 85 Table 6 26 Meaning of bits used in the Operation Upper Limit Fail Status Register 6 86 Table 6 27 Meaning of bits used in the Questionable Power Status Heoieter 6 87 Table 6 28 Meaning of bits used in the Questionable Window Status Register 6 88 Table 6 29 Meaning of bits used in the Questionable Calibration Status Register 6 89 Table 6 30 Initialization of device status ssssesseeeeeneeeeenneenneeeneeneenn nnne 6 9
7. REFLection RELative DIFFerence DIFFerence RELative SUM 1144 1400 12 6 111 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP SUM RELative RATio RATio RELative SWR RLOSs REFLection RELative DIFFerence DIFFerence RELative SUM SUM RELative RATio RATio RELative SWR RLOSs REFLection AVG AVG RELative AVG DIFFerence AVG DIFFerence RELative AVG SUM AVG SUM RELative AVG RATio AVG RATio RELative AVG SWR AVG RLOSs REFLection 1144 1400 12 6 112 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands REA RELative REA T H H H DIFFerence REA s 7 S H DIFFerence RELative REA PAS 7 7 S SUM REA a i SUM RELative REA ys 4 RATio REA dos S RATio RELative REA ene i E i H SWR REA ae G S S RLOSs REA Sas REFLection REA REA xs E RELative REA Da H H DIFFerence REA T 7 G DIFFerence RELative REA sus f H SUM REA De 4 SUM RELative REA Sa RATio REA SS i RATio RELative REA MEASure MEASure MEASure l RELative
8. Rohde amp Schwarz SIT GmbH Agastrake 3 D 12489 Berlin ADRESSEN DEUTSCHLAND ADDRESSES GERMANY Rohde amp Schwarz Vertriebs GmbH M hldorfstra amp e 15 D 81671 M nchen Postfach 80 14 69 D 81614 M nchen Zweigniederlassungen der Rohde amp Schwarz Vertriebs GmbH Branch offices of Rohde amp Schwarz Vertriebs GmbH Zweigniederlassung Nord Gesch ftsstelle Berlin Ernst Reuter Platz 10 D 10587 Berlin Postfach 100620 D 10566 Berlin Zweigniederlassung B ro Bonn Josef Wirmer Strafte 1 3 D 53123 Bonn Postfach 140264 D 53057 Bonn Zweigniederlassung Nord Gesch ftsstelle Hamburg Steilshooper Alle 47 D 22309 Hamburg Postfach 60 22 40 D 22232 Hamburg Zweigniederlassung Mitte Gesch ftsstelle K ln Niederkasseler Stra e 33 D 51147 K ln Postfach 900 149 D 51111 K ln Phone Fax E mail 49 89 41 29 0 449 89 4129 121 64 49 8331 108 0 49 8331 108 11 24 49 9923 857 0 49 9923 857 11 74 49 2203 49 0 49 2203 49 51 308 info rsdc rohde schwarz com service rsdc rohde schwarz com 49 89 41 29 137 74 49 89 41 29 137 77 49 89 41 29 129 84 49 89 41 29 120 50 49 89 41 29 137 11 49 89 41 29 137 23 49 5042 998 0 449 5042 998 105 49 30 658 91 122 49 30 655 50 221 49 30 658 84 0 49 30 658 84 183 49 89 4129 133 74 4989 4129 133 77 49 30 34 79 48 0 49 30 34 79 48 48 49 228 918 90
9. 1144 1400 12 Firmware Main Program 01 00 Bootloader 01 00 Keybd Ctr 01 00 Options B1 B2 B4 Hardware Serial No 000006 Stock No 1143 8300 02 MAC Address 00 90 b8 09 0a 0b RAM 16 MB Fig 4 60 System Info dialog box The dialog box can be closed with the key The up down cursor keys can be used to scroll the window contents if they cannot all be viewed simultaneously Remote Control SYSTem INFO lt string gt 4 63 E 2 System settings System menu Miscellaneous R amp S NRP System 2 Miscellaneous Operation at low ambient temperatures The built in acoustic alarm can be configured in the Misc dialog At very low ambient temperatures the display becomes sluggish and the rapidly changing decimal places at the end of the reading in particular cannot be reliably determined To improve readability un der these circumstances you can reduce the display update rate System menu Misc C d Beep CD Overload d d Beep C Limit Warning d d Beep C Key Click d d Display Update C 9 Normal BM Freeze J d 1144 1400 12 Wy Overload Key Click Display Update Riel Slow Freeze Fig 4 61 Miscellaneous dialog box Activates an acoustic alarm when the sensor is overloaded Remote Control SYSTem BEEPer NOTify OVERload ON OFF Activates or deactivates an acoustic alarm when there is a limit viola tion simultaneously in all measurement window
10. AVER COUN Trigger Source 1144 1400 12 SOUR 6 135 E 3 Remote Control Commands Sensor parameter Sensor Mode WCDMA 3GPP TDD DL Remote control command in short form R amp S NRP POW XTIM Integration Time APER 10 ms Duty Cycle SDCYC 6 667 Duty Cycle Correction DCYC STAT ON Smoothing SMO OFF Dropout Tolerance BURST DTOL 666 667 us Exclude Time Start IM EXCL 25 us Exclude Time End IM EXCL 40 us Number Of Timeslots 1 COUN 15 Timeslot Width 2WIDT 666 667 us Timegate Offset OFFS TIMI 1 25 us 2 5 358 ms Timegate Time 1 601 667 us 2 602 us Scope Offset Time RAC OFFS 200 us Scope Capture Time RAC TIMI 10 250 ms Scope Number Of Points RAC POIN 312 Scope Realtime REAL OFF Trigger Delay 0s Trigger Level Trigger Source Trigger Slope Trigger Holdoff Trigger Hysteresis 1144 1400 12 6 136 E 3 R amp S NRP Sensor parameter Sensor Mode WCDMA 3GPP TDD UL Remote control command in short form Remote Control Commands POW XTIM Integration Time APER 10 ms Duty Cycle SCDE 6 420 Duty Cycle Correction DCYC STAT
11. MINimum Minimum Maximum of all measured values since the last CALC EXTR RES or Power MAXimum On respectively PTPeak Differenz linear units or logarithmic ratio logarithmic units of maximum and minimum of all measured values since the last CALC EXTR RES or Power On respectively OFF No additional information is displayed RST Wert OFF DISPlay WINDow 1 4 FORMat DIGital ANALog GRAPhical Selects the display mode for measured data DIGital Measured values are displayed in numeric format ANALog Measured values are indicated by a marker on a scale The values at the upper and lower scale end as well as the type of scaling linear or logarithmic are set with the following METer commands GRAPhical Measured values are plotted over time This kind of presentation is possible only if the Primary Channel is operated in Scope mode RST value DIGital 1144 1400 12 6 32 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands DISPlay WINDow 1 4 METer ANALOg AUTo ONCE OFF DISP AUTO ONCE automatically determines scaling for the analog display The upper and the lower limit value of the display is set as a function of the current measurement data Only the ONCE parameter is permissible a query always supplies the value OFF RST value OFF DISPlay WINDow 1 4 METer ANALog LOWer float value Sets the lower limit value of the analog scale The value range depends on the current ou
12. in the Scope mode Points 312 Horiz Resolution Realtime O 4 MENU gt Close the Mode dialog box ler Measurenent Fie system MEUM gt Change to the Windows menu and press Expand EN dod Close Expand 1144 1400 12 2 18 E 2 R amp S NRP Graphically representing power versus time Scope mode Close Expand _ d SSS nl A RUN T slots MITT T Gates H EE Start 0 000 Huel Max 30 000 dBm 1 Length 4 616ms Min Go 000dBm 4 1144 1400 12 The window is now in the Scope display mode and shows the Trace page The Max and Min fields are used to choose the level range the vertical resolution and the Length field to choose the horizontal resolution If you do not see a trace the trigger threshold probably does not match the signal In this case a symbol on a black background see step will apear in the row of warning symbols below the window title bar The other pages that can be selected via the tabs are used to configure the parameters of the Timeslot mode T slots Measuring average power in defined time interval as well as to set gates Gates by using markers and to perform measurements within these gates Meas 2 19 E 2 Graphically representing power versus time Scope mode R amp S NRP O Settings for reliable triggering gt Change to the Sensor menu Trigger c gt Open the Trigger dialog box d Tri I
13. Trigger d Offset Filter 7 d 0 000 dB Global Table 1 Table Edit Table SParameter Device LI Global C A Bong aB Global Table 1 4 Table Edit Table SParameter evice 1234567890 d d d 1144 1400 12 Measuring average power Cont Av mode gt Using the topmost rocker switch or the cursor keys select the Sensor menu All sensor related settings can be made in the Sensor menu This determines the type and details of data ac quisition gt Press the Offset softkey left hand side of rocker switch The Offset dialog box opens Factors for correcting ex ternal signal losses or gains due to an attenuator for example can be set in this box gt Activate the editor for the global offset by pressing the left hand side of the rocker switch next to Global Positive values are for correcting losses and negative values for gains gt If you have an attenuator at hand enter its value and connect the attenuator between the sensor and the signal source otherwise just enter 10 dB gt Confirm the entry 2 7 E 2 Measuring average power Cont Av mode 10 000 dB Global O Table 1 Table Edit Table SParameter Device U Global C d d 10 000 dB Global L Table 1 Table Oo Edit Table S Parameter Device E
14. MEASure ES E H 3 DIFFerence MEASure us DIFFerence RELative MEASure Sos H H H SUM MEASure 1 SUM RELative MEASure l RATio MEASure l RATio RELative MEASure one SWR 1144 1400 12 6 113 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP MEASure 1 AVG RLOSs MEASure 1 SCA AVG REFLection MEASure yo SCA H SES AVG MEASure s SCA G TS AVG RELative MEASure Se SCA TS AVG DIFFerence MEASure m SCA S SIS AVG DIFFerence RELative MEASure bk SCA TS AVG RATio MEASure l SCA TS AVG RATio RELative MEASure m SCA i AVG MEASure ene SCA i AVG RELative MEASure T SCA H AVG DIFFerence MEASure Ss SCA S H AVG DIFFerence RELative MEASure us SCA S H AVG RATio MEASure l SCA RATio RELative MEASure us SWR MEASure l REFLection MEASure s RLOSs MEASure l ARRay MEASure 1 ARRay RELative MEASure l ARRay DIFFerence MEASure l ARRay DIFFerence RELative MEASure 1 ARRay E RATio MEASure 1 ARRay RATio RELative MEASure eae XTIMe CALCulate commands LCulat Pac DATA LCulat D MINimum DATA LCulat s MAXimum DATA LCulat S PTPeak DATA LCulat
15. lt float_value gt Sets the upper limit value of the analog scale This value is used if the unit of the measurement result is Watt dBm or dByV i e the measurement result is a power Unit DBM W DBUV Default unit DBM Value range see DISPlay WINDow METer ANALog UPPer RST Value 30 DBM DISPlay WINDow 1 4 METer ANALog UPPer RATio float value Sets the upper limit value of the analog scale This value is used if the unit of the measurement result is dB percent or the number 1 i e the measurement result is a power ratio Unit DB DPCT O Default unit DB Value range see DISPlay WINDow METer ANALog UPPer RST value 60 DB DISPlay WINDow 1 4 NAME lt string gt Determines the string to be displayed in the titlebar of the respective window The reset values depend on the window n 7 1 2 3 or 4 RST value Example DISP1 NAME Power In DISP2 NAME Power Out The measured values in the display are now visually assigned to the different test points in the test setup Input power in window 1 output power in window 2 1144 1400 12 6 34 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands DISPlay WINDow 1 4 RESolution 1 0 1 0 01 0 001 Specifies the number of significant places of the mantissa when the measurement result is displayed on a linear scale The R amp S NRP tries to adjust the averaging filter range so that the display noise decreases with in
16. 1144 1400 12 Annex l 5 E 2 Annex Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP Selecting the output unit for measured values So far no information has been given on the unit of the measured values It is possible to modify the output unit of the measured values A distinction is made as to whether the result represents a power or a power ratio Relative measurements always deliver power ratios This also applies to the RATio SWR RLOS and REFL functions The units are set by means of the following commands UNIT POWer DBM W DBUV and UNIT RATio DB DPCT O The default settings are DBM for power values and DB for power ratios Physical unit SCPI notation Meaning dBm DBM Power in dB referenced to 1 mW x W 10 log x 1 mW dBm Watt W dBuV DBUV Power in dB referred to 1 uV 50 Q x dBm x 107 dBuV dB DB A DPCT Deviation from 100 in x A x 100 1 e When the SWR RLOS and REFL functions are used the output unit however is implicitly set by the MEAS command Measurement function Output unit SWR O RLOS DB REFL O V Note The UNIT commands affect the parameters of the following commands CALC LIMit UPPer CALC LIMit LOWer CALC RELative DISP METer UPPer and DISP METer LOWer 1144 1400 12 Annex l 6 E 2 R amp S NRP Annex Remote Control Commands Division of MEAS MEAS can be divided in
17. Cannot be modified in manual mode RIGger DELay 08 Cannot be modified in manual mode RIGger HOLDoff Depends on sensor User selectable RIGger LEVel Depends on Sensor User selectable SENSe 1 TIMing EXCLude STARt 08 Cannot be modified in manual mode SENSe 1 TIMing EXCLude STOP Cannot be modified in manual mode INITiate 1 4 1144 1400 12 CONTinuous 5 16 Cannot be modified in manual mode E 3 R amp S NRP Annex Correspondence between Remote Control and Manual Control Remote Control Fundamentals Table 5 3 compares the control elements of the graphical user interface for manual control with the SCPI commands for remote control in order to simplify the transfer of manual control procedures to a remote control program Table 5 3 Correspondence between remote control and manual control Menu item in manual control SCPI command in short form Sensor Mode SENS FUNCtion Sensor Mode ContAv Window SENS POW APER Sensor Mode ContAv Sampling Rate SENS SAMP Sensor Mode ContAv DutyCycle SENS CORR DCYC Sensor Mode ContAv DutyCycle SENS CORR DCYC STAT Sensor Mode Burst Dropout SENS BURSt DTOL Sensor Mo
18. Data acquisition and parameters Sensor menu R amp S NRP Sensor menu Filter A B C D Auto Length Reset Auto Once Auto Config 1144 1400 12 Q CA CA Se eo Auto Length Reset Aute Auto Gree Config Fig 4 17 Filter dialog box Tabs for selecting the sensor Remote Control In the following commands 1 4 represents the channel number 1 for channel A 2 for channel B etc Toggles between automatic and manual filter setting Auto filtering is not possible in the Scope mode Remote Control SENSe 1 4 AVERage COUNt AUTO ON OFF For setting the filter length manually The function can be called only when autofilter is off Changes are made immediately when a key is pressed Remote Control SENSe 1 4 AVERage COUNt int value Initializes the averaging filter with the value currently being measured Thus the display can be updated quickly after a change in level par ticularly in the case of a large filter length Remote Control SENSe 1 4 AVERage RESet Determines a one off optimal filter length for the instantaneous measured value and enters this value in the Length field This function can be called only when autofilter is off Remote Control SENSe 1 4 AVERage COUNt AUTO ONCE Opens a dialog box for configuring the autofilter mode 4 20 E 2 R amp S NRP Filter dialog box Auto Config
19. Max Min Trigger symbols be amp 1TRIG ABCD Ext f x RUN STOP 3 12 Trigger Free running trigger Trigger remains OFF Single shot pected mode trigger ex Single shot mode measurement over Trigger source channel A B C D or external Trigger on rising slope Trigger on falling slope Measurement in progress Measurement stopped E 2 R amp S NRP Table of Contents Chapter 4 Table of Contents 4 Instrument EuGH 4 1 Hardkeys oo e UE DM EE E 4 2 Stored settings Presets esssssssssssessseesss esent enne nsn nnne entes intr n trt rennen ns 4 2 Frequency settings FREQ A 4 3 Zeroing ZERO GAL S t eret tn ta hGn ated e tre t edet erede egets 4 3 Test Measurement ZERO CAL A 4 4 Feet Reporte Aint Ltd at dia team eiu iate 4 5 Configuring the test measurement esee nentes 4 5 Contrast and brightness Contrast Brightness sss 4 6 Data acquisition and parameters Sensor menu 4 7 Setting the measurement mode 4 7 Free running average power Measurements eene 4 8 Measuring the average burst POWER eene eene 4 11 Measuring the power of TDMA signals eene emn 4 13 Measuring power in gales uk 4 14 Analyzing the envelope power sseseseesesesseseeeeeene ener ennt tren nnne nnn 4 15 Offset correction ieu eec UU een a a a a a a a a da aaa aaa daa daas 4 16 Table editor for offset tables AA 4 18 Filter averaging
20. TRACe AVERage COUNt AUTO NSRatio SENSe TRACe AVERage COUN AUTO TYPE SENSe TRACe AVERage TCONtrol SENSe TRACe OFFSet TIME SENSe TRACe POINts SENSe TRACe REALtime SENSe TRACe TIME SENSe TIMing EXCLude STARt SENSe TIMing EXCLude STOP STATus commands STATus DEVice EVENt STATus DEVice CONDition STATus DEVice ENABle STATus DEVice NTRansition STATus DEVice PTRansition STATus OPERa tion EVEN IR STATus OPERa tron CONDition STATus 0PERa tion ENABle STATus 0PERa tion NTRansit STATus OPERa tion PTRansi tion STATus OPERa tion CALibra ting SUMMary EVENt STATus 0PERa tion CALibra ting SUMMary CONDition STATus 0PERa tion CALibra ting SUMMary ENABle STATus 0PERa 1144 1400 12 tion CALibra ting SUMMary NTRansition 6 118 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands STATus OPERation CALibrating SUMMary PTRansition STATus OPERation LLFail SUMMary EVENt STATus OPERation LLFail SUMMary CONDition STAT OPERation LLFail SUMMary ENABle STAT OPERation
21. TRIGger l1 A ATRigger STATe TRIGger 1 A COUNt TRIGger 1 DELay TRIGger l H DELay AUTO TRIGger 1 HOLDoff TRIGger 1l HYSTeresis TRIGger 1 H IMMediate TRIGger LEVel TRIGger 1 SLOPe TRIGger 1 SOURce UNIT commands UNIT 1 8 POWer UNIT 1 8 RATio 1144 1400 12 6 121 E 3 Remote Control Commands Compatibility Information R amp S NRP This section contains information regarding the compatibility of the R amp S NRP remote control commands with those of the E4418B and E4419B power meters from Agilent The R amp S NRP is largely downward compatible to the above mentioned devices but offers additional capabilities Table 6 36 Compatibility information about remote control commands E4418B E4419B command Compatibility information DDT Is not implemented in the R amp S NRP CONFigure Returns the current configuration The R amp S NRP returns the last setting made with CONF igure as specified by the SCPI standard CALCulate GAIN Is not implemented in the R amp S NRP CALCulate PHOLd Is implemented in the R amp S NRP and has the same effect as CALC EXTR RES CALibration ECONtrol RCALibration RFACtor Is not implemented in the R amp S NRP DISPlay ENABle Is implmented in the R amp S NRP and has the s
22. Voltage OUTP TTL ACT HIGH OUTP TTL ACT LOW OUTP TTL FAIL LOW OUTP TTL FAIL HIGH OUTP TTL HVOLT OUTP TTL LVOLT Power DISP LIM LOW DISP LIM UPP DISP LIM LOW DISP LIM UPP Figure 6 6 Voltage at TTL output RST value OFF 1144 1400 12 6 49 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP SENSe Sensor Commands The commands of the SENSe group configure the power sensors with the exception of the trigger system This includes the measurement modes ContAv Burst Timeslot or Scope the offset corrections and the filter settings Note When the sensors are connected to the R amp S NRP they inform the device e about the SENSe and TRiGger commands supported and about the value ranges for parameters This applies to both numeric and text parameters For this reason no fixed ranges are specified with these commands the ranges can be obtained from the respective sensor manual Table 6 10 Commands of the SENSe system femme m mem SUS I Les J o SENSe sos AVERage STATe ON OFF COUNt lt int_value gt AUTO ON OFF ONCE MTIMe lt float_value gt RESolution 1 21314 SLOT lt int_value gt B NSRatio float value DB PCT TYPE RESolution NSR RESet no query STATe ON OFF ES TCONt rol MOVing REPeat CORRection OFFSet lt float_value gt DB PCT STATe ON OFF DCYCle INPut MAGNitude loat_value gt STATe OFF FDO
23. float value Defines the delay between the trigger event and the beginning of the actual measurement integration Unit s Value range depending on sensor RST value depending on sensor TRIGger 1 4 ALL DELay AUTO ON OFF TRIG DEL AUTO ON ensures by means of an automatically determined delay that a measurement is started only after the sensor has settled This is important when thermal sensors are used The automatically determined delay is ignored when a longer period was set with TRIG 1 4 DEL RST value depending on sensor TRIGger 1 4 ALL HOLDoff float value Defines a period after a trigger event within which all further trigger events are ignored Unit s Value range depending on sensor RST value depending on sensor TRIGger 1 4 ALL HYSTeresis float value This command is used to specify how far the signal level has to drop below the trigger level before a new signal edge can be detected as a trigger event Thus this command can be used to eliminate the effects of noise in the signal on the edge detector of the trigger system Unit DB PCT Default unit DB Value range depending on sensor RST value depending on sensor 1144 1400 12 6 105 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP TRIGger 1 4 ALL IMMediate Performs triggering and ensures that the sensor directly changes from the WAIT FOR TRG state to the MEASURING state irrespective of the selected trigger source TR
24. 86 10 64 37 98 88 info rschina rsbp rohde schwarz com 86 20 87 55 47 58 86 20 87 55 47 59 86 28 86 52 76 05 to 09 86 28 86 52 76 10 rsbpc 2mail sc cninfo net 85 2 21 68 06 70 85 2 21 68 08 99 86 29 321 82 33 86 29 329 60 15 sherry yu rsbp rohde schwarz com 86 10 64 38 80 80 86 10 64 38 97 06 357 24 42 51 78 357 24 42 46 21 hinis logos cy net 420 2 24 31 12 32 420 2 24 31 70 43 office rscz rohde schwarz com Denmark Ecuador Egypt H Salvador Estonia Finland France France France France France France Ghana Greece Guatemala Honduras Hongkong Hungary Iceland ROHDE amp SCHWARZ DANMARK A S Ejby Industrivej 40 2600 Glostrup REPRESENTACIONES MANFRED WEINZIERL Via Lactea No 4 y Via Sta In s PO Dos 17 22 20309 1722 Cumbay Quito U A S Universal Advanced Systems 31 Manshiet El Bakry Street Heliopolis 11341 Cairo siehe see Mexico ROHDE amp SCHWARZ DANMARK A S Estonian Branch Office Narva mnt 13 10151 Tallinn Orbis Oy P 0 Box 15 00421 Helsinski 42 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ FRANCE mmeuble Le Newton 9 11 rue Jeanne Braconnier 92366 Meudon La For t C dex iederlassung Subsidiary Rennes 37 Rue du Bignon Bat A F 35510 Cesson Sevigne iederlassung Subsidiary Toulouse echnoparc 3 B P 501 F 31674 Lab ge C dex Aix en Provence Office Lyon Office Nancy KOP Engineering Ltd P
25. R amp S NRP Tabbed Divider Overview Tabbed Divider Overview Data Sheet Safety Instructions Certificate of Quality EU Certificate of Conformity List of R amp S Representatives Tabbed Divider 1 Chapter 1 Putting into Operation 2 Chapter 2 Getting Started 3 Chapter 3 Operation 4 Chapter 4 Functional Description 5 Chapter 5 Remote Control Basics 6 Chapter 6 Remote Control Commands 7 Chapter 7 for future extensions 8 Chapter 8 Maintenance 9 Chapter 9 Error Messages 10 Chapter 10 for future extensions 1144 1400 12 RE E 1 Safety Instructions This unit has been designed and tested in accordance with the EC Certificate of Conformity and has left the manufacturer s plant in a condition fully complying with safety standards To maintain this condition and to ensure safe operation the user must observe all instructions and warnings given in this operating manual Safety related symbols used on equipment and documentation from R amp S Observe Weight PE terminal Ground Danger Warning Ground Attention operating indication for terminal Shock hazard Hot surfaces Electrostatic instructions units gt 18 kg sensitive de vices require special care The unit may be used only in the operating con ditions and positions specified by the manufac turer Unless otherwise agreed the following applies to R amp S products IP degree of protection 2X pollution severity 2 overvoltage category 2 only for indoor
26. Y Tip for power measurement in timeslots 1 Enter TDMA standard parameters in the Mode menu Timeslot 2 Switch the sensor to the Scope mode 3 Make the horizontal and vertical display settings on the Trace page 4 Blend in the timeslot structure on the T slots page 5 Open the Trigger dialog box and set the delay so that the timeslot structure coincides with the trace 6 Change the exclude times if necessary Gates The R amp S NRP provides four separately configurable time windows gates for signal evaluation The start and end of each gate can be set on the Gates page with the aid of markers Measurements in the time windows can be made by using the Meas page Meas page 4 47 or by switching to the Timegate mode Measuring power in gates p 4 14 Scope mode display RSR Trace Gates CO S gt A RUN dod O 450dgm Marker j Edit Select 1 077 dBm gan 537231ys 0 627dB Gates 2 4 Fig 4 40 Scope mode display Gates page 1144 1400 12 4 46 E 2 R amp S NRP n BEZZI o a 1 077 dBm A 537 231 ps 0 627 dB Marker C Edit Select d Marker C Edit Select d Gate C dod Meas Displaying data in the Scope mode Active marker The active marker can be shifted pixel by pixel using the and keys re entered with Marker Edit or changed by scrolling The number 1 marks the start of a time window and the number 2 the end regardless whether the marker is active
27. lt NR1 gt NR1 lt string gt The first two values denote the length in bytes of the occupied RAM and of the RAM still available for storing states and tables These values are followed by a string for each stored state and then for each stored table this string again consists of two strings and a numeric value string type NR1 stri ng gives the name of the stored data item t ype gt the type TABL or STAT and lt NR1 gt the length of the data item in bytes Example The response to query MEM CAT could be 956 99044 REFL STAT 408 NRPZ21 TABL 432 SPLITTER1 TABL 116 MEMory CATalog STATe This query only gives a list of stored device states and is otherwise identical with MEMory CATalog ALL MEMory CATalog TABLe This query only gives a list of stored correction tables and is otherwise identical with MEMory CATalog ALL MEMory CLEar NAME string Clears the content of the correction table or the stored device state with the designation name The table is maintained but does not contain entries Caution This command cannot be cancelled Cleared values are irretrievably lost MEMory CLEar TABLe This command may be used as an alternative to MEMor y CLEar NAME string The content of the table currently selected with MEMor y TABLe SELect string is cleared MEMory FREE ALI Returns the number of bytes available in memory for stori
28. or SYSTem PRESet Default state for manual operation 4 2 E 2 R amp S NRP Frequency setting Hardkeys is used to set the carrier frequency of the applied signal This corrects any frequency dependent effects introduced by the sensor If the sensor is to reach the specified measurement accuracy a frequency entry must be made Hardkey 2 d A B C D CD ded Frequency CC d d Zeroing Frequency Fig 4 2 Frequency dialog box Tabs for selecting the sensor Field for frequency entries with the units kHz MHz or GHz Remote Control SENSe 1 4 FREQuency CW FIXed float value ZERO CAL starts the autozero function or a test to check the confidence level of sensor results see next section Hardkey 2 d or CD d d ZERO CAL d 1144 1400 12 Zero Cal Test atPower Ref Sensor only with pad Report Config Fig 4 3 Zero Cal dialog box Zeroes all connected sensors v Tip The black background of the text indicates that the function can also be started by pressing the hardkey if the Zero Cal dialog box is open Remote Control CALibration ALL ZERO AUTO A ONCE Caution Turn off all test signals before zeroing 4 3 E 2 Hardkeys R amp S NRP Zero A B Zero A B Zero C D Zero C D Zeroing failure CD d Test Measurement Starts zeroing in channel A Zeroing for channels B C and D Remote Control CAL
29. 255 Parallel Poll Enable Register Command Sets the Parallel Poll Enable Register to the defined value PRE Parallel Poll Enable Register Query Returns the current content of the Parallel Poll Enable Register PSC 0 1 Power On Status Clear Command Determines whether the content of the ENABle registers is retained or cleared upon power up PSC O causes the status registers to retain their content With appropriate configuration of the ESE and SRE status registers a service request may be triggered upon power up PSC 1 clears the registers PSC Power On Status Clear Query The query PSC reads out the content of the power on status clear flag The response can be 0 or 4 RCL 0 19 Recall Calls the device state which has been stored with the SAV command under the indicated number The effect of RCL 0 to 19 is the same as if one of the setups 0 to 19 had been selected in manual control RCL 0 resets the device to the default state RST Reset Sets the device to the defined default state and has almost the same effect as the SCPI command SYSTem PRESet Table 6 33 The table also provides default settings The following table documents the difference SYST PRES acts like the frontpanel key PRES EMEN INITiate CONTinuous SENSe AVERage TCONt rol RST REPeat SYSTem PRI MOVing SAV 1 19 Save Stores the current device state under the indicated number 1144 1400 12 6 7 E 3
30. 8 LIMit BEEP ON OFF Switches the acoustic warning for limit violations on or off RST value OFF CALCulate 1 8 LIMit CLEar IMMediate Resets the limit monitoring state and the internal counter for limit violations CALCulate 1 8 LIMit CLEar AUTO ON OFF ONCE Automatically resets the limit monitoring state and the internal counter for limit violations if any of the following events occurs e INITiate IMMediate is executed e INITiate CONTinuous ON is executed e AMEASure Of MEASure query is executed e AREAD Or READ query is executed If the automatic function is set to ONCE the counter is reset only when the next of these events occurs RST value OFF CALCulate 1 8 LIMit FAIL Queries whether upper or lower limits have been exceeded The status is reset by the following events 0 no limit violation e The device is switched on e Areset is performed RST e The CALCulate 1 8 LIMit CLEar command is sent 1144 1400 12 6 23 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP CALCulate 1 8 LIMit FCOunt This query returns the number of limit violations that occurred The counter is zeroed when the following events occur e The device is switched on e A reset is performed RST e The CALCulate 1 8 LIMit CLEar command is sent CALCulate 1 8 LIMit LOWer DATA float value This command sets a lower limit for the measured values The R amp S NR
31. Exclude Start Exclude End Width Delay gt Trigger event external Measuring power in gates Mode Timegate The Timegate mode is used to measure power in time windows gates Up to four different gates can be configured although measurement can be performed only in one of them at a time Measurement can be started with an external trigger signal or automatically triggered by an internal signal Trigger settings p 4 24 Mode dialog box T slot T gate C ded e ContAv Burst T slot T gate Scope Gate 1 Btart of Gate End of Gate 416 667 ps 1 924 ms Fig 4 14 Mode dialog box Timegate mode 1144 1400 12 4 14 E 2 R amp S NRP Gates Start of Gate and End of Gate Su JI O Data acquisition and parameters Sensor menu Number of the gate to be configured Remote Control In the following commands the gate to be configured is determined by the TGATe suffix Start or end of the gate referenced to the delayed Trigger settings Trigger Delay p 4 24 trigger time Remote Control SENSe 1 4 OWer TGATe 1 4 OFFSet TIME float value SENSe 1 4 POWer TGATe 1 4 TIME float value v Tip These parameters can also be set interactively in the Scope mode Gates p 4 46 Analyzing the envelope power The Scope mode is used to record evelope power versus time Its configuration and operation are de scribed in Displaying data in th
32. Fig 6 12 Operation Status Register ato reete cele de tee eve Ee ne LE ede ERR ERE e EEN 6 74 Fig 6 13 Questionable Status Register sssssssssssssseseeeee enne tenent 6 75 Fig 6 14 Pin assignment of IEC IEEE bus Imtertace nens 6 124 Tables Table 6 1 High level measurement commande 6 14 Table 6 2 Commands of the CALCulate system 6 21 Table 6 3 Output unit of measured value of calculate block 6 27 Table 6 4 Commands of the CALibration system 6 29 Table 6 5 Commands of the DISPlay system ssssssssssssessseeenenneeeen nennen enne 6 30 Table 6 6 Commands of the FORMat command system 6 38 Table 6 7 Commands of the MEMory system 6 39 Table 6 8 Commands of the OUTPut system sssssssssssesesseeeeee enne tenente nennen 6 44 TLable 6 9 Voltage at TT E outp t za si Ee Ee Te ree e E Teide 6 49 Table 6 10 Commands of the SENSe system 6 50 Table 6 11 Measurement modes eeeesssesesssssee esee entree nnne A EATA rennen entere 6 56 Table 6 12 Commands of the SERVice command system 6 66 Table 6 13 Queries for status registers esses eene nnne nnns 6 69 Table 6 14 Commands for the configuration of status registers sese 6 69 Table 6 15 Decimal value of individual bits in the SCPI status reglsier esses 6 71 Table 6 16 Meaning of bits used in the status Die 6 76 Table 6 17 Meaning of bits used in the Device Status Register
33. Not Ready For Data Active LOW signals that one of the connected devices is not ready to accept data NDAC Not Data Accepted Active LOW until the connected device has accepted the data on the bus 1144 1400 12 6 125 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP Interface Functions Devices remote controlled via an IEC IEEE bus may be equipped with different interface capabilities Table 6 37 shows the IEC IEEE bus capabilities of the R amp S NRP For coding of the different capabilities see the IEEE488 standard Table 6 37 Interface functions of IEC IEEE bus IEEE488 Standard Code Interface capabilities Source handshake Acceptor handshake Listener function Listen Only mode unaddressed for MSA and TPAS recognizes END and EOS Extended Listener function Listen Only mode unaddressed for MSA and TPAS recognizes END and EOS Talker function capability to respond to serial poll Talk Only mode unaddressed on MLA sends END or EOS Extended talker function capability to respond to serial poll Talk Only mode unaddressed for MLA and LPAS sends END or EOS Service request function Remote parallel poll function Local parallel poll function Remote local switchover function Device clear 3 state driver open collector driver during parallel poll Device trigger No controller capabilities 1144 1400 12 6 126 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands Interf
34. ON Smoothing SMO OFF Dropout Tolerance BURST DTOL 666 667 us Exclude Time Start IM EXCL STAR 15 us Exclude Time End IM EXCL STOP 40 us Number Of Timeslots TSL COUN 15 Timeslot Width i WIDT 666 667 us Timegate Offset OFFS TIMI 1 15 us 2 5 348 ms Timegate Time 1 611 667 us 2 612 us Scope Offset Time RAC OFFS 200 us Scope Capture Time RAC TIMI 10 250 ms Scope Number Of Points RAC POIN 312 Scope Realtime REAL OFF Trigger Delay 0s Trigger Level Trigger Source Trigger Slope Trigger Holdoff Trigger Hysteresis 1144 1400 12 6 137 E 3 Remote Control Commands Sensor parameter Sensor Mode TD SCDMA Remote control command in short form R amp S NRP POW XTIM Integration Time 5ms Duty Cycle 13 250 Duty Cycle Correction ON Smoothing OFF Timegate Offset 20 us 710 us 835 us 5 970 ms Timegate Time 620 us 30 us 85 us 620 us Scope Offset Time 200 us Scope Capture Time 10 250 ms Scope Number Of Points 312 Scope Realtime OFF Trigger Delay 0s Trigger Level Trigger Source
35. Overload SYST BEEP NOT OVER C DISP CONT If the Single check box was enabled in the Scope mode pressing sends a TRG to the sensor Opens the File menu SENS 1 4 FREQ CAL ZERO AUTO 1144 1400 12 5 21 E 3 R amp S NRP Table of Contents 6 Table of Contents 6 Remote Control Commande 4 2 essere 6 1 Eet e 6 1 Types of Parameters eseessssesssseseesseeeeeseen enne nn nn nn nennen enne nne en nnn nnt rennen EE 6 3 Common Commands to IEEE 488 1 sss eene entren 6 4 ipe BAUEN D 6 4 ER EE Le NR Oe rit ede iere tas ede esa etae rt e eds 6 4 PGG Local LOCK QUI rte rcnt eaten t Ee ae ede E ea Dk aS XA Enea 6 4 PPC Parallel Poll GonfiQure sss ies otn nt cet pe ere ete cha ro edet 6 4 PPD sParallel Poll Disable irre er tear e eee 6 4 PPE Parallel Poll Enable nr Ert Et een rte paie 6 4 PPU Parallel Poll Unconfigure eoi rere eet feet te i eee ies 6 4 sD Selected Device Clear ts en cr tdt fere re ree ee ap eerte ra de reda 6 4 spp Seral e UE EE 6 5 SER Seral Poll Enable niit etra t Peter t eter tret i ea ee rt eerie ceeds 6 5 Common Commands to IEEE A9 3 6 5 Gns GEear Status cade diner e c HERE Met OR PE HER ERREUR ORT Haad 6 5 ESE 0 255 Standard Event Status Enable 6 5 ESE Standard Event Status Enable Query sees 6 5 ESR Standard Event Status Register Query
36. PPE Similar to the SRQ the IST flag combines the complete status information in a single bit It can be queried by a parallel poll gt section Parallel Poll page 6 91 or by the rST command The Parallel Poll Enable Register PPE determines which bits of the STB affect the IST flag The bits of the STB are ANDed with the corresponding bits of the PPE bit 6 is also used in contrast to the SRE The IST flag is obtained by ORing all results together The PPE can be set by the PRE command and read by the PRE query Device Status Register This register contains information on current device states CONDition register or states that occurred since the last query EVEN register The register can be read by the queries STATus DEVice CONDition Or STATus DEVice EVENt Table 6 17 Meaning of bits used in the Device Status Register Bit No Meaning 0 Not used 1 Sensor A connected 2 Sensor B connected 3 Sensor A error Sensor A is erroneous 4 Sensor B error Sensor B is erroneous 5 Sensor A Front Rear Indicates whether sensor A is connected at the front bit is not set or rear bit is set of the device 6 Sensor B Front Rear Indicates whether sensor B is connected at the front bit is not set or rear bit is set of the device 7 Sensor C connected 8 Sensor D connected 9 Sensor C error Sensor C is erroneous 10 Sensor D error Sensor D is erroneous 11
37. Peak Avg Note the following e Restrictions regarding Peak and Peak Avg are described in the background information to Meas p 4 47 e Only functions whose result is a power or a dimensionless ratio can be created e The reference of a gate measured value to the value of another gate in the same channel is not possible Func amp Unit Dialog Primary or secondary 5 gt Function channel in the Scope mode Prim Channel A Sec Channel Ls x Gate 1 Gates Eval Avg 4 Eval Peak Unit dBm 3 uem Fig 4 31 Func amp Unit dialog box Gate C Determines which gate is to be evaluated for the function dod Eval C 9 Selects one of the available measurands dod Avg Average power in the gate Peak Peak power in the gate Peak Avg Ratio of peak power to average power in the gate 1144 1400 12 4 35 ER Configuring measurements Measurement menu R amp S NRP Setting units Func amp Unit Unit Unit C The Unit drop down list is used to set the result unit Only those units d d which are compatible with the selected measurement function are in cluded as menu items Function Unit Primary Secondary W dBm dBuV Diff Sum Ratio A OB 1 SWR RCoeff 1 RLoss dB Measurement menu The units can be selected directly from the w Measurement menu by using the right half of Func dBm C the function rocker switch tion dBuV d Remote Control UNIT 1 8 POWer DBM
38. Peak Avg ratio Meas p 4 47 T slots On this page of the Scope mode display a timeslot structure the configuration that was defined for the Timeslot mode in the Mode menu is blended into the power characteristic Measuring the power of TDMA signals p 4 13 In addition the average power of a timeslot that can be selected from this is displayed taking into account the exclude times As the exclude times on the set page can be changed the effects on the measurement result can be seen immediately Scope mode display T slots Trace CD S gt Average 13 376dBm Sitz 1 4 Excluded from Start from End 100 000 ps 100 000 pel Fig 4 39 Scope mode display Timeslot page 1144 1400 12 4 45 E 2 Displaying data in the Scope mode R amp S NRP Marks the set timeslot including the exclude start and end times Average power for the set timeslot The displayed value is obtained by Average averaging the measurement points between the inner vertical lines Measurement accuracy can be increased if the Timeslot mode is se lected for the actual measurement Slotit C Selection of the marked timeslot dod For this purpose an average power calculated from the measurement points is displayed Excluded from End CC Setting of the exclude times d These parameters can also be set in the Mode dialog box from Start C Measuring the power of TDMA signals p 4 13 d
39. Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP SRE 0 255 Service Request Enable Sets the Service Request Enable Register bits This command determines the conditions under which a service request is triggered SRE Service Request Enable Query Returns the value of the Service Request Enable Register STB Status Byte Query Returns the current value of the Status Byte Register TRG Trigger Generates a BUS trigger event If the sensor is in the WAIT_FOR_TRG state and the source for the trigger is set to BUS TRIG SOUR BUS the sensor enters the MEASURING state TRG invalidates all current measuring results A query of measurement data following TRG will thus always return the measured value determined in response to TRG Error m essages 211 Trigger ignored No sensor is in the WAIT_FOR_TRG state 211 Trigger ignored A sensor is in the WAIT_FOR_TRG state but the trigger source is not BUS TST Self Test Query Triggers a selftest and returns 0 no error found or 1 an error has occurred WATI Wait Prevents the execution of new commands until one of the following criteria is met e All previous commands have been executed e ADCL command is received e The device is switched off and on again power on reset 1144 1400 12 6 8 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands SCPI Commands Overview of Command Systems The SCPI commands described below are grouped in command systems according to their fun
40. SENSe 1 4 CORRection DCYCle STATe 6 54 SENSe 1 4 CORRection FDOFfset INPut MAGNitude 6 54 SENSe 1 4 CORRection FDOT SELect 6 55 SENSe 1 4 CORRection FDOT STATe 6 55 SENSe 1 4 CORRection OFFSet 6 54 SENSe 1 4 CORRection OFFSet STATe 6 54 SENSe 1 4 FREQuency CW FIXed 6 55 SENSe 1 4 FUNCtion ON 6 56 SENSe 1 4 POWer AVG APERture p 57 SENSe 1 4 POWer AVG BUFFer SIZE p 57 SENSe 1 4 POWer AVG BUFFer STATe p 57 SENSe 1 4 POWer TSLot AVG COUNt 6 57 SENSe 1 4 POWer TSLot AVG WIDTh 6 60 SENSe 1 4 POWer BURSt DTOLerance 6 58 SENSe 1 4 POWer AVG RANGe 6 57 SENSe 1 4 POWer AVG RANGe AUTo p 57 SENSe 1 4 POWer AVG RANGe AUTo CLEVel 6 57 SENSe 1 4 POWer AVG SMOothing STATe 6 58 SENSe 1 4 POWer AVG SAMPling 6 59 SENSe 1 4 SGAMma MAGNitude 6 60 SENSe 1 4 SGAMma PHASe 6 60 SENSe 1 4 SGAMma CORRection STATe 6 60 1144 1400 12 6 117 E 3 Remote Control Commands SENSe TRACe AVERage STATe R amp S NRP SENSe TRACe AVERage COUNt SENSe TRACe AVERage COUNCt AUTO SENSe TRACe AVERage COUNt AUTO MTIMe SENSe TRACe AVERage COUNt AUTO RESolution SENSe TRACe AVERage COUNt AUTO POINt SENSe
41. STATus QUEStionable CALibrati SUMMary CONDition STATus QUEStionable CALibrati SUMMary ENABle STATus QUEStionable CALibrati SUMMary NTRansition STATus QUEStionable CALibrati SUMMary PTRansition STATus QUEStionable POWer SUMMary EVENt STATus QUEStionable POWer SUMMary CONDition STATus QUEStionable POWer SUMMary ENABle STATus QUEStionable POWer SUMMary NTRansition STATus QUEStionable POWer SUMMary PTRansition STATus QUEStionable WINDow SUMMary EVENt STATus QUEStionable WINDow SUMMary CONDition STATus QUEStionable WINDow SUMMary ENABle STATus QUEStionable WINDow SUMMary NTRansition STATus QUEStionable SUMMary PTRansition STATus PRESet SYSTem commands SYSTem BEEPer IMMediate SYSTem BEEPer NOTify OVERload SYSTem BEEPer NOTify KEY SYSTem BEEPer TIME SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess SYSTem DATE SYSTem INFO SYSTem ERRor SYSTem KEY SYSTem PRESet SYSTem SENSor 1 4 INFO SYSTem SENSor 1 4 RESet 1144 1400 12 6 120 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands SYSTem SPEed SYSTem TIME SYSTem VERSion Trigger system ABORt 1 4 ALL NITiate 1 4 ALL CONTinuous NITiate 1 4 ALL IMMediate TRIGger ALL SYNChronize STATe
42. TIM Note that each measurement must be triggered separately This point is a difference between the Scope mode and the Timeslot mode in which it is only necessary to start the measurement for measuring the power in all timeslots Example RST SENS FUNC XTIM POW SENS SWE POIN 256 SENS SWE TIM 600 us TRIG COUN 256 change to IDLE state after the 256th measurement INIT FETCh Averaging filters The power values to be measured are sampled by the sensors The sampling values then undergo two stage filtering before they are made available as measured values The first filter stage is a time integration The integration time is either set explicitly ContAv mode SENS APER Timeslot mode SENS TSL WIDT and Scope mode SENS SWE POIN and TIME or determined automatically BurstAv mode Filtering averaging is the second filter stage which is configured via the command path SENS AVERage These settings are used to obtain a stable noise free result up to a required accuracy This is done by means of a digital filter which has a variable length the longer the filter the more stable the result e Manual filter setting The filter length automatic mode is deactivated and the filter length is set in power of two numbers Example RST ENS AVER STAT ON activates filtering ENS AVER COUN AUTO OFF switches off filter length automatic mode ENS
43. The IST flag is described in section gt IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register PPE on page 6 77 OPC OPeration Complete Sets the operation complete bit in the Standard Event Status Register as soon as all currently executed commands have been completed This bit can be used to trigger a service request OPC must be at the end of a program message OPC OPeration Complete Query After completion of all currently executed commands the R amp S NRP writes a 1 into the output queue Since OPC waits until all previous commands are executed 1 is returned in all cases OPC basically functions like the WAI command but WAI does not return a response OPC is preferred to WA because with OPC the execution of commands can be queried from a controller program before new commands are sent This avoids an overflow of the input queue when too many commands are sent that cannot be executed Unlike swat oPC must be at the end of a program message OPT OPTion Query Returns a string to the output queue containing information about all options installed Option Response string 1 NRP B1 Test generator installed 2 NRP B2 Second channel interface installed 3 NRP B3 Battery installed 4 NRP B4 Ethernet interface installed 5 NRP B5 Four channel interface installed 6 NRP B6 Sensor A B rear socket 1144 1400 12 6 6 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands PRE 0
44. The frequency from the offset correction 10 000 dB from and the relative display from Q n A Rel 1022s 1 000 GHz gt To return the window to its normal size open the Windows menu with the key and press the Arrange softkey 1144 1400 12 2 10 E 2 R amp S NRP Window handling Window handling Up to four windows can be shown simultaneously on the R amp S NRP s display Each window can be con figured for a separate measurement The following examples show how to handle windows Q Opening creating zooming and closing windows Pressthe key twice EARI windows Measurement File system A display window indicating the result from sensor A in Wr Gr ipo 0 00 dBm appears 1 000 GHz 204 cm gt Using the topmost rocker switch or the cursor keys eos lt gt select the Windows menu Close Expand The Windows softkey can be used to select which window Yess d the functions in the Windows menu and in the Measurement menu will act on Y Tip The cursor keys can in most cases be used instead of the rocker switch to select windows This also applies to opened dialog boxes Windows 0D Select window 1 0234 do d 1144 1400 12 2 11 E 2 Window handling R amp S NRP The third softkey is now labelled Close Expand Close Expand Close Expand gt Press the Expand key Sensor PIE Measurement File System The window e
45. Title bar Frequency Dialog boxes with tabs Check boxes Global L Option fields e gt o o o ContAy Burst T slot T gate Scope Editing fields Nominal Width 500 000 us Entry active Nominal Width NEQNE Us Not active 1144 1400 12 Dialog boxes have a title bar which displays the name of the dialog box and the symbol which is a reminder that the dialog box can be closed with the key Caution Settings made in dialog boxes are immedi ately set on the R amp S NAP in other words you do not need to close the dialog box to ac tivate the settings in the box Channel specific settings are made in a special page in a super ordinate dialog box In the top row of the dialog box there are tabs which you can use to switch between pages Channels which do not have a sensor connected and channels that have not been installed are shown in grey and cannot be selected Check boxes are used to activate and de activate func tions You can toggle between the two states by pressing the appropriate softkey Option fields contain groups of mutually exclusive operat ing modes When you press the left hand side of the rocker switch the next option on the left is selected When you press the right hand side of the rocker switch the next option on the right is selected In the System UO dialog box option fields are assigned to only one side of a rocker switch It is therefore only possi ble to scroll through in
46. commands are sometimes indicated in their long form so that their meaning is easier to understand The R amp S NRP makes no distinction between upper case and lower case letters they are only used to distinguish between the short and long form The simplest measurement The simplest way to obtain a measured value is to use the high level measurement command MEAS which configures sensor 1 in the ContAv mode starts a measurement and always outputs a result that is stored in the output queue The following settings are performed INIT CONT OFF TRIG SOUR IMM e TRIG COUN 1 RIG DEL AUTO ON ENS AVER STAT ON ENS AVER COUN AUTO ON ENS AVER COUN AUTO TYPE RES R H e D 0 0 WN ENS AVER COUN AUTO RES 3 CALC MAT SENS1 e CALC REL STAT OFF The command can also be used with a list of parameters which are separated by a comma and allow the measurement accuracy and the addressed sensor to be selected MEAS DEF lt resolution gt lt source_list gt The first parameter should always assume the DEF value it is ignored and is available only for reasons of compatibility The second parameter may assume the values 1 2 3 and 4 It specifies the number of places up to which the measurement result should be noise free With linear units the setting corresponds to the number of significant places that are noise free with logar
47. e are available as a query only Indentations The various levels of the SCPI command hierarchy are shown in the table by indentations to the right The lower the level the greater the indentation It should be noted that the complete notation of the command always includes the higher levels Example SENSe 1 4 AVERage COUNt is shown in the table as follows SENSe 1 4 firstlevel AVERage Second level COUNt third level In the individual description the command is shown in full length An example of the command is indicated at the end of the description 1 to 4 or 1 to 8 This notation indicates the numeric suffix of a command With the SENSe commands the suffix may assume the values 1 to 4 with the CALCulate and high level measurement commands the values 1 to 8 If the suffix is not specified it is internally set to 1 1144 1400 12 6 1 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP for commands for parameters 1144 1400 12 Keywords and parameters in square brackets may be omitted in compound commands This will not change the meaning of the command Therefore not only is there a short and a long form for the commands distinguished here by lowercase and uppercase letters but also a short form which is created by omitting keywords For instance the following commands are identical SENSe 1 4 CORRection GAIN2 INPut MAGNitude 1 ENSe1 CORRection GAIN2 1INPut M
48. ie aen ooa date neo abt sus 4 19 Meas remerit ranges TT 4 22 Eitect Of the HE SOUICO 5 nnus genet uiis dedecore iibtg ee re AEAT ERRES 4 23 Trigger settings ie ei I pite ee pte recie ennt 4 24 Trigger sequence Control 4 26 Displaying measurement results Windows menu 4 27 Window labellirig 22er rete IE Re eere tione edible dines de le e d 4 27 Arranging WindOWS c c 4 27 The windows Men PE 4 27 Selecting a WINGOW a a a a Taaa aa aE a E aaae a aAa Eea EE E aa o Ea EAE ioiai 4 27 USING Blat VE 4 28 Opening windows Open 4 28 Creating windows nft 4 28 Closing windows Close 4 28 Expanding windows Expanmd esent 4 29 Arranging windows Arrange sess 4 29 Selecting the result display mode 4 29 Configuring the result display sssssssssssessesesee eene nn nente 4 30 Setting the resolution Resolution sess 4 30 Setting the analog scale Scale sse 4 31 Scrolling between timeslots Timeslot Di 4 31 1144 1400 12 I 4 1 E 2 Table of Contents Chapter 4 R amp S NRP Configuring measurements Measurement menu 4 32 Measurement wIndOWS resna iine ede ttt ett tiki ed enee eege idee reest eer 4 32 The Measurement Menis aita AS ASTEN tnit nnn tren snnt rins nnns nnne estne 4 32 Selecting a WIndOW e cte n tue em Ea rota ro P aec rer tees 4 32 Selecting a measurement function esses ener snnt nnne 4 33 Functions and
49. lt NRf gt This command enters frequencies in the first column of the table selected with MEM TABL SEL Existing data for frequencies will be overwritten The number of frequencies should match the number of offset values If the number of frequencies differs from the number of offset values the shorter column length will be used SENS 1 4 FREQ can be used to determine a frequency for which a correction factor is then defined by means of the offset table If the exact frequency selected is not in the table the values in the table are interpolated If the selected frequency is outside the specified frequency range the frst or last offset value of the table is selected Interpolation is linear in the units HZ and DB Unit Hz RST values Tables are not changed in case of a RST 1144 1400 12 6 41 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP MEMory TABLe FREQuency POINts Returns the number of entries lines in the table selected with MEM TABL SEL lt name gt MEMory TABLe GAIN MAGNitude NRf NRf This command enters offset values in the second column of the table selected with MEM TABL SEL Existing data for offset values will be overwritten The number of frequencies should match with the number of offset values If the number of frequencies differs from the number of offset values the shorter column length will be used A frequency can be determined with SENS 1 4 F
50. sse 6 5 TDN2 IDeNtificatior QUERY ce rt EE 6 5 IST2 Individual Status Query TE 6 6 OPC OPeration Complete AA 6 6 OPC OPeration Complete Query sssssssssssssseneeeennee nennen nenne 6 6 oPT2 sOPTi On TT 6 6 PRE 0 255 Parallel Poll Enable Register Commande 6 7 PRE Parallel Poll Enable Register Ouer 6 7 PSC 0 1 Power On Status Clear Commande 6 7 PSC Power On Status Clear Query ssssssssssssseseeeeee enne 6 7 BOD 0 P9 KEE 6 7 sRSTenBesebio s secs uo ec rte cu th ceed A ets eat oe 6 7 EE 6 7 SRE 0 255 Service Request Enable eene 6 8 SRE Service Request Enable Query sssssssssseee eee 6 8 EENEG 6 8 ETRGCITIggot TEE 6 8 ATST2cSelb Iest QUOrV m deti c ied eee ot ee REP RR ERE 6 8 FKWAST M ET 6 8 1144 1400 12 l 6 1 E 3 Table of Contents 6 R amp S NRP SCP I Commands i bu a ae ei Item e ie decet e Ice uie e 6 9 Overview of Command Gvsiems entente ens 6 9 High Level Measurement Commands CONFigure MEASure READ and FETCh 6 11 CALCulate Configuration of Calculate Blocke 6 21 CALD ANON TE 6 29 Bid EP 6 30 FORMAL sauerei Beli ide id dn ade a 6 38 ME MON i nentes tea ve Ee dine sten n set 6 39 QUEDA 6 44 SENSe Sensor Commande 6 50 SERVICES EE 6 66 Rp DUS x 6 68 SYST OM divi e cette coti ar esie te ue e Pte ure ee ee et ha Pe cole e e Pere d 6 93 Hier elegy 6 103
51. 01 0 001 dp u27 Up 3 4 Default value 3 0 01 Specifies the limit up to which the measurement result should be free of noise The R amp S NRP tries to set an adequate window for the averaging filter This does not affect the accuracy of the measured data The window can only be set if automatic setting of the filter window has not been disabled by the user SENSe AVERage COUNt AUTO OFF Since the automatic setting is activated by CONF and MEAS as a default the user normally does not need to alter this setting 6 18 E 3 R amp S NRP source list tslot width no slots start exclude end exclude 1144 1400 12 Remote Control Commands gt SENSe 1 4 AVERage COUNt AUTO RESolution 1 2 2 4 gt SENSe 1 4 TRACe AVERage COUNt AUTO RESolution 1 2 3 4 and gt DISPlay WINDow 1 4 RESolution 1 0 1 0 01 0 001 Example If resolution is setto3 or 0 01 three significant points are assigned to the value when it is displayed on a linear scale When a log scale is used 2 places are displayed after the decimal point Value range 8n em Gm Default value 81 or 81 82 n and m may assume the values 1 2 3 or 4 With this list sensors are assigned to the primary and possibly to the secondary channel of a calculate block The number for each sensor is preceded by the character and the entire expression is enclosed in
52. 1144 1400 12 6 89 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP Service Request Use of the Hierarchical Structure Under certain conditions the device may send a service request SRQ to the controller This service request usually causes an interrupt at the controller to which the controller program can respond by suitable actions As shown in Fig 6 11 an SRQ will always be triggered if one or several of the bits 2 3 4 5 or 7 have been set in the Status Byte Register and enabled in the SRE Each of these bits combines the information from another register from the error queue or the output buffer If the ENABle registers of the status registers are set accordingly any bit in any status register will be able to trigger an SRQ To utilize the possibilities of the service request all bits in the enable registers SRE and ESE should be set to 1 Examples see also Fig 6 11 Use the oPC command to generate an SRQ gt Set bit O operation complete in the ESE Set bit 5 ESB in the SRE The device generates an SRQ upon completion of its settings Informing the controller by an SRQ that a measurement has been completed gt Set bit 7 summary bit of Status Operation Register in the SRE Set bit 4 measuring in the ENABle register of the Status Operation Register Set bit 4 in the NTRansition register of the Status Operation Register to ensure that the transition of measuring bit 4 from 1 to 0 end of measurement is
53. 30 PCT duty cycle of 30 NIT ETCh S S E F 1144 1400 12 Annex 1 19 E 2 Annex Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP e Reflection coefficient of the source source gamma J Reflections at the power source may distort the result If the reflection coefficient of the source is known it can be specified for the measured value correction via command path SENS SGAM Example RST SENS SGAM CORR STAT ON considers the reflection coefficient 7 of the source SENS SGAM MAGN 0 01 magnitude of T SENS SGAM PHAS 179 phase angle of 7 I F ETCh Configuration of CALCulate blocks The function of the CALCulate blocks has already been explained Its most important task is the calculation and provision of measurement results Calculation function and relative measurement The calculation functions mentioned in connection with high level commands are internally implemented via commands CALC MATH and CALC REL STAT Keyword for selecting a calculation function with Corresponding low level commands n m 1 2 3 4 high level commands DIFF Difference CALC MATH SENSn SENSm REL STAT OFF DIFF REL Difference with reference value CALC MATH SENSn SENSm REL STAT ON RAT Ratio CALC MATH SENSn SENSm REL STAT OFF RAT REL Ratio with reference value CALC MATH SENSn SENSm REL STAT ON SWR Standing wave ratio CALC MATH SWR SENSn REL STAT OFF RLO
54. 4 POWer TGATe 1 4 OFFSet TIME float value This command is used for configuring the Timegate mode It specifies the start of one of the four gates sweeps relative to the delayed trigger point If this value is negative the gate starts before the trigger point This is possible because the sensor stores samples of the measured powers and can thus transfer the start of a measurement to the past In manual operation the start and duration of the gates can also be defined graphically if the sensor is operated in the Scope mode Unit s Value range depending on sensor RST value depending on sensor Power Trigger event Trigger level 4 Delayed trigger point n ime Trigger delay SENS TRAC1 OFFS TIME ENS TRAC1 TIME i SENS TRAC2 OFFS TIME SENS TRAC2 TIME Figure 6 8 Timing parameters for the Timegate mode SENSe 1 4 POWer TGATe SELect 1 2 3 4 This command selects one of the four gates in which the average power is measured if the Timegate mode is selected RST value 1 SENSe 1 4 POWer TGATe 1 4 TIME float value This command is used for configuring the Timegate mode It specifies the duration of one of the four gates sweeps relative to the delayed trigger point In manual operation the start and duration of the gates can also be defined graphically if the sensor is operated in the Scope mod
55. 4 Trigger settings 2 20 E 2 R amp S NRP Measuring av burst power Burst Av mode Measuring av burst power Burst Av mode An R amp S NRP Z1x or R amp S NRP Z2x diode sensor is required for this measurement To make measure ments possible a pulsed RF signal with a pulse repetition frequency not exceeding 10 kHz should be available The R amp S NRP Z1x and R amp S NRP Z2x sensors have two measurement modes for RF burst power Burst Av and Timeslot An external trigger is not required in the Burst Av mode the sensor automatically determines the trig ger point from the measured signal It is also not necessary to specify the width of the burst as the sen sor determines the end of the burst automatically Q Setting the burst mode gt Connect an R amp S NRP Z1x or R amp S NRP Z2x sensor to connector A on the R amp S NRP and apply a pulsed signal with a level between 10 dBm and 10 dBm gt Press the key twice A measurement window is now available gt Change to the Sensor menu and select Mode When the Mode dialog box opens select Scope gt Once in the Scope mode see section e Scope make sure that the sensor detects a signal and relia bly triggers gt Change back to the Sensor menu and select Mode When the Mode dialog box opens select Burst The burst mode parameters are displayed at the bottom of the dialog box To exclude the pulse build up and decay phases from the Burst measur
56. 41 4 42 4 43 4 44 lee e Ne EE 4 2 Frequency dialog el 4 3 Zer Caldialog Ce EE 4 3 Zeroing error m ssdgi ne ieena ea e a a a 4 4 Zeto GCal diag DOX a ihrer ree heu tu rp Pete 4 4 Test Repor dalog DOr ci cnet eia reitera anis 4 5 Config Test dialog OX cii o ee doe e ee ori ced aee eg e pe deat 4 6 Display dialog HOX EE 4 6 Sensor mMenU EE 4 7 Modedialog BOX srin aA hte ws 4 7 Mode dialog box Normal mode nennen nennen snnt 4 8 Mode dialog box Burst mode 4 11 Mode dialog box Timeslot mode eene 4 13 Mode dialog box Timegate mode 4 14 Offset dialog ee EE 4 16 Offset dialog box Table echter steet eec ient nihit eei eta hoa hh De nna a a 4 18 Filter dialog DOX EE 4 20 Auto Filter dialog DOX 2 cac iE ee N E eod 4 21 Range dialog DOX aate add e oo be oe eise 4 22 RF Source dialog DOX EE 4 23 Trigger dialog box s obe dieere eee di 4 24 Trigger Advanced dialog box ssessessneeeeeneeen nene nnne nennen 4 25 Windows menu Window softkey eesssssssssssssseseseenenne eene nnne 4 27 Windows menu softkeys for controlling the windows 4 28 Window menu softkeys for controlling the display Mode sssssseeesssessssrreserrssrene 4 29 Windows menu display specific sofikeys nne 4 30 Meter Scaling dialog Dos 4 31 Windows menu softkey for scrolling between Dmeslots AA 4 31 Measurement MENU 3 a T E E 4 32 Fuine amp Unit dialog box iiie deae ated abate edes 4 33 Func amp Uni
57. AVER COUN 4 permanently sets filter length to 4 2 NIT ETCh Hj Ho 0 0 1144 1400 12 Annex 1 17 E 2 Annex Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP Automatic filter setting SENS AV noise component should remain below a specific threshold NSR or the measurement result should be specific accuracy RES To avoid stable up to a ER COUN AUTO TYPE NSR R ES is used to select whether the long measurement times SENS AVER COUNT AUTO MTIM can be used to specify a maximum measurement time The maximum filter length is set such that the measurements do not exceed this time even if the desired stability has not yet been obtained Example RST ENS AVER ENS AVER ENS AVER ENZ AVER NIT ETCh Pio o o nm Example RST SENS AVER SENS AVER SENS AVER S S i F ENS AVER ENS AVER NIT ETCh STAT COUN COUN COUN STAT COUN COUN COUN COUN ON AU AU AU ON AU AU AU AU TO ON TO TYPE RES activates filtering Switches on filter length automatic mode sets automatic mode to RI ESolution O RES 3 maintains 3 places noise free in the result activates filtering TO ON switches on filter length automatic mode TO TYPE NSR sets automatic mode to NSRat io TO NSR 0 01 DB maximum noise component in the res
58. Auto Config Normal SENS 1 4 AVER COUN AUTO TYPE RES In Scope mode SENS 1 4 TRAC AVER COUN AUTO TYPE RES Menu item in manual control SCPI command in short form Sensor Filter2 Auto Config Fixed Noise SENS 1 4 AVER COUN AUTO TYPE NSR In Scope mode SENS 1 4 TRAC AVER COUN AUTO TYPE NSR Sensor gt Filter gt Auto Config Fixed Noise Ref Timeslot SENS 1 4 1 AVER COUN AUTO SLOT In Scope mode SENS 1 4 TRAC AVER COUN AUTO SLOT Sensor gt Filter gt Auto Config Fixed Noise Noise Content SENS 1 4 AVER COUN AUTO NSR In Scope mode SENS 1 4 TRAC AVER COUN AUTO NSR Sensor gt Filter gt Auto Config Fixed Noise Max Settl Time SENS 1 4 AVER COUN AUTO MTIM In Scope mode SENS 1 4 TRAC AVER COUN AUTO MTIM Sensor Range Auto SENS 4 RANG AUTO Sensor Range Path SENS 4 RANG Sensor Range User def d Crossover SENS 1 4 RANG CLEV Sensor Range Level Sensor RF Source Source T considered SENS 4 SGAM CORR STAT Sensor RF Source Phase of Source T SENS 4 SGAM PHAS Sensor2 RF Source Magnitude of Source T SENS 1 4 SGAM Sensor Trigger Delay TRIG 1 4 DEL 1144 1400 12 5 18 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Fundamentals Sensor2 Trigger Source TRIG 1 4 SOUR TRIG 1 4 SLOP Sensor Trigger Level TRIG 1 4 LEV Sensor2 Trigger Advanced Holdoff TRIG 1 4 HOLD Sensor2 Trigger Advanced Hyseresis TRIG 1 4 HYST
59. Azerbaijan Liaison Office Baku ISR Plaza 340 Nizami Str 370000 Baku siehe see Denmark BIL Consortium Ltd Corporation Office House No 95 A Block F Road No 4 Banani Dhaka 1213 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ BELGIUM N V Excelsiorlaan 31 Bus 1 1930 Zaventem ROHDE amp SCHWARZ DO BRASIL LTDA Av Alfredo Egidio de Souza Aranha n 177 1 andar Santo Amaro 04726 170 Sao Paulo SP GKL Equipment PTE Ltd Jurong Point Post Office P 0 Box 141 Singapore 916405 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ OSTERREICH Representation Office Bulgaria 39 Fridtjof Nansen Blvd 1000 Sofia siehe see Slovenia 994 12 93 31 38 994 12 93 03 14 RS Azerbaijan RUS Rohde Schwarz com 880 2 881 06 53 880 2 882 82 91 32 2 721 50 02 432 2 725 09 36 info rsb rohde schwarz com 55 11 56 44 86 11 general 55 11 56 44 86 25 sales 55 11 56 44 86 36 sales brazil rsdb rohde schwarz com 65 6 276 06 26 65 6 276 06 29 gkleqpt singnet com sg 359 2 963 43 34 359 2 963 21 97 rohdebg rsoe rohde schwarz com Adressen Addresses Canada Canada Chile China China China China China China China China Croatia Cyprus Czech Republic ROHDE amp SCHWARZ CANADA Inc 555 March Rd anata Ontario K2K 2M5 EKTRONIX CANADA Inc est and Measurement 4929 Place Olivia Saint Laurent Pq ontreal H4R 2V6 DYMEO Ltda Av Larrain 6666 Santiago ROHDE amp
60. CC d d A B C D CD ded Normal C d Fixed Noise C_ d Noise Content C d d Max Settling Time C_ d d Ref Timeslot C d d 1144 1400 12 Data acquisition and parameters Sensor menu Normal 4 Fixed Noise Ref Timeslot Noise Content a 0 1000 dB Max Settl Time 30 00 s Fig 4 18 Auto Filter dialog box Tabs for selecting the sensor Selects the autofilter Normal mode Remote Control SENSe 1 4 AVERage COUNC AUTO TYPE RESolution Select the autofilter Fixed Noise mode Remote Control SENSe 1 4 AVERage COUNC AUTO TYPE RESolution Selects the proportion of intrinsic noise in the measured result Specifi cally Noise Content gives the permitted relative variation of the result which may not be exceeded for 95 of the observation time Remote Control SENSe 1 4 AVERage COUNt AUTO NSRatio float value Specifies an upper limit for the settling time in the Fixed Noise mode Limit exceeded Remote Control SENSe 1 4 AVERage COUNt AUTO MTIMe float value Specifies the timeslot to which autofilter is applied when measure ments are being performed in the Timeslot mode This parameter is not available in the other measurement modes Remote Control SENSe 1 4 AVERage COUNt AUTO SLOT int value 4 21 E 2 Data acquisition and parameters Sensor menu R amp S NRP Measurement ranges Sensor gt
61. Control Commands SYSTem With the aid of the SYSTem system administrative device settings can be made and queried This includes list of error messages IEC IEEE bus address resetting the R amp S NRP setting the date and time audible signals version numbers of hardware and software setting the system speed Table 6 31 Commands of the SENSe system Query only ediate No query ify ERload ON OFF KEY ON OFF STOP No query IME NRf No query COMMunicate GPTB SELF ADDRess 0 30 No query DATE year month day INFO lt string gt Query only ERRor Query only EY lt NR1 gt character value No query PRESet No query SENSor 1 4 INFO lt string gt Query only RESet 5 No query TEST Query only SPEed NORMal FAST No query STANdard CATalog No query PRESet string No query PWSettings ON OFF TRIGger SOURCe INT EXT TIME lt hour gt lt minute gt lt second gt VERSion Query only SYSTem BEEPer IMMediate Generates an audible signal via the built in loudspeaker The duration of the signal is set with SYST BEEP TIME Frequency and volume cannot be changed The signal is only output if it is not switched off with SYS BEEP STAT OFF SYSTem BEEPer NOTify OVERload ON OFF Determines if the R amp S NRP shall emit an acoustic signal w
62. Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 GAT OFFS TIME NRf Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 GAT SE 1 SENS 1 4 GAT TIME NRf Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 TSL COUNC NR1 Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 TSL WIDTh NRf Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 BURS DTOL NRf Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 RANG d ves WS Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 RANG AUT O OFF Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 RANG CLEV NRf Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 SAMP FREQ1 FREQ2 Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 SMO STAT O OFF Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 AC RANG Poze il 3 Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 AC RANG AUT O OFF Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 AC RANG CLEV NRf Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 RAC AVER O OFF Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 RAC AVER COU lt NR1 gt Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 RAC AVER COUN AUTO OFF Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 RAC AVER COUN AUTO MTIMe NRf Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 RAC AVER COUN AUTO RE NRf Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 RAC AVER COUN AUTO POI NR1 Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 RAC AVER COUN AUTO NSR NRf Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 TRAC AVER COUN AUTO TYPE RES NSR Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 RAC AVER TCO OV and SYST PRE REP RST SENS 1 4 RAC OFFS TIME NRf Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 TRAC POINt NR1 Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 RAC TIME NRf Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 TRAC REAL ON OFF Depending on sensor SENS 1 4
63. Operation Calibrating Status Register Operation Measuring Status Register Operation Trigger Status Register Operation Sense Status Register Operation Lower Limit Fail Status Register Operation Upper Limit Fail Status Register Except for the Standard Event Status Register each of these registers comprises five subregisters with which the function of the register can be configured These subregisters are called EVENt CONDition NTRansition PTRansition ENABle The registers are 16 bits wide but only the lower 15 bits are used This prevents problems with programs that cannot handle integers without sign For the sake of conciseness not all commands are listed here For a complete gt List of Remote Control Commands see page 6 109 The STATus system uses the following types of commands Queries return a decimal value between 0 and 32767 2 1 Configuration set the ENABle PTRansition NTRansition registers of a status register and commands thus determine the response of the register to status changes in the R amp S NRP 1144 1400 12 6 68 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands Queries Table 6 13 Queries for status registers STATus DEVice Device Status OPERation Operation Status CALibrating SUMMary Operation Calibrating LLFail SUMMary Operation Lower Limit Fail LFail SUMMary Operation Upper Limit Fail EASuring SUMMary Operation Measuring SENSe SUMMary Operation Sense TRIGger
64. Points RAC POIN Scope Realtime REAL Trigger Delay Trigger Level Trigger Source Trigger Slope Trigger Holdoff Trigger Hysteresis 1144 1400 12 6 129 E 3 Remote Control Commands Sensor parameter Sensor Mode NADC DOWNLINK Remote control command in short form R amp S NRP POW AVG Integration Time 40 ms Duty Cycle Correction ENS DCYC STAT OFF Smoothing ENS SMO Trigger Source 1144 1400 12 RIG SOUR 6 130 E 3 R amp S NRP Sensor parameter Sensor Mode NADC UPLINK Remote control command in short form Remote Control Commands POW XTIM Integration Time APER 40 ms Duty Cycle SDCYC 16 267 Duty Cycle Correction DCYC STAT ON Smoothing SMO Dropout Tolerance BURST DTOL Exclude Time Start IM EXCL Exclude Time End IM EXCL Number Of Timeslots 1 COUN Timeslot Width 2WIDT 6 667 ms Timegate Offset OFFS TIMI 1 130 us 2 20 130 ms Timegate Time 1 6 390 ms 2 6 390 ms Scope Offset Time RAC OFFS 500 us Scope Capture Time RAC TIMI 42 ms Scope Number Of Points RAC POIN 312 Scope Realtime REAL OFF Trigger Del
65. Range R amp S NRP sensors do not have measurement ranges in the conventional sense Instead the R amp S NRP Z1x and R amp S NRP Z2x multipath diode sensors have several measurement paths with dif ferent sensitivities which are always simultaneously active The Auto range function automatically se lects the most suitable paths i e those that are neither overdriven or underdriven The final measure ment result for the crossover of the two measurement paths is derived from the measured values for both paths There are only a few cases where it makes sense to intervene in this process e g test sig nals with a large peak to average ratio To prevent measurement paths which have been overdriven by signal peaks from being included in the evaluation the User defined Crossover function can be used to reduce levels in the measurement path crossover The effect of setting the Level parameter to 6 dB for example is to reduce the crossover by 6 dB This corresponds to an increase in drive range of the same magnitude which reduces measure ment deviations due to modulation to 25 of the original value While large signal characteristics improve as the crossover level drops the effects of zero deviations and intrinsic noise on the result become more marked The reason for this is that above the crossover ranges the less sensitive of the two measurement paths is underdriven This is why there is little point in changing the crossover level by
66. SUMMary Operation Trigger QUEStionable Questionable Status CALibration SUMMary Questionable Calibration POWer SUMMary Questionable Power WINDow SUMMary Questionable Window Configuration Commands If the status register queries are extended by the character strings EVENt CONDition ENABle PTRansition Or NTRansition without a question mark at the end the respective subregisters can be accessed The enable and transition registers can also be set with these commands The effect of the status reporting system can thus be adapted to user requirements The parameters have the following meaning lt status_register_summary_command gt pe of the status register queries from Table 6 13 is to be used here without a terminating question mark lt NR1 gt Is a decimal value between 0 and 32767 The values DEFAULT MINIMUM and MAXIMUM are not permissible lt non decimal numeric Is a non decimal value in one of the following formats where the decimal value must be between 0 and 32767 e binary e g 60111010101001110 or 4B0111010101001110 e hexadecimal e g h754e or H754E e octal e g 4972516 or 075216 Table 6 14 Commands for the configuration of status registers ERC status register summary command EVENt Query only CONDition Query only ENABle 0 32767 non decimal numeric NTRansition 0 32767 non decimal num
67. Slope POS Trigger Holdoff 7 480 ms Trigger Hysteresis 1144 1400 12 6 141 3 dB E 3 Remote Control Commands Sensor parameter Sensor Mode CDMA2000 Remote control command in short form R amp S NRP POW AVG Integration Time 80 ms Duty Cycle Correction DCYC STAT OFF Smoothing SMO OFF Filter AVER COUN AUTO OFF Filter Length AVER COUN Trigger Source 1144 1400 12 SOUR 6 142 E 3 R amp S NRP Table of Contents Annex Chapter I Table of Contents Programming Measurements with the RaGNbPp eects Li Measuring with high level commande A 1 1 The simplest measurement eeeeeeceeeteeeeeeneeeeeeeaaeeeceeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeseeaeeeseeaaeeeeeeaeeeeseaas 1 1 Relative measurements eeesesesssseseses ni keera nda riide inkuin ARAKS Tae nennt rennen enin 1 2 Processing the results of two sensorsg essen enne 1 3 Selecting a measurement mode esten nre 1 4 Selecting the output unit for measured values 1 6 Division oft MEAS eee ere ee evt tete dened dee cenae dw eh eee deg eee Ly ea ge 1 7 Trigger state system eee ete teer ente dee dne oe eee dvo eee dne o uu 1 9 Logic relationship of command systems SENSe CALCulate and UNIT 1 11 Measuring with low level commande A 1 12 The simplest measurement sedurre ne ar aeea en ARAKA A
68. TRIGger Sl EQUence 1 12 The R amp S NRP does not recognize the SEQUence header and uses no TRIGger command globally but only on a sensor by sensor basis If TRIGger or SENSe commands are to have a global effect the ALL header must be used instead of the numeric suffix UNIT POWer The R amp S NRP recognizes the units w DBM and DBUV UNIT POWer RATio The R amp S NRP recognizes the units DB DPCT and O AC Agilent recognizes the keyword AC of some high level commands and SENSe commands CONFigure READ MEASure FETCh SCALar POWer AC RELative DIFFerence DIFFerence RELative RATio RATio RELative SENSe POWer AC RANGe AUTO The R amp S NRP also recognizes these commands but AVG should be used instead of AC since R amp S NRP sensors eventually also measure DC components and the designation in the R amp S NRP is not used in the sense of SCPI 1144 1400 12 6 123 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP Interfaces IEC IEEE Bus Interface The R amp S NRP is fitted with an IEC IEEE bus interface as standard The connector in line with IEEE 488 is located on the rear panel A controller can be connected to this interface for remote control A shielded cable is used for the connection Characteristics of the Interface e 8 bit parallel data transmission e Bidirectional data transmission e Three wire handshake e Data transmission rate up to 350 Kbyte s e Connection of
69. Trigger Slope Trigger Holdoff Trigger Hysteresis 1144 1400 12 6 138 E 3 R amp S NRP Sensor parameter Sensor Mode Bluetooth DH1 Remote control command in short form Remote Control Commands POW XTIM Integration Time APER 1 25 ms Duty Cycle SDCYC 29 28 Duty Cycle Correction DCYC STAT ON Smoothing SMO OFF Dropout Tolerance BURST DTOL 366 us Exclude Time Start IM EXCL 10 us Exclude Time End IM EXCL 15 us Timegate Offset 1 10 us 2 660 us Timegate Time 1 341 us 2 341 us Scope Offset Time OFFS TIMI 30 us Scope Capture Time TIMI 1 280 ms Scope Number Of Points 312 Scope Realtime OFF Trigger Delay 0s Trigger Level 30 dBm Trigger Source INT Trigger Slope POS Trigger Holdoff 2 480 ms Trigger Hysteresis 1144 1400 12 6 139 3 dB E 3 Remote Control Commands Sensor parameter Sensor Mode Bluetooth DH3 Remote control command in short form R amp S NRP POW XTIM Integration Time APER 2 50 ms Duty Cycle SDCYC 64 88 Duty Cycle Correction DCYC STAT ON Smoothing SMO OFF Dropout Tolerance BURST DTOL 1 622 ms Exclude Time
70. W DBUV UNIT 1 8 POWer RATio DB DPCT O The following tables show the mathematical function used to determine the measurement result This function depends on the measurement function and the measurement unit that is set and is defined as either not relative to Relative Off or relative to Relative On a stored reference value Relative measurements page 4 39 Absolute power measurement Relative Off Ww dBm dBuV Primary P P EE Secondary 10 d 20 d I4 luV Power ratio measurement Relative Off dB A96 1 Ratio A B 10 di 100 E LA Pg Pg P SWR A B P M E P 1 22 P Rcoeff A B P p Pa RLoss A B 10 d Pg 1144 1400 12 4 36 E 2 R amp S NRP Configuring measurements Measurement menu Sum and difference of power measurements Relative Off W dBm dBLV Sum A B P P wi Ed P P Z aw uA mag Iess EE SC sw eL Measurement result relative to reference value Relative On 1 dB A96 Primary P P P E 101g 100 1 Secondary P d P P Sum P XP Diff ES 101g 222 Arg tace od Pr Pr Pr Ratio P Pa P P3 P P VERANO 101g 100 1 x x Px Py R Py R Py R P Power P4 Power in channel A forward power Pp Power in channel B reverse power P Reference power 1144 1400 12 Reference power ratio 4 37 E 2 Configuring measurements
71. a controller program the error queue should be queried at regular intervals since it also registers faulty commands from the controller to the device 1144 1400 12 6 91 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP Initialization of the SCPI Status Registers The commands RST DCL and SYSTem PRESet as well as powering on the device also affect the status reporting system Table 6 30 contains the various commands and events causing a reset of the status reporting system None of the commands with the exception of RST and SYSTem PRESet affects the functional device settings In particular DCL does not clear the device settings Table 6 30 Initialization of device status Result Power On B o DCL SDC ower n Device Clear RST Or PEE Selected Device SYSTem PRESet Clear Effect 1 Clear STB Status Byte and ESR Standard Event Status Register Clear SRE Service Request Enable and ESE Standard Event Status Enable STATus PRESet Clear PPE Parallel Poll Enable Clear EVEN register Clear ENABle register of all OPERation and QUEStionable registers Fill PTRansition register with 1 delete NTRansition register Clear error event queue Clear output queue Stop command processing parser and clear input queue 1 Any command sent to a non empty output queue causes the error 410 Query interrupted 1144 1400 12 6 92 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote
72. amp ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Test and Measurement Division Operating Manual Power Meter R amp S NRP 1143 8500 02 Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany 1144 1400 12 04 1 Dear Customer R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners 1144 1400 12 04 2 R amp S NRP Supplement Supplement to Operating Manual R amp S NRP 1144 1400 12 04 Dear Customer Your power meter is equipped with firmware version 2 03 00 A number of functions have been modified since the printing of the manual and the modifications are described on the following pages Ethernet For remote control via a TCP IP based LAN the R amp S NRP can be fitted with an optional 10 100BaseT Ethernet interface option R amp S NRP B4 The socket is located on the rear panel of the R amp S NRP Via this interface a controller can remote control the R amp S NRP by means of the power meter s SCPI commands using the VXI11 protocol TCP IP instrument protocol specification version 1 0 released on 17 July 1995 by the VXIbus Consortium Ethernet Ethernet connection socket 1144 1400 12 04 Supplement 1 E 1 Supplement R amp S NRP VXI11 The VXI11 protocol uses ONC RPC open network computing remote procedure calls making it possible to call R amp S NRP functions at the source code level as if they were running locally on the controller The following figure
73. an 8 bit integer with a sign 128 to 127 RST value none OUTPut ROSCillator CALibration WRIte lt NR1 gt lt NR1 gt Sets the test generator option R amp S NRP B1 Refer to the following table for the meaning of the two parameters lst parameter NR1 01 Generator on off 2nd parameter 0 on 1 off 02 Power stage 2nd parameter 0 20 dBm 1 0 dBm 03 LED state 2nd parameter 0 off 1 on 0x02 blinking 04 Start of calibration 05 Setting of potentiometer 1 2nd parameter 128 to 127 06 Setting of potentiometer 2 2nd parameter 128 to 127 07 Setting of potentiometer 3 2nd parameter 128 to 127 08 Setting of potentiometer 4 2nd parameter 128 to 127 09 Confirm calibration 10 Abort calibration 2nd parameter NR1 Data if 1st parameter 01 02 03 05 06 07 or 08 0 if 1st parameter 04 09 or 10 RST Value none 1144 1400 12 6 47 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP OUTPut TTL 1 ACTive LOW HIGH Specifies whether the value set via OUTP TTL LVOL LOW or via OUTP TTL HVOL HIGH should be applied if the measured value causes a limit violation at the TTL output RST value LOW OUTPut TTL 1 FAIL LOW HIGH Specifies whether the value set via OUTP TTL LVOL HIGH or via OUTP TTL HVOL LOW should be applied if the measured value causes a limit violation at the TTL output RST value HIGH v v Note The OUTP TTL ACT and OUTP TTL FAIL commands are iden
74. buffered ContAv mode Unit Value range 1 400000 RST value depending on sensor SENSe 1 4 POWer AVG BUFFer STATe ON OFF Switches on the buffered ContAv mode after which data blocks rather than single measured values are then returned In this mode a higher data rate is achieved than in the non buffered ContAv mode The number of desired measured values is set with the SENSe 1 4 POWer ARR SIZE command RST value depending on sensor SENSe 1 4 POWer AVG RANGe 0 1 2 Selects a measurement range in which the corresponding sensor is to perform a measurement This setting will only become effective if SENS 1 4 RANG AUTO ON is set RST value depending on sensor SENSe 1 4 POWer AVG RANGe AUTO ON OFF Sets the automatic selection of a measurement range to ON or OFF RST value depending on sensor SENSe 1 4 POWer AVG RANGe AUTO CLEVel float value Sets the cross over level Shifts the transition ranges between the measurement ranges This may improve the measurement accuracy for special signals i e signals with a high crest factor Unit DB PCT Default unit DB Value range depending on sensor RST value depending on sensor 1144 1400 12 6 57 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP SENSe 1 4 POWer AVG SMOothing STATe ON OFF Activates digital lowpass filtering of the sampled video signal The problem of instable displ
75. client and the R amp S NRP enable free access from the controller to the R amp S NRP core and abort channels and vice versa interrupt channel As the ports for the channels are dynamically assigned reliable information regarding the port numbers used cannot be provided Remote control via VXI11 The following possibilities are suggested for remote controlling the R amp S NRP via VXI11 1 The simplest way to create remote control programs is by using a VISA virtual instruments software architecture implementation and creating the remote control programs under Visual Basic or C C VISA implementations provide an application programming interface API that offers all necessary functions Knowledge about VXI11 is helpful but not required The VISA resource identifier used to identify a VXI11 device has the following format TCPIP lt IP address INSTR The IP address is specified using the familiar dot notation e g 89 10 65 59 2 The TCP IP Instrument Protocol Specification VXI11 contains in annex C an RPCL description of the protocol The program rpcgen which is contained in any ONC RPC distribution is used to generate stubs which can be inserted into separate C programs where the functions from the following table can be called like ordinary library functions This procedure requires RPC programming skills 1144 1400 12 04 Supplement 3 E 1 Supplement R amp S NRP VXI11 protocol functions
76. com www response nsf newsletterpreselection As a subscriber you will receive information about your selection of Rohde amp Schwarz products about firmware extensions new drivers and application notes on a regular basis amp ROHDE amp SCHWARZ 1007 8684 14 02 00 Adressen Addresses FIRMENSITZ HEADQUARTERS Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstra amp e 15 D 81671 M nchen Postfach 80 14 69 D 81614 M nchen WERKE PLANTS Rohde amp Schwarz Messger tebau GmbH Riedbachstra e 58 D 87700 Memmingen Postfach 1652 D 87686 Memmingen Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Werk Teisnach Kaikenrieder Stra e 27 D 94244 Teisnach Postfach 1149 D 94240 Teisnach Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Dienstleistungszentrum K ln Graf Zeppelin Strafie 18 D 51147 K ln Postfach 98 02 60 D 51130 K ln OCHTERUNTERNEHMEN SUBSIDIARIES Rohde amp Schwarz Vertriebs GmbH hldorfstra amp e 15 D 81671 M nchen Postfach 80 14 69 D 81614 M nchen Ed Rohde amp Schwarz International GmbH hldorfstra amp e 15 D 81671 M nchen Postfach 80 14 60 D 81614 M nchen Rohde amp Schwarz Engineering and Sales GmbH hldorfstra amp e 15 D 81671 M nchen Postfach 80 14 29 D 81614 M nchen R amp S BICK Mobilfunk GmbH Fritz Hahne Str 7 D 31848 Bad M nder Postfach 2062 D 31844 Bad M nder Rohde amp Schwarz FTK GmbH WendenschlossstraRe 168 Haus 28 D 12557 Berlin
77. core An interrupt channel to the network instrument device is set up destroy intr chan core An existing interrupt channel to the network instrument device is cleared down device enable srq core The sending of service requests from the network instrument device to the network instrument controller is activated deactivated device intr srq interrupt This is the only function that the network instrument server calls from the network instrument device It signals a service request SRQ 1144 1400 12 04 Supplement 4 E 1 R amp S NRP Supplement USB If the R amp S NRP is connected to a controller via a USB 1 1 interface it logs on as a USBTMC USB test and measurement class device provided that USB is selected as a remote interface in the System Remote menu The USBTMC standard describes how IEEE 488 2 compatible communication with can be implemented via USB As with remote control via VXI11 the use of a VISA distribution that must include a USBTMC driver is recommended for remote control via USB The VISA resource identifier used to identify a USBTMC device has the following format USB lt vendor ID gt lt product ID gt lt serial number INSTR lt product ID gt 0x001b The serial number is a string that can be found in the System System Info menu In addition the VISA resource identifier appears on the R amp S NRP display if the USB remote interface is selected 1144 1400 12 04 Supplement 5 E 1
78. d SEI Windows Measurement File System Preset A 204 cm 1 000 GHz 1144 1400 12 gt Put the R amp S NRP into operation as described in Chapter 1 and connect a sensor to connector A gt Press the key The File menu appears The appearance of on a black background means that this function can also be started by pressing the key again gt Press the key again or the DE softkey The Setup dialog box disappears and the meter is in the preset state A display window indicates the result in dBm obtained with sensor A 2 2 E 2 R amp S NRP Zeroing the meter Measuring average power Cont Av mode A zero error correction is one of the meter s default settings This procedure should be repeated as and when necessary but primarily when the sensor reaches its operating temperature ZERO CAL Test atPower Ref Sensor only with pad Report Config ZERO CAL d Setting the frequency gt If the sensor is already connected to a signal source switch off the power Pressthe key The Zero Cal dialog box is displayed The appearance of KACHE on a black background means that this function can also be started by pressing the key again Press the key again or the Zero All soft key The correction measurement takes several seconds When completed a GO NOGO message is output The R amp S NRP must be set to the
79. deadtime However there is no point in selecting sampling window times very much smaller than 1 ms if to reduce display noise the averaging filter has to be used Due to the unavoidable deadtime of the order of a few 100 us per sampling window the measurement time does not drop in proportion to the reduction in sampling window time This may even mean that to obtain a well defined noise component in the result a greater measurement time overall is required if a sampling window that is too small is selected Smoothing modulated signals With smoothing turned off the samples within a sampling window are given equal weighting and averaged which turns the instrument into an integrating device As described above optimal reduction of fluctuations in the meas urement result due to modulation can be obtained if the size of the sampling window is an exact integer multiple of the modulation period If this is not the case modulation can have a considerable effect even if the sampling win dow is many times greater than the modulation period This situation can be improved considerably if the samples are weighted raised von Hann window before averaging This is like video filtering and is exactly what happens when smoothing is activated 1144 1400 12 4 10 E 2 R amp S NRP Data acquisition and parameters Sensor menu Measuring the average burst power Mode Burst Av The Burst Average mode is the simplest method of measuring the average burst p
80. default values The parameter lists are defined as follows ContAv mode Timeslot mode Burst mode ContAv mode with data buffering Scope mode expected value lt resolution gt lt source_list gt lt contav_parameter_list gt lt tslot_width gt lt no_slots gt lt start_exclude gt lt end_exclude gt lt expected_value gt lt resolution gt lt source_list gt lt timeslot_parameter_list gt lt dtolerance gt lt start_exclude gt lt end_exclude gt lt expected_value gt lt resolution gt lt source_list gt lt burst_parameter_list gt lt buffered_size gt lt expected_value gt lt resolution gt lt source_list gt lt buffered_parameter_list gt lt scope_size gt lt capture_time gt lt source_list gt lt scope_parameter_list gt The elements of the parameter lists have the following meaning expected value resolution 1144 1400 12 Value range 1oat value DEF According to the SCPI 1999 0 standard a value in the order of the expected measured value can be specified This allows the device to set an adequate measurement range This is not required in the R amp S NRP because the measurement is performed simultaneously in all measurement ranges Any value can therefore be specified for the expected value parameter especially the DEFault value The value is always ignored Value range 1 0 1 0
81. important sensor dependent setting is the selection of a measurement mode e ContAv mode SENS FUNC POW AVG Continuous measurement with only one integration time specified SENS APER within which the power is integrated as a measurement result Example RST S S I F ENS FUNC POW AVG ENS APER 10 MS NIT ETCh e Timeslot mode SENS FUNC POW TSL AVG After the trigger event the power is measured in ti meslots the number of which is defined with SENS TSL COUN The length of the timeslots is set with SENS TSL WIDT Example RST SENS FUNC POW TSL AVG SENS TSL WIDT 577 US SENS TSL COUN 8 TRIG SOUR EX INIT FETCh e BurstAv mode SENS FUNC POW BURS AVG Measurement of power pulses bursts with a d utomatic detection of the beginning and end of pulses The trigger source setting is ignored As escribed above the conditions for the detection of the pulse end can be set with commands SENS BURS DTOL and TRIG HYST Example RST SENS FUNC POW BURS AVG SENS BURS DTOL 100 MS TRIG HYST 3 DB INIT FETCh 1144 1400 12 Annex l 16 E 2 R amp S NRP Annex Remote Control Commands e Scope mode SENS FUNC XTIM POW This mode is used to determine a large number of measured values in succession The number of required measured values is set with SENS SWE POI and the total measurement time with SENS SWE
82. in the R amp S NRP The SYST STAN PRES command sets the listed parameters and if desired also configures front panel display windows if SYST STAN PWS ON RST Value none SYSTem STANdard PWSettings ON OFF If SYST STAN PRES lt string gt is used SYST STAN PWS Preserve Window Settings determines whether the window system is also configured with the calculate blocks OFF or whether exclusively sensor parameters are set ON RST value OFF SYSTem STANdard TRIGger SOURce INT EXT If SYST STAN PRES string is used this command determines whether the sensors are set to internal INT or external EXT triggering RST Value INT SYSTem TIME hour minute second Parameter Value range hour minute second Sets the time Since the R amp S NRP has no battery backed clock the time has to be reset if the clock was not set after the last power on of the R amp SNRP gt SvSTem DATE year month lt day gt SYSTem VERSion Returns a string that contains the current version number of the SCPI standard 1144 1400 12 6 102 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands TRIGger The trigger commands are used to configure the timing conditions for the start of a measurement Note When the sensors are connected to the R amp S NRP they inform the device e about the SENSe and TRiGger commands supported and about the value ranges for parameters
83. instrument always triggers INTernal even if TRIG SOUR has a different setting If a trigger signal is to be routed to the instrument rear panel via the external trigger connector the trigger source has to be configured with TRIG SOUR EXT RST TRIG SOUR EXT triggering in response to the edge of an external signal TRIG SLOP POS triggering in response to a rising signal edge INIT FETCh TRIG SOUR BUS can be set if measurements are to be started with TRG or GET This procedure is provided by standard IEEE 488 2 which stipulates that TRG or GET can also be used to perform complete measurements This includes the generation of an answer the measurement result In the R amp S NRP TRG does not have this meaning TRG only executes a trigger event and thus only causes the status transitions from WAIT FOR TRG to MEASURING TRG delivers no measurement result and has no effect if TRIG SOUR is not set to BUS or if the instrument is not in the state WAIT FOR TRG The latter situation applies for example if the R amp S NRP is IDLE i e INIT CONT ON is not set nor was INIT executed Delay holdoff and exclude Normally the measurement immediately starts after the trigger event has been executed This may not be desirable if the measurement is to be started before or after the trigger point The start of the measurement with reference to the trigger point can be offset using the TRIG DEL command A negative sign means th
84. it is not accepted 131 Invalid suffix The suffix is invalid for this device The suffix is the index that indexes the sensor with the SENSe commands 1 4 the CALCulate block with the high level measurement commands 1 4 and the window with the DISPlay commands 1 4 134 Suffix too long The suffix contains more than 12 characters 138 Suffix not allowed A suffix is not allowed for this command or at this position in the command 141 Invalid character data Either the character data element contains an invalid character or the particular element received is not valid for this command 144 Character data too long The character data element contains too many characters 148 Character data not allowed The character data element used is not allowed for this command or at this position of the command 151 Invalid string data The command contains invalid string data 158 String data not allowed The command contains a valid string data element at a position where it is not allowed 161 Invalid block data The command contains invalid block data 168 Block data not allowed The command contains a legal block data element at a point where it is not allowed 1144 1400 12 9 2 E 2 R amp S NRP SCPI Error Messages Error code Error text returned upon queue query Explanations 171 Invalid expression The command contains an invalid mathematical expression data element 178 Expression data not allowed The
85. lead in attenuator The sensor must be connected to the sensor check source If an at tenuator is present it must first be removed Starts a test measurement for a sensor with a lead in attenuator The sensor with attenuator must be connected to the sensor check source Opens the dialog box displaying the results of the test measurement 4 4 E 2 R amp S NRP Hardkeys Config C Opens a dialog box for entering tolerance limits d Test Report The test report shows the type and serial number of the tested sensor and on two pages the deviations between the sensor and the power reference Differences up to 0 02 dB at room temperature are abso lutely normal and are due to the uncertainty in the calibration of the sensor and the power reference Greater differences can be caused by high low ambient temperatures but also by a damage to the sen sor With multipath sensors R amp S NRP Z2x family the paths are each measured individually and the re sults displayed separately Zero Cal dialog box Report CC gt Ser 900002 d Sensor only Dev from REF Range 0 016 dB 1 PASSED 0 010 dB 2 PASSED 0 015 dB 3 PASSED mere Fig 4 6 Test Report dialog box A B C D C_ Tabs for selecting the measurement channel When the dialog box dod opens it shows the data of the sensor last tested The measured val ues are lost when the R amp S NRP is switched off More C Switches between the pages Sensor only
86. manually control the trigger sequence In continuous not single shot mode the is used to inter RUN STOP rupt STOP or continue RUN the measurement ne pe In single shot mode each individual measurement must be released by pressing the key before it can be initiated by the next trigger event Pressing the key a second time before the trigger event also initiates a measurement manual triggering 1144 1400 12 4 26 E 2 R amp S NRP Displaying measurement results Windows menu Displaying measurement results Windows menu Window labelling The R amp S NRP has a total of four windows for displaying results They are numbered 1 to 4 and so have a unique label The window s number is displayed in the top left of its title bar Note Remote control commands that act on windows contain the number of the window in ques tion in the command e g DISPlay WINDow2 SELect Windows can also be assigned a name The Window Name function in the File menu is used to assign names to windows The name is also displayed in the window s title bar and makes it easier to identify results A name like Amplifier output is more informative than Channel A or Window 2 The names of the windows are also stored in the setups Assigning meaningful names to the windows makes it much easier to recognize the associated measurement Arranging windows Displayed windows are shown in numerical order from the top to the bottom of the screen The R amp S NRP autom
87. mobile radio standards the specified parame ters can easily be loaded via the Recall Standard dialog box in the File menu 1144 1400 12 4 11 E 2 Data acquisition and parameters Sensor menu R amp S NRP Background information Dropout tolerance The Dropout parameter facilitates the clear identification of the burst end of modulated signals e g NADC Without this parameter the end of the burst might erroneously be detected within the burst owing to the considerable modulation specific power drops of such signals Dropout is set at least for the duration of modulation dependent power drops within the burst thus the end of the burst cannot be detected until the set time has elapsed after the power has dropped below the trigger threshold If the trigger threshold is exceeded again during the dropout time the process restarts from the beginning Timing diagram The timing diagram below shows the relation between the following parameters e Trigger threshold and trigger event e Trigger event exclude intervals and measurement interval e During the burst the signal frequently falls below the trigger threshold without the end of a burst be ing detected The reason for this is that the signal then also quickly exceeds the trigger threshold which means that the dropout time has not yet elapsed e During the dropout time indicated below the signal no longer exceeds the trigger threshold so that the last falling slope in the burst is de
88. numeric data measured values that is exchanged beween the remote control computer and the R amp S NRP if high level measurement commands are used Table 6 6 Commands of the FORMat command system FORMat READings BORDer NORMal SWAPped DATA ASCii REAL FORMat READings BORDer NORMal SWAPped Influences the order of bytes in 64 bit binary data NORMal The 1st byte is the MSB most significant byte the 8th byte the LSB least significant byte This fulfills the Big Endian convention Big Endian the big end comes first SWAPped The 1st byte is the LSB least significant byte the 8th byte the MSB most significant byte This fulfills the Little Endian convention RST value NORMal FORMat READings DATA ASCii REAL Specifies whether numeric data is sent as block data in binary form REAL or as character strings in plain text ASCII RST value ASCii 1144 1400 12 6 38 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands MEMory The MEMory system is used for storing device states STATe and correction tables TABLe STATe To allow a rapid and convenient changeover between device setups for different applications up to 20 setups can be stored in the device The setup with the number 0 is the default setup made in the factory This setup can neither be changed nor cleared TABLe Tables can be stored for a frequency dependent correction of measured values Up to 10 table
89. of Contents 2 GETING Slane er 2 1 Requirements ROC d eI d nie 2 1 Measuring average power Cont Av model 2 2 Window Handling 5 it re tic ie ette tute tacit ettet 2 11 Setting measurement Tunchons nennen nemen nennen nnne 2 16 Graphically representing power versus time Scope mode 2 18 Measuring av burst power Burst Av mode 2 21 Measuring average power in defined time mier 2 22 1144 1400 12 l 2 1 E 2 R amp S NRP Requirements 2 Getting Started This Chapter contains step by step instructions for simple measurements and provides an introduction to the R amp S NRP s basic modes of operation Each step is listed in order The operating steps that are to be performed are highlighted in grey while the sections between contain screenshots and also com ments and references to more information The five sections describe the following Measuring average power Step by step introduction to standard power measure ments with the R amp S NRP ze Window handling p 2 11 and Basic techniques for configuring measurement windows Setting measurement functions p 2 16 Graphically representing power Graphical representation of the time characteristic versus time Scope mode ze Measuring av burst power Measurement of burst power without external triggering Burst Av mode p 2 21 Measuring average power in de Power measurement in one or more successive timeslots fined time interval p 2 22 with interna
90. of the characteristic for one of the two analog outputs if the associated calculate block returns a power unit DBM W or DBUV as measured value Figure 6 5 Value range 120 DBM to 90 DBM Unit DBM W DBUV Default unit DBM RST value 20 DBM 1144 1400 12 6 45 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP OUTPut RECorder 1 2 LIMit LOWer RATio float value Specifies the lower power limit of the characteristic for one of the two analog outputs if the associated calculate block returns a power ratio unit DB DPCT or O as the measured value Figure 6 5 Value range 200 DB 200 DB Unit DB DPCT O Default unit DB RST value 0 DB OUTPut RECorder 1 2 LIMit UPPer float value Specifies the upper power limit of the characteristic for one of the two analog outputs gt Figure 6 5 The unit corresponds to the output unit of the measured value The value range also depends on the current output unit of the measured value in the window Unit of measured value 9 99999E55 13 0103 Value range 9 99999E5 196 897 Unit gt Table 6 3 on page 6 27 RST value 20 DBM or 10 DB OUTPut RECorder 1 2 LIMit UPPer POWer float value Specifies the upper power limit of the characteristic for one of the two analog outputs if the associated calculate block returns a power unit DBM W or DBUV as the measured value gt Figure 6 5 Value range 120 DBM to 90 DBM Un
91. one direction Editing fields are used to enter or modify numbers and text The editor is activated by pressing the appropriate rocker Switch or the appropriate side of the rocker switch if there is a dual assignment Editing can be performed in overwrite mode indicated by the marked character being in inverse video Modifications can be made either with the CA cursor keys or nu meric digit softkeys which are provided in a digit or letter panel when the editor is activated The cursor keys are used to select the digit to be edited 3 8 E 2 R amp S NRP Editing fields cont Editing fields with direct entry of val ues 1144 1400 12 Level e 298 dBm Dialog boxes and their controls In the editing fields for quantities with units the left right cursor keys can be used to select the unit too the up down cursor keys are used to edit it Usually the digit panel also contains a unit softkey which you can use to change the unit whenever you want If you want to make a completely new entry the whole field can be cleared with the key In the insert mode indicated by the I cursor you can enter digits and or letters Any changes you make to a field can be confirmed with the key When this key is pressed the new value is subjected to a validity check If the check discovers an error a warning message is output You can quit the editor by pressing the key this leaves the old values unchanged Any war
92. or passive Passive marker Time position of the markers and power level at the marker positions All indicated times are relative to the delayed trigger The indicated times for the selected time window are identical to the Start of Gate and End of Gate parameters in the Timegate mode Measuring power in gates p 4 14 Time difference between the markers and level difference between marker positions Swaps the roles of the active and passive marker Opens an editor for the time position of the active marker Selects a time window The average power the peak power and their ratio for the selected time window are displayed on the Meas page The page is easy to reach from the Gates page so you can quickly judge the effect of changing the marker position As the measured values are calculated from the pixels they do not attain the accuracy specified for the Timegate mode For a more accurate measurement of the average power it is there fore advisable to switch to the Timegate mode Measuring power in gates p 4 14 Scope mode display Gates Meas ded 1144 1400 12 CES EB T A RUN Trace Gates SEH 4 13 376 dBin Average Peak 9 753 dBm Peak Avg 3 623 dB Fig 4 41 Scope mode display Meas page 4 47 E 2 Displaying data in the Scope mode R amp S NRP Active marker The active marker can be shifted pixel by pixel using the and keys The number 1 marks the star
93. rather at discrete points of time Every time the sensor has transmitted a new measured value to the base unit i e after a time window has been evaluated Filter averaging page 4 19 the voltage is adjusted to the new value In the ContAv mode you can influence the rate at which the voltage is updated with the aid of the sam pling window es Free running average power measurements page 4 8 The time between two up dates of the output voltage is approximately twice the length of the sampling window The lower limit of this length of time during which the R amp S NRP can still regularly update the output voltage depends on the number of sensors connected and their measurement mode With a connected sensor in the Con tAv mode it is about 1 ms Switching on the averaging filter does not affect the refresh rate but the speed at which the output volt age changes can be expected to slow down as a result of the filter effect For applications having high requirements on the dynamic behaviour of the analog outputs for example phase locked loops it is advisable to freeze the screen of the R amp S NRP to avoid discontinuities caused by writing to the screen memory Miscellaneous Operation at low ambient temperatures page 4 64 1144 1400 12 4 59 E 2 System settings System menu R amp S NRP Selftest System gt Test While booting up the R amp S NRP performs a system test The system test is described in Chapter 1 Welcome s
94. result no longer carries a power unit but represents a power ratio The reference value also must have a power unit and be set with CALC REL RAT The R amp S NRP stores the reference values for power values and power ratios independently of each other and automatically uses the correct reference value depending on the unit of the measuremen t result The CALC REL command is available for entering the reference value It assumes a numeric parameter whose unit is determined from the current device settings This command is provided only for reasons of compatibility and sho 1144 1400 12 uld not be used unless avoidable Annex 1 2 E 2 R amp S NRP Annex Remote Control Commands Processing the results of two sensors The R amp S NRP offers measurement commands for processing the results of two sensors The calculated result can also be partly referenced to a stored reference value The measurement commands are obtained by adding one of the following keywords DIFF difference DIFF REL difference with reference value RAT ratio RAT REL ratio with reference value SWR standing wave ratio RLOS return loss REFL reflection coefficient The list of parameters is modified for these commands since two sensors have to be entered in the source list Example MEAS RAT DEF 3 81 84 A CALCulate block is used for processing the measured values Each CALCulate blo
95. the fluctuations only completely disappear with more than 3000 periods However it is not advisable to make the sampling window too wide by selecting an excessively large N as the intrinsic noise of the sensor increases To reduce display fluctuations due to noise it is best to use the averaging filter ee Filter averaging page 4 19 For more information see Background information page 4 10 Remote Control SENSe 1 4 POWer AVG APERture float value If a sensor contains a sampling A D converter the sampling rate can be adjusted to prevent aliasing effects for particular types of modula tion signal Aliasing can occur with some sensors because the sam pling frequency is located within the video bandwidth which means that spectral components of the modulation signal can fall in this fre quency range Changing the sampling rate will make the aliasing ef fects disappear Remote Control SENSe 1 4 SAMPling FREQ FREQ2 Using the duty cycle correction the average power of RF bursts can be calculated from the average power of the whole signal The average power of the whole signal is divided by the duty cycle of the signal If thermal sensors are used this is the only way of determining burst power If diode sensors from the R amp S NRP Z1x and R amp S NRP Z2x series are used this method must be employed if the bursts are so short that their power cannot be measured in the Burst Av or Timeslot mode
96. tional test continued overleaf 10 11 12 Safety Instructions Ensure that the connections with information technology equipment comply with IEC950 EN60950 Lithium batteries must not be exposed to high temperatures or fire Keep batteries away from children If the battery is replaced improperly there is danger of explosion Only replace the battery by R amp S type see spare part list Lithium batteries are suitable for environmen tally friendly disposal or specialized recycling Dispose them into appropriate containers only Do not short circuit the battery Equipment returned or sent in for repair must be packed in the original packing or in packing with electrostatic and mechanical protection 095 1000 Sheet 18 13 14 15 Electrostatics via the connectors may dam age the equipment For the safe handling and operation of the equipment appropriate measures against electrostatics should be im plemented The outside of the instrument is suitably cleaned using a soft lint free dustcloth Never use solvents such as thinners acetone and similar things as they may damage the front panel labeling or plastic parts Any additional safety instructions given in this manual are also to be observed Certified Quality System ISO 9001 DOS REG NO 1954 OM Certified Environmental System ISO 14001 DOS REG NO 1954 UM Qualit tszertifikat Sehr geehrter Kunde Sie haben sich f r de
97. to the R amp S NRP They control the device functions and request information The commands are classified according to the effect they have on the device Setting commands trigger device settings e g an device reset or a configuration of the trigger system Queries cause device data to be provided in the output queue where they can be fetched via the IEC IEEE bus Queries are available for most of the setting commands They are obtained by adding a question mark to the setting command 1144 1400 12 5 4 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Fundamentals according to their definition in the IEEE 488 2 and SCPI 1999 0 standard Common commands Device specific commands Parallelism Overlapping commands Sequential commands are precisely defined in the IEEE 488 2 standard in terms of function and notation They relate to functions such as the management of standardized status registers resetting and self test relate to functions that depend on device characteristics such as the frequency setting Most of these commands are also standardized by the SCPI Consortium gt SCPI Standard page 5 6 The standard allows device specific extensions of commands can be executed while another command is being executed can only be executed when the execution of all other commands is completed Q LJ Note In the R amp S NRP only the remote control commands NI T MM and CAL ZERO AUTO ONCE can overlap with other comma
98. up to 15 devices e Max length of connecting cables 15 m length of single cable 2 m e Wired OR links when several devices are connected in parallel ATN IFC NRFD EOI DIO3 DIO1 Shield N SRQ NDAC DAV DIO4 DIO2 KH N N d Y jf E N N BS V x N GND 11 GND 9 GND 7 Dos DIO6 _ DIOS Y i3 logic GND GND 10 GND 8 GND 6 REN DIO7 Fig 6 14 Pin assignment of IEC IEEE bus interface Bus Lines 1 Data bus with 8 lines DIO 1 to DIO 8 Transmission is bit parallel and byte serial in ASCII ISO code DIO 1 is the least significant and DIO 8 the most significant bit 2 Control bus with 5 lines IFC Interface Clear Active LOW resets the interfaces of connected devices to the default state 1144 1400 12 6 124 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands ATN Attention Active LOW indicates the transmission of interface messages non active HIGH indicates the transmission of device messages SRQ Service Request Active LOW enables a device to send a service request to the controller REN Remote Enable Active LOW allows switchover to the remote control mode EOI End or Identify together with ATN has two functions ATN HIGH active LOW marks the end of data transmission ATN LOW active LOW triggers a parallel poll 3 Handshake bus with three lines DAV Data Valid Active LOW signals a valid data byte on the data bus NRFD
99. update firmware by means of PC downloads for more information see the service manual Chapter 4 The IEC IEEE bus connector to IEEE488 is used to remote control the R amp S NRP 1 5 E 2 Front and rear views R amp S NRP AC supply connector The AC supply connector comprises a standard IEC low temperature connector and contains a fuse holder for two miniature fuses The fuse holder can be taken out with a screwdriver See AC supply voltage on page 1 7 for more on con necting the AC supply Sensor connectors Sensor connectors A and B option R amp S NRP B6 or C and D option R amp S NRP B5 can be accommodated on the rear panel SENSOR INPUT C A D B 1144 1400 12 1 6 E R amp S NRP Installation in a 19 rack Installation in a 19 rack Caution If the meter is rack mounted ensure there is a free flow of air through the holes in the side panels The R amp S NRP can be installed in 19 racks using a variety of rack adapters see data sheet for order Nos The installation instructions come with the adapter AC supply voltage The R amp S NRP can be operated from AC lines with a voltage range of 100 V to 240 V and a frequency range of 50 Hz to 60 Hz Note that a restricted voltage range 100 V to 120 V applies to 400 Hz net works The AC supply connector is at the rear of the meter The meter sets itself automatically to the applied voltage if it is in range AC supply fuses The R amp S NRP has two f
100. value DEL TTRIG ELete 4 MENU ENTer ESCape pm UP CY Ce W Note The R amp S NHP can be switched off via remote control by means of the SYST KEY POWER command 1144 1400 12 6 97 E 3 Remote Control Commands SYSTem PRESet R amp S NRP Resets the R amp S NRP to default RST values No difference is made between reset and preset values exceptions INIT CONT S ENS AV Table 6 33 Table 6 33 Preset and RST value Command Preset and RST value ER TCON und SENS TRAC AVER TCON For preset values see CALC 1 8 FEED 1 2 POW AVER The calculate block processes average power values Average CALC 1 8 LIM BEEP OFF No audible signal in case of limit violations CALC 1 8 LIM CLE AUTO OFF No automatic reset of the limit monitoring function when a measurement is started CALC 1 8 LIM FAIL 0 Limit violation CALC 1 8 LIM FCO 0 Number of limit violations is reset CALC 1 8 LIM UPP DATA DW or 0 DB Upper limit value for measurements CALC 1 8 LIM UPP STA OFF No monitoring function for upper limit value CALC 1 8 IM LOW DATA DW or 0 DB Lower limit value for measurements CALC 1 8 LIM LOW STA OFF No monitoring function for lower limit value CALC 1 8 MATH For command description see 6 26 The calculate block returns the measur
101. value correction is set by selecting a table with the SENSe 1 4 CORRection FDOTable SELect and SENSe 1 4 CORRection FDOTable STATe ON commands The respective frequency dependent correction factor is determined by means of the active tables if necessary by interpolation and can be queried with SENSe 1 4 CORRection FDOFfset INPut MAGNitude frequency dependent offset Unit DB RST value none 1144 1400 12 6 54 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands SENSe 1 4 CORRection FDOTable SELect string The name of the current frequency dependent offset table can be set or queried by the SENSe 1 4 CORRection FDOTable SELect command The R amp S NRP can manage up to ten such tables MEMory commands The frequency dependent offset tables consist of two columns the first containing the frequencies the second the associated correction values When the R amp S NRP is informed about the signal frequency with command SENSe 1 4 FREQuency CW FIXed float value an appropriate correction factor is determined by means of the table If the table was activated with SENSe 1 4 CORRection FDOTable STATe ON the measurement result obtained by the sensor is multiplied by this factor RST value Settings are not changed in case of RST Error messages 256 File name not found A table named name is not known SENSe 1 4 CORRection FDOTable STATe ON
102. 0 49 228 25 50 87 49 40 63 29 00 0 49 40 630 78 70 49 2203 807 0 449 2203 807 650 Albania Algeria Argentina Australia Austria Azerbaijan Baltic Countries Bangladesh Belgium Brasil Brunei Bulgaria Bosnia Herzegovina Zweigniederlassung S d Gesch ftsstelle nchen hldorfstra amp e 15 D 81671 M nchen Postfach 80 14 69 D 81614 M nchen Zweigniederlassung S d Gesch ftsstelle rnberg Donaustra e 36 D 90451 N rnberg Zweigniederlassung Mitte Gesch ftsstelle eu Isenburg Siemensstrafe 20 D 63263 Neu Isenburg ADRESSEN WELTWEIT ADDRESSES WORLDWIDE Siehe see Austria ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Bureau d Alger 5B Place de Laperrine 16035 Hydra Alger PRECISION ELECTRONICA S R L Av Pde Julio A Roca 710 6 Piso C1067ABP Buenos Aires ROHDE amp SCHWARZ AUSTRALIA Pty Ltd Sales Support Unit 6 2 8 South Street Rydalmere N S W 2116 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ STERREICH Ges m b H 449 89 41 86 95 0 49 89 40 47 64 49 911 642 03 0 49 911 642 03 33 49 6102 20 07 0 49 6102 20 07 12 213 21 48 20 18 213 21 69 46 08 541 14 331 41 99 541 14 334 51 11 alberto lombardi prec elec com ar 61 2 88 45 41 00 61 2 96 38 39 88 lyndell james rsaus rohde schwarz com 43 1 602 61 41 0 43 1 602 61 41 14 office rsoe rohde schwarz com Am Euro Platz 3 Geb ude B 1120 Wien ROHDE amp SCHWARZ
103. 0 Box 11012 3rd Floor Akai House Osu Accra North MERCURY S A 6 Loukianou Str 10675 Athens siehe see Mexico siehe see Mexico Electronic Scientific Engineering 36 F Dorset House Taikoo Place 979 King s Road Quarry Bay Hong Kong ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Budapesti Iroda V ci t 169 1138 Budapest siehe see Denmark 45 43 43 66 99 45 43 43 77 44 593 22 89 65 97 593 22 89 65 97 mweinzierl accessinter net 20 2 455 67 44 20 2 256 17 40 an_uas link net 372 6 14 31 23 372 6 14 31 21 margo fingling rsdk rohde schwarz com 358 9 47 88 30 358 9 53 16 04 info orbis fi 33 1 41 36 10 00 33 1 41 36 11 73 33 0 299 51 97 00 33 0 299 51 98 77 33 0 561 39 10 69 33 0 561 39 99 10 33 0 494 07 39 94 33 0 494 07 55 11 33 0 478 29 88 10 33 0 478 79 18 57 33 0 383 54 51 29 33 0 383 54 82 09 233 21 77 89 13 233 21 701 06 20 302 10 722 92 13 302 10 721 51 98 mercury hol gr 852 25 07 03 33 852 25 07 09 25 stephenchau ese com hk 36 1 412 44 60 36 1 412 44 61 rohdehu rsoe rohde schwarz com Adressen Addresses India India India India Indonesia Iran Ireland Israel Israel Italy Italy Japan Jordan Kazakhstan ROH 2nd ROH 6 3 ROH 244 ROH PTR ew Delhi 1 Stage Extension Bangalore 560 071 DE amp SCHWARZ India Pvt Ltd Hyde
104. 046 Rohde amp Schwar Inc arketing amp Support Center T amp M Equipment 2540 SW Alan Blumlein Way S 58 925 Beaverton OR 97077 0001 Rohde amp Schwarz Inc Systems amp EMI Products 8080 Tristar Drive Suite 120 rving Texas 75063 EQUILAB TELECOM C A Centro Seguros La Paz Piso 6 Local E 61 Ava Francisco de Miranda Boleita Caracas 1070 REPRESENTACIONES BOPIC S A Calle C 4 Ota San Jose Urb Caurimare Caracas 1061 Schmidt Vietnam Co H K Ltd Representative Office in Hanoi ntern Technology Centre 8 F HITC Building 239 Xuan Thuy Road Cau Giay Tu Liem Hanoi Siehe see Mexico GEDIS GmbH Sophienblatt 100 Postfach 22 01 24021 Kiel 971 4 883 71 35 971 4 883 71 36 www rsbick de 971 2 631 20 40 971 2 631 30 40 rsuaeam emirates net ae 44 1252 81 88 88 sales 44 1252 81 88 18 service 44 1252 81 14 47 sales rsuk rohde schwarz com 598 2 400 39 62 598 2 401 85 97 mjn aeromarine com uy 1 410 910 78 00 1 410 910 78 01 rsatv rsa rohde schwarz com rsacomms rsa rohde schwarz com 1 503 627 26 84 1 503 627 25 65 info rsa rohde schwarz com 1 469 713 53 00 1 469 713 53 01 info rsa rohde schwarz com 58 2 12 34 46 26 58 2 122 39 52 05 t_ramirez equilabtelecom com 58 2 129 85 21 29 58 2 129 85 39 94 incotr cantv net 84 4 834 61 86 84 4 834 61 88 svnhn schmidtgroup com 49 431 600 51 0
105. 0ms samping D 1 000 Duty Cyce Smoothing of Modulated Signals L Fig 4 11 Mode dialog box Normal mode This parameter defines the duration of the measurement window In the manual mode the default setting of 20 ms combined with smooth ing see below is usually adequate Another value generally larger is essential if the result exhibits fluctuations due to modulation With very low frequency modulation in particular it is a good idea to set the size of the sampling window so that it exactly equals the modulation period so ensuring optimal display settling Optimal sampling window size Off N x modulation period 2 Smoothing On N x modulation period x 2 4 8 E 2 R amp S NRP Sampling Rate Duty Cycle Smoothing of modulated Signals 1144 1400 12 EC d 0 d Data acquisition and parameters Sensor menu N21 2 3 This means that the minimum theoretical measurement time can only be obtained with smoothing turned off The more modulation periods fit into a sampling window the less criti cal it is whether N is an integer or not With smoothing on about five periods are enough to reduce fluctuations caused by modulation to an acceptable level even if N is not an integer With more than nine pe riods the fluctuations are imperceptible With smoothing off the situa tion is much less favourable as instead of just five periods as many as 300 are required
106. 1 4 TRACe LOWer float value Sets the lower limit for the power axis in the Scope mode The value range depends on the unit Unit of measured value W DBUV 999 999E3 13 010 Value range SCH M Zo 999 999E3 136 990 Default unit DBM Unit DBM W DBUV Value range see above RST value 120 DBM DISPlay WINDow 1 4 TRACe UPPer float value Sets the upper limit for the power axis in the Scope mode The value range depends on the unit Unit of measured value W DBUV 999 999F 13 040 Value range 999 999E3 136 990 Default unit DBM Unit DBM W DBUV Value range see above RST value 30 DBM DISPlay WINDow 1 4 TSLot int value Sets the displayed timeslot if the primary or secondary channel is operated in the Timeslot mode Value range depends on sensor RST value 1 DISPlay WINDow SELect 1 2 3 4 Selects a window RST value 1 1144 1400 12 6 36 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands DISPlay WINDow SIZE NORMal ZOOMed Sets the window size NORMal The window size is determined automatically and depends on the total number of open windows ZOOMed The selected window DISP WIND SEL is set to maximum size regardless of the the number of visible windows Any other open windows are covered RST value NORMal 1144 1400 12 6 37 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP FORMat The FORMat command system sets the format of
107. 2 Management of settings File menu R amp S NRP Programming aids File gt Errorlist If you are developing remote control programs you can display the contents of the SCPI error queue in the Errorlist dialog box In addition to the error the command line that triggered the error is displayed along with a question mark highlighted in black at the point where the command interpreter detected the error The dialog box can be left permanently open and its contents are continuously updated File menu Error List Errorlist CO c TRIGsouR Busi d d gt 27 Sensor not present MEAS XTINEE 93 72 113 Undefined header MEAS TIMES ee 109 Missing parameter MEAS XTIME 256 1 US 98 7 171 Invalid expression MEAS XTIME 256 1 US Gi E 27 Sensor not present Fig 4 46 Errorlist dialog box If the device is already in the remote state the menu bar is replaced and the Errorlist can be opened with the topmost softkey Error List d d Fig 4 47 Menu bar in the remote control mode DEL TTRIG If the Errorlist is open the error queue of the R amp S NRP can be deleted by pressing the key Remote control DISPlay ERRorlist ON OFF To activate extended error messages SYSTem ERRor EXTended STATe boolean Assigning names to windows File2 Window Name Each display window is automatically labelled with a number 1 2 3 4 In addition you can enter a name for each window to mo
108. 2 Table 6 31 Commands of the SENSe system 6 93 Table 6 32 Valid parameter values for the SYSTem KEY Commande 6 96 Table 6 33 Preset and RST value enters nnnr sitne reser intrent nnns 6 98 Table 6 34 Commands for setting the trigger system of a Sensor este eeetaeeeeeeteneees 6 103 Table 6 35 Commands of the UNIT system 6 108 Table 6 36 Compatibility information about remote control commande 6 122 Table 6 37 Interface functions of IEC IEEE bus eene nennen nnne 6 126 Table 6 38 Common commande sse esee nene en nennen nnne trnn entere ensi n trns inneren 6 127 Table 6 39 Addressed commands asert inanan an EER a Ean ERRER esie enin nnne nnne innen 6 127 1144 1400 12 1 6 4 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands 6 Remote Control Commands Notation In the following sections all commands implemented in the device are first listed in a table according to the command system and then described in detail For the most part the notation used complies with SCPI specifications Command tables For a quick overview of available commands the commands are listed in a table before they are described Except for the high level measurement commands and the STATus commands these tables contain the following four columns Command The commands and their hierarchical order see indentations Parameter Required parameters Unit Basic unit of physical parameters Remark This column indicates which commands e donot have a query form
109. 2 3 4 Defines the number of significant places for the Scope mode for linear units and the number of decimal places for logarithmic units which should be free of noise in the measurement result This setting is also performed by the DISP 1 4 RES command gt page 6 35 which tries to set the sensors involved in the measurement result accordingly For further details see Chapter 4 However SENS 1 4 AVER COUN AUTO RES does not affect the DISPlay command The parameters of the two commands are different but have the same meaning SENS 1 4 AVER COUN AUTO RES DISP 1 4 RES Unit Value range depending on sensor RST value depending on sensor SENSe 1 4 TRACe AVERage COUNt AUTO POINt int value Specifies the measured value in the Scope mode used for the automatic determination of the filter length Unit Value range depending on sensor RST value depending on sensor SENSe 1 4 TRACe AVERage COUNt AUTO NSRatio float value Indicates the maximum noise ratio in the measurement result for the Scope mode The setting is taken into account only if SENS 1 4 TRAC AVER COUN AUTO ON and SENS 1 4 TRAC AVER COUN AUTO TYPE NSR are set Unit DB PCT Default unit DB Value range depending on sensor RST value depending on sensor 1144 1400 12 6 62 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands SENSe 1 4 TRACe AVERage COUNt AUTO TYPE RESo
110. 35 03 61 rsindiab rsnl net 91 40 23 32 24 16 91 40 23 32 27 32 rsindiah nd2 dot net in 91 11 26 32 63 81 91 11 26 32 63 73 sales rsindia rohde schwarz services rsindia rohde schwarz com 91 22 26 30 18 10 91 22 26 32 63 73 rsindiam rsnl net 62 21 252 36 08 62 21 252 36 07 sales rsbj rohde schwarz com services rsbj rohde schwarz com 98 21 872 42 96 98 21 871 90 12 rs tehran neda net 972 3 645 87 77 972 3 645 86 66 david_hasky easx co il 972 3 631 20 57 972 3 631 40 58 jmmoss zahav net il 39 02 95 70 42 03 39 02 95 30 27 72 ornella crippa rsi rohde schwarz com 39 39 06 41 59 82 18 06 41 59 82 70 81 3 39 30 41 90 81 3 39 30 41 86 RSSales advantest co jp 962 6 462 17 29 962 6 465 96 72 jocrown go com jo 7 32 72 63 55 55 7 32 72 63 46 33 RS Kazakhstan RUS Rohde Schwarz com Kenya Korea Kuwait Latvia Lebanon Lebanon Liechtenstein Lithuania Luxembourg Macedonia Malaysia Malta Mexico Mexico Moldavia Netherlands New Zealand Nicaragua Nigeria Excel Enterprises Ltd Dunga Road P 0 Box 42 788 Nairobi ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Korea Ltd 83 29 Nonhyun Dong Kangnam Ku Seoul 135 010 Group Five Trading amp Contracting Co Mezanine Floor Al Bana Towers Ahmad Al Jaber Street Sharq ROHDE amp SCHWARZ DANMARK A S Latvian Branch Office erkela iela 21 301 1050 Riga ROHDE am
111. 4 Remote dialog Dox cine ii aee dere dn nete e p da 4 55 Remote dialog box GPIB ener en nennen nnns nennen 4 55 Remote Dialog GPIB EE 4 56 Remote Dialog GPIB eege rete reete ctetu etra Raid enn vada n EeHs 4 56 IP Address Dialog Manual 4 57 IP Address Dialog DHGP i iir tete eerte expri anna to dean SERA 4 57 Analog Qut dialog DOX eode he cete ete et e ente qns 4 58 Selftest dialogi DOX EE 4 60 Selftest Keyboard dialog box ssssssssessssess esee nennen nennen 4 61 Sensor Info dialog box oerte ted dx dote rer Dx aee Adaya 4 62 System Info dialog box 4 63 Miscellaneous dialog DOR naei erraia eat AEAEE AE E ETE entren entren trn nnns 4 64 Example of a network configuration for a direct R amp S NRP PC connection using a crossover Calile 4 57 4 5 E 2 R amp S NRP Hardkeys 4 Instrument Functions This Chapter contains a systematic description of the R amp S NRP s functions in the order in which they occur in the menus The grey text in the headings provides additional information that should prove helpful Hardkeys for opening dialog boxes KEY Menu items which directly perform an operation when selected Menu gt menu item Menu items that open dialog boxes Menu gt menu item Dialog box elements Dialog Dialog element The symbols in the left hand column of the description ind
112. 4 1400 12 5 19 E 3 Remote Control Fundamentals R amp S NRP Measurement Rel Reset CALC 8 REL AUTO ONCE Measurement Ref Val Ref Value CALC 8 RE Measurement Ref Val Ref Value Reset Result gt Ref CALC 8 REL AUTO ONCE Measurement Limits Warning Sound CALC 8 LIM BEEP Measurement Limits Upper Limit On CALC 8 LIM UPP STAT Measurement Limits Upper Limit CALC 8 LIM UPP DATA Measurement Limits Lower Limit On CALC 8 LIM LOW STAT Measurement Limits Lower Limit CALC 8 LIM LOW DATA Measurement Max Hold Reset CALC 8 EXTR RES File gt Preset SYST PRES or RST File gt Setup Recall Recall RCL File Setup Save Save SAV File Setup Save Edit Name MEM STAT DEF File gt Standard Recall Preserve Window Settings SYST STAN PWS File Standard Recall Trigger Source SYST STAN TRIG SOUR File Standard Recall gt Recall SYST STAN PRES File Sensor Info SYSTem SENS 1 4 INFO File System Info SYSTem INFO File Window Name DISP NAME System Remote 2 GPIB GPIB Address SYST COMM GPIB ADDR System I O gt Out 1 1234 OUTP REC1 FEED or OUTP TTL FEED System gt 1 O gt Out 1 g
113. 400 12 4 44 E 2 R amp S NRP Displaying data in the Scope mode Length of the measurement window image width Co determines the time resolution together with the number of measurement points Background information p 4 45 Length LU Remote control SENSe 1 4 TRACe TIME float value Max Maximum power that can be displayed me Remote control DISPlay WINDow 1 4 TRACe UPPer float value Min Minimum power that can be displayed 0 Remote control DISPlay WINDow 1 4 TRACe LOWer float value Y Tip The number panel for Min and Max contains an auto softkey for adapt ing the power range to the trace Background information The time resolution of the trace is determined by the length of the measurement window and the num ber of measurement points ee Switching the sensor to the Scope mode p 4 41 A measurement point therefore represents the power for a time interval within which the test signal can considerably vary Among the different ways of finding a representative value each measurement point is assigned the average power of the correlating time interval which can result in deviations from the expected charac teristic of the envelope power In this case the time resolution must be increased by shortening the measurement window and or raising the number of measurement points This aspect should be given special attention especially when measuring the peak power and the
114. 49 431 600 51 11 sales gedis online de R amp S NRP Table of Contents Chapter 1 Table of Contents 1 Putting into Operation si secs esa ier p ae a Madan AE 1 1 Notes on putting into Operation ennemis 1 1 Unpacking the Metar inse aen aa a a a a nnne n essent nens 1 1 Setting p the Mete iir deed dn pedcs RTT d agen eden dee i isa oceans dao eed s 1 2 Front and rear VIeWS coitu eame p Ee e ar e vt Ela ee e ee Erat tenet 1 3 Front panel diss at uet tb eet n tet et edes 1 3 Rear panel EE 1 5 installation in a 19 rack oa A eae ie ade en 1 7 AC supply voltage iEn nNUi eebe 1 7 AG supply f ses Ree t Ber e Er zre Bp ees i eet eer prede 1 7 EMG Lino px tein tdt etu uec Ue nt er cR Le 1 7 Switching the meter on off ssssssssssssssseseee eene ennt inneren nnn nennen 1 8 Welcome screen and function Test 1 8 Resetting and setting brightness and contrast 1 10 IR 1 10 tegt entsteet dug m agii utes bate i ee Und 1 11 1144 1400 12 I 1 1 E 2 R amp S NRP Notes on putting into operation 1 Putting into Operation This Chapter describes putting into operation unpacking AC supply connection switching the meter on and off function testing and installing the meter the preset or default settings and also contains front and rear views of the meter Notes on putting into operation Before putting the R amp S NRP into operation ensure that e the sensor inputs are not overloaded e the meter s o
115. 50 000 dBm Fig 4 27 Meter Scaling dialog box Auto Once C Automatically selects the appropriate scaling so that the instantaneous d d measured value is in the middle of the scale Remote Control DISPlay WINDow 1 4 METer ANALog AUTo ONCE OFF Left C Enables input of the left end of scale value dd Remote Control DISPlay WINDow 1 4 METer ANALog LOWer float value Right CC Enables input of the right end of scale value d d Remote Control DISPlay WINDow 1 4 METer ANALog UPPer float value Scrolling between timeslots Windows Time Slot If the timeslot mode has been selected for a sensor you can use the Time Slot softkey in the Windows menu to select the timeslot whose measured values you want to display Timeslota 1 ii d Fig 4 28 Windows menu softkey for scrolling between timeslots Windows menu Specifies which of the timeslots on which a simultaneous measurement in rform re displayed in the active window Tine Slot SES S being performed are display dod If you want to display further timeslots simultaneously a separate win dow must be opened and configured for each additional timeslot Remote Control DISPlay WINDow 1 4 TSLot lt int_value gt 1144 1400 12 4 31 E 2 Configuring measurements Measurement menu R amp S NRP Configuring measurements Measurement windows For every window opened via the Windows menu you can configure a measurement in the Measure ment menu The measuremen
116. 6 21 37 43 53 sales itec com mt 52 55 85 03 99 13 52 55 85 03 99 16 latinoamerica rsd rohde schwarz com 52 33 36 78 91 70 52 33 36 78 92 00 V 31 30 600 17 00 31 30 600 17 99 info rsn rohde schwarz com 64 4 232 32 33 64 4 232 32 30 rob nichecom co nz 234 9 413 52 51 234 9 413 52 50 fsabuja rosecom net Adressen Addresses Norway Oman Pakistan Panama Papua New Guinea Philippines Poland Portugal Romania Russian Federation Saudi Arabia Saudi Arabia Serbia Montenegro Slovak Republic Slovenia South Africa South Africa ROHDE amp SCHWARZ NORGE AS 47 23 38 66 00 Spain ROHDE amp SCHWARZ ESPANA S A 34 91 334 10 70 Enebakkveien 302 B 47 23 38 66 01 Salcedo 11 34 91 329 05 06 1188 Oslo rses rses rohde schwarz com 28034 Madrid Mustafa Sultan Science amp Industry Co LLC 968 636 000 For Test amp Measurement ONLY 968 607 066 Sri Lanka LANKA AVIONICS 94 1 95 66 78 Way No 3503 m aziz mustafasultan com 658 1 1 Negombo Road 94 1 95 83 11 Building No 241 attumagala lankavio sltnet lk Postal Code 112 Ragama Al Khuwair Muscat Sudan SolarMan Co Ltd 249 11 47 31 08 Siemens Pakistan 92 51 227 22 00 P 0 Box 11 545 249 11 47 3138 23 West Jinnah Avenue 92 51 227 54 98 orth of Fraoug Cementry 6 7 9 Bldg 16 solarman29 hotmail com Islamabad reza bokhary siemens com pk Karthoum siehe see Mexico Swed
117. 7 11 719 57 00 Liaison Office Istanbul 4 90 216 385 19 18 Communications and Measurement Division 27 11 786 58 91 Bagdad Cad 191 3 Arda Apt B Blok rsturk amp superonline com Private Bag X19 unicm protea co za 81030 Selamicesme Istanbul Bramley 2018 Ukraine ROHDE amp SCHWARZ 38 044 268 60 55 Protea Data Systems Pty Ltd 27 21 555 36 32 Representative Office Kiev 38 044 268 83 64 Cape Town Branch 27 21 555 42 67 4 Patris Loumoumba ul rohdeukr rsoe rohde schwarz com Unit G9 Centurion Business Park unicm protea co za 01042 Kiev Bosmandam Road Milnerton United Arab ROHDE amp SCHWARZ International GmbH 971 2 633 56 70 Cape Town 7441 Emirates Liaison Office Abu Dhabi 971 2 633 56 71 PU Box 31156 michael rogler rsd rohde Abu Dhabi schwarz com Adressen Addresses United Arab Emirates United Arab Emirates United Kingdom Uruguay USA USA USA Venezuela Venezuela Vietnam West Indies ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Bick Mobile Communication P 0 Box 17466 Dubai ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Emirates L L C Ahmed AI Nasri Building Mezzanine Floor P 0 Box 31156 Off old Airport Road Behind new GEMACO Furniture Abu Dhabi ROHDE amp SCHWARZ UK Ltd Ancells Business Park Fleet Hampshire GU 51 2UZ England EROMARINE S A erro Largo 1497 200 Montevideo EH Es ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Inc Broadcast amp Comm Equipment US Headquarters 7150 K Riverwood Drive Columbia MD 21
118. A and 1 are available in the unit list The symbol A represents the relative uncertainty in 96 0 96 means the powers in both channels are equal the symbol 1 represents a straight ratio i e not the log of a ratio 2 17 E 2 Graphically representing power versus time Scope mode R amp S NRP Graphically representing power versus time Scope mode In the Scope mode power versus time can be represented graphically as with an oscilloscope If you wish to carry out time dependent measurements in the Burst or Timeslot mode on modulated signals displaying the signal in the Scope mode is always initially recommended since stable triggering by the R amp S NRP is most clearly recognized in this mode Q Setting the Scope mode gt Connect a power sensor of the R amp S NRP Z1x or R amp S NRP Z2x family to connector A of the R amp S NRP and apply an amplitude modulated or pulsed signal having a modulation or pulse frequency of approx 1kHz The maximum level should be between 10 dBm and 10 dBm gt Press the key twice A measurement window is now available ESTE windows Measurement Fie system CC gt Change to the Sensor menu and select Mode dod Mode C d Tslot Tgate Scope C Switch to the Scope mode dod The associated parameters will appear in the lower part of the dialog box You can leave the parameters un F changed for this exercise Scope For a detailed description see Chapter 4 Displaying data
119. AGNitude 1 ENSe1 CORRection GAIN2 INPut 1 ENSe1 CORRection GAIN2 1 ENSe CORRection GAIN2 1 CORRection GAIN2 1 goo o A question mark in square brackets at the end of a command indicates that this command can either be used as a setting command without question mark or as a query with question mark If the question mark is not in square brackets the command is a query only Example SENSe 1 4 POWer AVG APERture SENS1 POW AVG APER 1ms sets the integration time in the ContAv mode to 1 ms SENS1 POW AVG APER returns the currently set integration time SYSTem SENSor3 INFO queries information of sensor C which cannot be modified For this reason this command is only available as a query A selection of keywords with an identical effect exists for several commands These keywords are entered in the same line and separated by a vertical bar Only one of these keywords has to be indicated in the header of the command The effect of the command is independent of the keyword entered Example SENSe 1 4 firstlevel FREQuency second level CW FIXed third level SENSe 1 4 FREQuency CW 1E6 is equivalent to SENSe 1 4 FREQuency FIXed 1E6 A vertical bar in the notation of parameters is used to separate alternative options and is to be seen as an or The effect of the command differs depending on the parameter stated Example Selection of parameter for the command INITiate CONTi
120. ATio RELative changes In all other cases an SCPI error 221 Setting conflict is returned and the command aborted A measurement is started without further configuration and the measurement result is returned The parameter list is compared to the current settings before the measurement is started If the list does not agree an SCPI error 221 Setting conflict is returned and the command aborted Apart from this check READ corresponds to the program message NI T I MM FETCh 1 8 Combines CONFi gure and READ The FETCh command without parameters has a special meaning While suppressing parameters normally means that default values are used and checked the current measured value under FETCh is supplied when it is valid If a measured value is not yet available processing is suspended until a valid result is available Can be compared with FETCh READ starts a measurement and returns a measured value without checking the current settings Fig 6 4 Relationship between the commands CONFigure READ FETCh and MEASure 1144 1400 12 6 12 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands Syntactical Structure of High Level Measurement Commands The high level measurement commands can be divided as follows lt head gt lt function gt expression parameter list lt head gt CONFigure 1 8 READ 1 8 MEASure 1 8 FETCh 1 8 lt function gt Selection of one of t
121. AVER COUN AUTO OFF Unit Value range depending on sensor RST value depending on sensor SENSe 1 4 TRACe AVERage COUNCt AUTO ON OFF ONCE This command can be used to automatically determine a value for SENSe 1 4 AVERage COUNCt for the Scope mode If the command is called with the parameter ONCE automatic switchover is deactivated setting OFF and the suitable filter length will then be defined and set automatically The setting can then be queried via SENS 1 4 AVER COUN If the automatic switchover is activated with the ON parameter the sensor always defines a suitable filter length which can also be queried via SENS 1 4 AVER COUN RST value depending on sensor SENSe 1 4 TRACe AVERage COUNt AUTO TIMe float value If the R amp S NRP has to determine the filter length automatically in the Scope mode the filter length can become large and thus also the time to fill the filter An upper time limit maximum time can be set via SENS 1 4 AVER COUN AUTO MTIME It should never be exceeded Undesired long measurement times can thus be prevented in the SENS AVER COUN AUTO TYPE NSR mode if the automatic filter length switchover is on Unit s Value range depending on sensor RST value depending on sensor 1144 1400 12 6 61 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP SENSe 1 4 TRACe AVERage COUNt AUTO RESolution 1
122. Bec 6 108 List of Remote Control Commandes nnne nnne ens 6 109 Compatibility Intormatton enne senten nennen nnns nens 6 122 Interfaces 5a dee Loo e mios m LE 6 124 IEC IBEE Bus Interface eti con nente e nene reet de Miele 6 124 Characteristics of the Interface A 6 124 Bus BET 6 124 Interface FUNCIONS roi Tanai a eee ie veer ev ne nl deu cet ae e cope EUR i 6 126 Interface Messages 6 127 Standard Configurations sse nnne nennen nenne nnne ens 6 128 1144 1400 12 1 6 2 E 3 R amp S NRP List of Figs and Tables Chapter 6 Figs Fig 6 1 Overview of SCPI command systems and their mutual interaction ssssssss 6 9 Fig 6 2 SENSE SyStem usi atte adel sedo Pe sra suns een Eege gedet enee 6 10 Fig 6 3 Command system CAL Culate ener tnter ensi nnns snnt nennen 6 10 Fig 6 4 Relationship between the commands CONFigure READ FETCh and MEASure 6 12 Fig 6 5 Characteristic of analog outputs enne enne nnne nennen en 6 45 Fig 6 6 Voltage at T TE output eed et ome e o ele oM eate oit 6 49 Fig 6 7 Meaning of drop out TOLerance sss eene tnnt nrnn enne 6 58 Fig 6 8 Timing parameters for the Timegate mode 6 59 Fig 6 9 Effect of commands SENS 1 4 TIM EXCL STAR and STOP sse 6 65 Fig 6 10 Standard SCPI status reglster nennen nennen 6 70 Fig 6 11 Overview on structure of Status Reporting System sss 6 73
123. C reference value The ratio of the PC and SC is divided by the reference value determined with the aid of one the following commands CALCulate 1 8 RELative MAGNitude CALCulate 1 8 RELative AUTO 6 16 R amp S NRP SWR REFLection RLOSs 1144 1400 12 Remote Control Commands 1 VSC PC 1 4SC PC If the forward power of a wave is measured in the PC and the reflected power in the SC the measurement command yields the standing wave ratio The output unit is set to One UNIT RAT O 4SC PC If the forward power of a wave is measured in the PC and the reflected transmitted power in the SC the calculate block yields the reflection coefficient transmission factor of the DUT The output unit is set to One UNIT RAT O 20log VSC PC If the forward power of a wave is measured in the PC and the reflected or transmitted power in the SC the calculate block yields the return loss transmission loss of the DUT This function principally yields the same result as the RATio function The only difference is the output unit which is automatically set to dB by means of this command UNIT RAT DB 6 17 E 3 Remote Control Commands Parameters R amp S NRP Five different parameter lists are used in the command table depending on the selected measurement mode The elements of these lists can be omitted starting at the end and working backward They will then be replaced by their
124. Common Commands to IEEE 488 2 The Common Commands to IEEE 488 2 are device commands that can be sent via the IEC IEEE bus CLS CLear Status Clears the status of the R amp S NRP by resetting the following registers Status byte register Standard event status register Error event queue All SCPI status registers es Note The enable and transition registers NTRansition and PTRansition are not changed ESE 0 255 Standard Event Status Enable Sets the ENABle register of the Standard Event Status Register ESR to the specified value gt SCPI command STATus page 6 68 ESE Standard Event Status Enable Query Returns the content of the ENABle register of the Standard Event Status Register SCPI command STATus page 6 68 ESR Standard Event Status Register Query Returns the content of the EVENt register of the Standard Event Status Register SCPI command STATus page 6 68 IDN IDeNtification Query Returns a string with information on the R amp S NRP identity device identification code The string has the following format st ringl string2 string3 string4 1144 1400 12 6 5 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP Definition of string components lt stringl gt designation lt string2 gt manufacturer lt string3 gt serial number of the R amp S NRP lt string4 gt firmware version IST Individual Status Query Returns the current value of the IST flag
125. Dition register is directly written by the hardware or the summary bit of the next lower register Its content reflects the current device status This register can only be read it cannot be written to or cleared Reading the register does not change its contents The Positive TRansition register acts as a transition filter When a bit of the CONDition register changes from 0 to 1 the associated PTR bit determines whether the EVEN bit will be set to 1 PTR bit 1 the EVENt bit is set PTR bit 0 the EVENt bit is not set This register can be written to and read Reading the register does not change its contents The Negative TRansition register also acts as a transition filter Upon transition of a bit of the CONDition register from 1 to 0 the associated NTR bit determines whether the EVEN bit is set to 1 NTR bit 1 the EVENt bit is set NTR bit 0 the EVENt bit is not set This register can be written to and read Reading the register does not change its contents With the aid of these two transition filter registers the user can define the status change of the CONDition register none O to 1 1 to O or both that is to be recorded in the EVEN register The EVEN register reports whether an event has occurred since its last reading it is the memory of the CONDition register It only registers events that have been reported by the transition filters The EVENt register is continuously updated by the device It can onl
126. ENS APER MIN integration time as short as possible SENS RANG AUTO OFF automatic range selection OFF SENS CORR OFFS STAT OFF no global offset correction SENS CORR DCYC STAT OFF no duty cycle correction SENS CORR FDOT STAT OFF no frequency dependent offset correction SENS SGAM CORR STAT OFF no measured value correction for reflection coefficient of source RIG DEL 0 no delay on triggering RIG DEL AUTO OFF no delay on triggering CALC1 MATH SENS1 only uses the first CALCulate block CALC2 MATH SENS2 CALC3 MATH SENS2 CALC4 MATH SENS2 CALC5 MATH SENS2 CALC6 MATH SENS2 CALC7 MATH SENS2 CALC8 MATH SENS2 1144 1400 12 Annex 1 21 E 2 R amp S NRP Table of Contents Chapter 8 Table of Contents 8 Maintenarice 1 once mctu ete ete d beet tes 8 1 Sensor TOS EE 8 1 td ET CT E 8 1 Cleaning the exterior cce eege gege e 8 1 S OPAC O e 8 1 1144 1400 12 l 8 1 E 1 R amp S NRP Maintenance 8 Maintenance Under normal operating conditions the R amp S NRP does not require any regular maintenance except for occasional cleaning of the front panel Sensor test The sensor selftest is described in Chapter 4 in the section Selftest Instrument selftest The R amp S NRP carries out a selftest during booting This selftest is described in Chapter 1 in the section titled Welcome screen and function test Cleaning t
127. Eight CALCulate blocks are available to process the data supplied by the sensors These blocks process the results of up to 2 sensors primary and secondary channel together A calculation function can be selected for this purpose with the aid of MATH EXPRession The result can then be correlated to a reference value RELative before it is made available to the user by the UNIT block Measured values can be monitored with the LIMit commands 1144 1400 12 6 10 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands High Level Measurement Commands CONFigure MEASure READ and FETCh The high level measurement commands CONFigure MEASure READ and FETCh combine several setting commands and thus simplify programming of the R amp S NRP The most convenient command is MEASure This command configures sensors and calculate blocks initiates a measurement and provides measurement results The other commands perform only portions of these functions and thus allow the user to make specific modifications between the individual steps Strictly speaking the CONFigure command is not a measurement command because it does not yield data and only configures a measurement It differs from the other three high level measurement commands as follows a question mark at the end of the command provides information on current settings With other commands the question mark is compulsory and shows that the measured data is queried The commands have different func
128. Ffset INPut MAGNitude FDOTable SELect lt string gt STATe ON OFF SPDevice STATe ON OFF FREQuency CW FIXed lt float_value gt FUNCtion ON lt string gt POWer AVG APERture lt float_value gt BUFFer SIZE lt int_value gt BUFFer STATe ON OFF RANGe 0111 2 AUTO ON OFF AUTO CLEVel1 float value DB PCT SMOothing ON OFF GATe 1 4 OFFSet TIME float value TIME float value TGATe SELect 1 213 4 TSLot COUNt int value WIDTh lt float_value gt 1144 1400 12 6 50 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands tBURSU DTOLerance loat value SAMPLing EQ1 FREQ2 SGAMma MAGNitude loat value PHASe loat_value gt CORRection STATe OFF TRACe AVERage STATe ON OFF COUNt lt int_value gt AUTO ON OFF ONCE MTIMe lt float_value gt RESolution 1 21314 POINt lt int_value gt NSRatio lt float_value gt TYPE RESolution NSR TCONtrol MOVing REPeat OFFSet TIME float value POINts lt int_value gt REALtime ON OFF TIME lt float_value gt TIMing EXCLude STARt float value STOP lt float_value gt SENSe 1 4 AVERage STATe ON OFF This command switches the filter f
129. I G SOUR A trigger delay set with TRIG DEL is ignored but not the automatic delay determined when TRIG DEL AUTO ON is set When the trigger source is HOLD a measurement can only be started with TRIG Error messages 211 Trigger ignored The sensor is not in the WAIT FOR TRG state TRIGger 1 4 ALL LEVel float value Determines the power a trigger signal must exceed TRIG SLOP POS or fall short of TRIG SLOP NEG before a trigger event is detected This setting is only used for the trigger signal source TRIG SOUR INTernal Unit DBM W Default unit DBM Value range depending on sensor RST value depending on sensor TRIGger 1 4 ALL SLOPe POSitive NEGative This command determines whether the rising POSitive or the falling NEGative edge of the signal is used for triggering RST value depending on sensor 1144 1400 12 6 106 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands TRIGger 1 4 ALL SOURCe BUS EXTernal HOLD IMMediate INTernal Sets the trigger signal source for the WAIT FOR TRG state BUS The trigger event is initiated by TRIG IMM or TRG In this case the other trigger setting are meaningless EXTernal Triggering is performed with an external signal applied to the trigger connector The TRIG SLOP command determines whether the rising or the falling edge of the signal is to be used for triggering Waiting for a trigger event can be skipped by TRIG IMM IMMediate The
130. INIT FETCh 7 214 Trigger deadlock TRG or GET is not possible if FETCh is waiting 1144 1400 12 Annex 1 8 E 2 R amp S NRP Annex Remote Control Commands Trigger state system The accuracy of a result largely depends on how accurately the sequence of a measurement can be determined The R amp S NRP manages a trigger state system to SCPI 1999 0 for each sensor to define the exact start and stop time of a measurement This system defines the sequence of a measurement Cycle 4 different device states are defined in the trigger state system implemented in the R amp S NRP IDLE INITIATED WAIT FOR TRG MEASURING 1144 1400 12 The R amp S NRP is in the idle state and performs no measurement On power up of the R amp S NRP it is in the LOCAL mode and in the IDLE state All connected sensors are set to INIT CONT ON to allow measurements to be continuously displayed Thus the IDLE state is exited and the instrument is again in this state if INIT CONT OFF is sent via the remote control This state is a transition state which is exited immediately after it has been entered It has been defined so as to allow the user to decide whether the next measurement cycle is to be immediately started INIT CONT ON or all cycles defined via TRIG COUNT have not yet been processed or the R amp S NRP returns to the IDLE state The state is only entered internally and is not noticed by the user The R amp S NRP waits for a tr
131. Ite NR1 NR1 Option R amp S NRP B1 TTL 1 ACTive LOW HIGH FAIL HIGH LOW FEED string HVOLtage lt float_value gt LVOLtage lt float_value gt STATe ON OFF OUTPut RECorder 1 2 FEED lt string gt Assigns a calculate block to one of the two analog outputs On the basis of the set characteristic the measured value is converted to a DC voltage that can be tapped at the appropriate output Value range CALC1 CALC2 CALC3 CALC4 RST value output 1 CALCI output 2 CALC2 1144 1400 12 6 44 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands OUTPut RECorder 1 2 LIMit LOWer float value Voltage BB EE 8 0 V Pm Im IM M MM M MM MM MM 0 0V Power OUTP REC LIM LOW OUTP REC LIM UPP Figure 6 5 Characteristic of analog outputs Specifies the lower power limit of the characteristic for one of the two analog outputs gt Figure 6 5 The unit corresponds to the output unit of the measured value The value range also depends on which output unit the measured value in the window currently has Unit of measured value 9 99999F 13 0103 Value range 9 99999E5 196 897 Unit gt Table 6 3 on page 6 27 RST value 20 DBM or 0 DB v V Note The characteristic is linear in the selected unit of the measured value OUTPut RECorder 1 2 LIMit LOWer POWer float value Specifies the lower power limit
132. LLFail SUMMary NTRansition STAT OPERation LLFail SUMMary PTRansition STAT OPERation ULFail SUMMary EVENt STAT OPERation ULFail SUMMary CONDition STAT OPERation ULFail SUMMary ENABle STAT OPERation ULFail SUMMary NTRansition STAT OPERation ULFail SUMMary PTRansition STATus OPERation MEASuring SUMMary EVENt STATus OPERation MEASuring SUMMary CONDition STATus OPERation MEASuring SUMMary ENABle STATus OPERation MEASuring SUMMary NTRansition STATus OPERation MEASuring SUMMary PTRansition STAT OPERation SENSe SUMMary EVENt STAT OPERation SENSe SUMMary CONDition STAT OPERation SENSe SUMMary ENABle OPERation SENSe SUMMary NTRansition OPERation SENSe SUMMary PTRansition OPERation TRIGger SUMMary EVENt STATus OPERation TRIGger SUMMary CONDition STATus OPERation TRIGger SUMMary ENABle STATus OPERation TRIGger SUMMary NTRansition STATus OPERation TRIGger SUMMary PTRansition STATus QUEStionable EVENt STATus QUEStionable CONDition STATus QUEStionable ENABle STATus QUEStionable NTRansition 1144 1400 12 6 119 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP STATus QUEStionable PTRansition STATus QUEStionable CALibrati SUMMary EVENt
133. Measurement aborted Trunc Meas is displayed when there is an over flow of the sensor internal buffer for samples Overflow occurs if a burst is too long 4 65 E 2 Messages and alarms Reduced Horiz Resol 266 Open new window for attached sensor B OK 4 MENU Cancel ESC 1144 1400 12 R amp S NRP Resolution reduced in the Scope mode The settings require a sampling rate located out side the range supported by the sensor Thus the number of sampled points is temporarily reduced Hardware error A sensor has detected a hardware error Automatic window initialization If an additional sensor is connected to the R amp S NRP during operation and if no currently open window displays the values measured in the channel concerned the R amp S NRP automatically offers to open a window and to configure it for measurements with the additional sensor con nected The previous settings of the newly opened window are lost To prevent this we recommend you to cancel with the key and to manually config ure a window 4 66 E 2 R amp S NRP Table of Contents Chapter 5 Table of Contents 5 Remote Control Fundamentals sese 5 1 Differences between Remote Control and Manual Control 5 1 KEIER 5 1 Measurement Mocdes esee enne nns t enin a aa aa a aa aaa 5 2 Galculate BloGKS 5 2 inp en E Ee dee Eeer ee 5 2 Connecting a Controller to the Base Unn nens 5 3 Settings i Base Unit iue ety ee te Ee
134. Measurement menu R amp S NRP Setting the auxiliary value Func amp Unit Auxiliary Value In the Digital display mode the result and another value that character izes the result can be displayed T 8861dBm Fig 4 32 Measurement window Auxiliary Value Auxiliary Value C Selecting the auxiliary value ded Max The greatest value that has been measured since the extreme value function was last reset Resetting the extreme value display page 4 38 Min The smallest value that has been measured since the extreme value function was last reset Resetting the extreme value display page 4 38 Max Min The interval that includes all values measured since the extreme value function was last reset Resetting the extreme value display page 4 38 Remote Control CALCulate 1 8 MINimum MAXimum PTPeak DATA DISPlay WINDow 1 4 AVALue MINimum MAXimum PTPeak OFF Resetting the extreme value display Measurement gt Max Hold Reset For each window the R amp S NRP continuously saves the maximum and minimum value measured since the start of the measurement or since these values were last reset These values should therefore be reset before the measurement is started Measurement menu Clears the extreme values and restarts recording of extreme values Max Hold Reset C Remote Control d CALCulate 1 8 EXTRemes RESet 1144 1400 12 4 38 E 2 R amp S NRP Configuring measurements Measurement menu Additional functi
135. NAME DISPlay Dow SS RESolution DISPlay Dow ss SELect DISPlay Dow e SIZE DISPlay Dow s STATe MEMory commands MEMory CATalog ALL MEMory CATalog STATe MEMory CATalog TABLe MEMory CLEar NAME MEMory CLEar TABLe MEMory FREE ALL MEMory FREE STATe MEMory FREE TABLe MEMory NSTates MEMory STATe CATalog MEMory STATe DEFine MEMory TAB FREQuency MEMory TABLe FREQuency POINts MEMory TABLe GAIN MAGNitude MEMory TABLe GAIN MAGNitude POINts MEMory TABLe MOVE MEMory TABLe SELect OUTPut command OUTPut ROSCillator STATe SENSe commands SENSe 1 4 AVERage STATe SENSe 1 4 AVERage COUNt SENSe 1 4 AVERage COUNt AUTO 1144 1400 12 6 116 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands SENSe 1 4 AVERage COUNt AUTO MTIMe 6 52 SENSe 1 4 AVERage COUNt AUTO RESolution 6 52 SENSe 1 4 AVERage COUNt AUTO SLOT 6 52 SENSe 1 4 AVERage COUNt AUTO NSRatio 6 53 SENSe 1 4 AVERage COUNt AUTO TYPE 6 53 SENSe 1 4 AVERage RESet 6 99 SENSe 1 4 AVERage TCONtrol 5 53 SENSe 1 4 CORRection DCYCle INPut MAGNitude 6 54
136. NIT initiates the measurement After RST the trigger system is set to straight through TRIG SOUR IMM so that the trigger system state changes to MEASURING via INITIATED and WAIT FOR TRG After the measurement has been completed FETCh delivers the result to the output queue from which it can be fetched Configuration of the trigger system Trigger source After a measurement is started with INIT the state WAIT FOR TRG is entered This is a preliminary stage to the measurement which has been initiated so that the measurement may start with high accuracy at a defined point in time For this purpose different sources can be defined for the trigger event which triggers the measurement In manual operation a trigger event is not expected in the ContAv mode Since the measurement is to be performed continuously the trigger source TRIGger SOURce is set to IMMediate 1144 1400 12 Annex 1 12 E 2 R amp S NRP Annex Remote Control Commands If triggering needs to occur in response to a rising signal edge the trigger system has to be configured with TRIG SOUR INT and TRIG SLOP POS RST TRIG SOUR INT triggering in response to a signal edge TRIG SLOP POS triggering in response to a rising signal edge INIT FETCh Note The settings of commands TRIG SOUR and TRIG SLOP are ignored in the amp BurstAv mode In this mode the beginning and the end of the power pulse are automatically recognized For this reason the
137. NSe2 TIMing STARt 10 STOP 10 A new program message always starts with the full path however Example v SENSe2 TIMing STARt 10 SENSe2 TIMing STOP 10 Note Processing of a program message is aborted if an error occurs If only sensor 2 is connected to a multichannel device for example the program message SENS1 FREQ 50 GHZ SENS2 FREQ 50 GHZ will be aborted after the first command and a second frequency setting will not be performed 1144 1400 12 5 9 E 3 Remote Control Fundamentals R amp S NRP Responses to Queries Unless otherwise expressly specified a query is defined for each command The query is created by appending a question mark to the associated command Some of the SCPI rules for query responses are stricter than those of the IEEE 488 2 standard 1 Therequired value is sent without header Example SENSe AVERage TCONTro1 Response MOV 2 Maximum and minimum values as well as all other quantities queried by a special text parameter are returned as numeric values Example SENSe POWer TSLot COUNt MAXimum Response 26 3 Numeric values are output without a unit Physical quantities refer to the basic units or to the units set with the UNIT command Example SENSe3 FREQuency Response 1 000000E06 for 1 MHz 4 Boolean values are returned as 0 for OFF and 1 for ON Example SySTem BEEPer STATe Response 1 5 Character data is r
138. OFF This command activates and deactivates the current frequency dependent offset table The current table is selected with the SENSe 1 4 CORRection FDOTable SELect command Only one table can be active at a time RST value OFF SENSe 1 4 CORRection SPDevice STATe ON OFF Instructs the sensor to perform a measured value correction by means of the stored s parameter device RST value depending on sensor SENSe 1 4 FREQuency CW FIXed float value This command informs the R amp S NRP about the frequency of the power to be measured since this frequency is not automatically determined The frequency is used to determine a frequency dependent correction factor for the measurement results Unit Hz Value range depending on sensor RST value depending on sensor 1144 1400 12 6 55 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP SENSe 1 4 FUNCtion ON lt string gt This command sets the sensor to one of the measurement modes of Table 6 11 Table 6 11 Measurement modes string Measurement mode POWer AVG ContAv After a trigger event the power is integrated over a time interval averaging set with SENS POW APER POWer TSLot avcG limeslot T The power is simultaneously measured in up to 26 time windows The number of time windows is set with SENS POW TSL COUN The length of a time window is determined via SENS POW TSL WIDT The measurement result is r
139. OLerance lt float_value gt lt capture_time gt Value range depending on sensor Unit s Default value depending on sensor Period within which measured data are captured in the Scope mode gt SENSe 1 4 TRACe TIME float value lt buffered_size gt Value range depending on sensor Default value depending on sensor Unit Number of requested measured values gt SENSe 1 4 POWer AVG BUFFer SIZE int value scope size Value range depending on sensor Default value depending on sensor Unit Number of measured values in one data set gt SENSe 1 4 TRACe POINts int value Error messages 24 Sensor mode not supported A sensor does not support a measurement mode 221 Settings conflict This error is generated when a FETCH or READ command is sent and the current device settings do not correspond to the transmitted parameters The parameters transmitted in these two commands are not used for device configuration but rather to check the settings 108 Parameter not allowed The parameter list contains unexpected parameter types or the parameters are not sent in the correct order 127 Invalid numeric data An invalid value was specified for lt resolution gt 171 Invalid expression Error in the source list parameter Two sensors were specified instead of one or the specified sensor is not correct 1144 1400 12 6 20 E 3 R amp S N
140. P CONFigure DIFFerence RELative CONFigure SUM CONFigure SUM RELative CONFigure RATio CONFigure RATio RELative CONFigure SWR CONF igure RLOSs CONFigure REFLection CONFigure CONFigure RELative CONFigure DIFFerence CONFigure DIFFerence RELative CONFigure SUM CONFigure SUM RELative CONFigure RATio CONFigure RATio RELative CONFigure SWR CONFigure RLOSs CONFigure REFLection CONFigure FETCh FETCh FETCh RELative FETCh DIFFerence FETCh DIFFerence RELative FETCh SUM FETCh SUM RELative FETCh RATio FETCh 1144 1400 12 RATio RELative 6 110 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands AVG SWR AVG RLOSs AVG REFLection TS C AVG AVG RELative AVG DIFFerence AVG DIFFerence RELative AVG SUM AVG SUM RELative AVG RATio AVG RATio RELative AVG SWR AVG RLOSs AVG REFLection AVG AVG RELative AVG DIFFerence AVG DIFFerence RELative AVG SUM AVG SUM RELative AVG RATio AVG RATio RELative AVG SWR AVG RLOSs
141. P Remote Control Commands CALibration Table 6 4 Commands of the CALibration system Command Parameter Unit jRemark 0 CALibration 1 4 ALL ON OFF ONCE lt block_data gt CALibration 1 4 ALL ZERO AUTO ON OFF ONCE The CALibration 1 4 ZERO AUTO ONCE command performs zeroing using the signal at the sensor input The sensor must be disconnected from all power sources If the signal at the input considerably deviates from 0 W an error message is issued and the command is aborted SCPI error 231 Data questionable ZERO ERROR When used as a setting command CAL 1 4 ZERO AUTO accepts only the parameter ONCE start of zeroing OFF is ignored and ON is not accepted A query returns ON if a calibration is running in all other cases OFF The command is overlapping i e other commands can be sent to the R amp S NRP while one or more calibrations are running Zeroing is recommended if the temperature has varied by more than about 5 C the sensor has been replaced no zeroing was performed in the last 24 hours signals of very low power are to be measured for instance if the expected measured value is less than 10 dB above the lower measurement range limit RST value OFF Error messages 224 Illegal parameter value The transfer parameter is a numeric value unequal 0 corresponds to OFF CALibration 1 4 ALL DATA block data This command is use
142. P can respond when the values drop below this limit see other CALCulate 1 8 LIMit commands The parameter unit is determined according to Table 6 3 The value range depends on the current output unit of the calculate block s measured value Unit of measured value 9 999998 13 0103 Value range 9 99999E5 196 897 Unit gt Table 6 3 on page 6 27 RST value 0 DBM or 0 DB CALCulate 1 8 LIMit LOWer DATA POWer float value This command sets a lower limit for the measured power unit W DBM or DBUV The R amp S NRP can respond when the values drop below this limit see other CAL Culate 1 8 LIMit commands Unit DBM W DBUV Default unit DBM Value range 120 DBM to 90 DBM RST value 0 DBM CALCulate 1 8 LIMit LOWer DATA RATio float value This command sets a lower limit for the measured power ratios unit DB DPCT or 0 The R amp S NRP can respond when the ratios drop below this limit see other CALCulate 1 8 LIMit commands Unit DB DPCT O Default unit DB Value range 200 200 DB RST value 0 DB 1144 1400 12 6 24 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands CALCulate 1 8 LIMit LOWer STATe ON OFF This command switches the monitoring function for the lower limit on or off RST value OFF CALCulate 1 8 LIMit UPPer DATA float value This command sets an upper limit for the measured values The R amp S NRP can respond when t
143. Prerequisite for this is the installation of the R amp S NRP B5 option Due to the complexity of the protocol the use of a VISA library is also urgently recommended here The VISA library that is used must support VXI 11 The R amp S NRP must have a unique IP address in the Ethernet This address can be assigned either manually or automatically using the DHCP protocol Remote dialog box Remote Interfaces ES o o o e VAIN D gt Off GPB USB vu ded IPAddress Fig 4 53 Remote Dialog GPIB IP Address C_ Opens the dialog box for the configuration of the IP address d d 1144 1400 12 4 56 E 2 R amp S NRP System settings System menu JP Address IP Address e o o Manual DHCP Manual DHCP IP Address 898 1 2 248 IP Address 898 12 121 Mask 255 ol ou o Mask 255 0 O0 Gateway 883 0 0 2 Gateway 89 0 O0 Fig 4 54 IP Address Dialog Fig 4 55 IP Address Dialog DHCP Manual Manual DHCP C Selects between configuring the IP address manually or automatically dod Remote control SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess lt NR1 gt IP Address C Manual input of IP address dod Mask C Manual input of network mask dod Gateway C Gateway computer connecting the local network with other networks dod For automatic assignment a DHCP server must be accessible in the network If the R amp S NRP is to be integrated into a larger network please contact your netw
144. R amp S NRP Operation Measuring Status Register The CONDition register contains information as to whether a measurement is being performed by a sensor and depending on the configuration of the transition register the EVENt register indicates whether a measurement was started or completed since the last readout of this register The Operation Measuring Status Register can be read by the following commands STATus OPERation MEASuring SUMMary CONDition STATus OPERation MEASuring SUMMary EVENt Table 6 22 Meaning of bits used in the Operation Measuring Status Register Bit No Meaning 0 Not used 1 Sensor A measuring Sensor A is performing a measurement 2 Sensor B measuring Sensor B is performing a measurement 3 Sensor C measuring Sensor C is performing a measurement 4 Sensor D measuring Sensor D is performing a measurement 5 to14 Not used 15 Bit 15 will never be used 1144 1400 12 6 82 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands Operation Trigger Status Register The CONDition register contains information as to whether a sensor is currently in the WAIT FOR TRG state i e expecting a trigger event and depending on the configuration of the transition register the EVEN register indicates whether the WAIT FOR TRG state was entered or quit by a sensor since the last readout of the register The Operation Trigger Status Register can be read by th
145. R amp S NRP must be assigned an IEC IEEE bus address In the manual control mode this is done in the System Remote menu IEC IEEE bus configuration Select GPIB as the active interface Setthe GPIB address to the desired value Any value between 0 and 30 is permissible Hardware Requirements IEC IEEE Bus In order to control the R amp S NRP via the IEC IEEE bus a controller with an IEC IEEE bus interface and an IEC IEEE bus cable are required Switchover to Remote Control REMOTE A link has been established between the controller and the R amp S NRP and is assumed to have been correctly configured After power up the R amp S NRP is always in the manual control mode LOCAL The R amp S NRP is switched to remote control irrespective of the selected interface as soon as an SCPI command is sent to the R amp S NRP All settings are maintained when the device is switched to the REMOTE mode Return to Manual Operation LOCAL In the remote mode all front panel controls are disabled except for the key and the topmost toggle softkey used to insert the window with the SCPI error queue The device remains in this state until it is switched back to manual control either on the front panel ESC LOCAL or with the remote control command GTL Note The remote control command LLO also allows the key to be disabled In this case return to manual operation is only possible by remote control or by switching the R amp S NRP off and on
146. RELative RELative Xpurst parameter list RATio RATio lt burst_parameter_list gt RATio RELative RATio RELative lt burst_parameter_list gt SWR SWR Xpburst parameter list REFLection REFLection Xpurst parameter list RLOSS RLOSs Xpburst parameter list 1144 1400 12 6 14 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands ContAv mode with data buffering CONFigure 1 8 READ 1 8 MEASure 1 8 FETCh 1 8 ARRay ARRay POWer POWer AVG AVG lt buffered_parameter_list gt RELative RELative lt buffered_parameter_list gt DIFFerence DIFFerence puffered parameter list RELative RELative lt buffered_parameter_list gt SU DIFFerence puffered parameter list RELative RELative lt buffered_parameter_list gt RATio RATio lt buffered_parameter_list gt RATio RELative RATio RELative lt buffered_parameter_list gt SWR SWR puffered parameter list REFLection REFLection puffered parameter list RLOSS RLOSs lt buffered_parameter_list gt Scope mode CONFigure 1 8 READ 1 8 MEASure 1 8 FETCh 1 8 XTIMe XTIMe POWer POWer scope parameter list 1144 1400 12 6 15 E 3 Calculation Functions The CALCulate blocks receive measurement data from the sensors via input channels which are called primary and secondary channel The following functions are available for calculating the primary Remote Control Commands R a
147. REQ for which a correction factor is then calculated by means of the offset table If the exact frequency selected is not in the table the values in the table are interpolated If the selected frequency is outside the specified frequency range the first or last offset value of the table is selected Interpolation is linear in the units HZ and DB Unit DB PCT Default unit DB RST values Tables are not changed in case of RST MEMory TTABLe GAIN POINts Returns the number of entries lines in the table selected with MEM TABL SEL lt string gt MEMory TABLe MAP lt string gt 1 9 MEMory TABLe MAP lt string gt The numbers 0 to 9 are permanently assigned to the memory locations for device states Names lt string gt can be assigned to the numbers with MEM TABL MAP The MEM CLE NAME MEM TABL MOVE and MEM TABL SEL commands expect these names as parameters not the numbers of the memory locations By default the tables are assigned the names Table 1 to Table 10 The name can contain the characters A to Z a to z 0 to 9 and The query form of this command returns the number of the memory location with the name string MEMory TABLe MOVE lt string gt lt string gt This command allows tables to be renamed The first parameter specifies the old name the second the new name No data is copied i e only the name of the table changes Example The comman
148. RMal Selecting the result display mode Windows T ype In the windows a variety of result display modes can be selected The digital display Dig displays measured values as a number with additional information next to the reading The hybrid digital analog display D A displays the measured value on an analog scale and also digitally B lzen srapn If the primay channel is in the Scope mode oscilloscope display is automatically selected The Graph display mode plots measured values against time This dis play mode is only available in the Scope mode Fig 4 25 Window menu softkeys for controlling the display mode Windows menu GI D A Graph C ded Dig Graph C ded Dig ARI CD ded 1144 1400 12 The Dig D A softkey is used for switching between the various window display modes Digital display Hybrid digital analog display Graph display mode in the Scope mode Remote control DISPlay WINDow 1 4 FORMat DIGital ANALog 4 29 E 2 Displaying measurement results Windows menu R amp S NRP Configuring the result display Each of the display modes has special configuration parameters In the digital display the resolution is adjustable Resolution page 4 30 In the hybrid digital analog mode you can adjust the resolution of the digital display Resolution page 4 30 and specify the scaling for the po crapn of analog scale tz Scale page 4 31 gaer Reselution cdi In the Graph display m
149. RP CALCulate Configuration of Calculate Blocks Remote Control Commands The calculate blocks calculating the measurement results from the sensor data are configured with the CALCulate command Eight blocks are available each with two input channels primary and secondary channel The available sensors 1 to 4 depending on device configuration and connected sensors can be assigned to the channels With the aid of a selectable function CALC MATH the channels can be processed together Table 6 2 Commands of the CALCulate system Command CALCulate 1 DATA MINimum DAT MAXimum DAT PTPeak DATA EXTRemes RESet FEED 1 2 LIMit BEEP CLEar IMMediate AUTO FAIL FCOunt UPPer DATA POWer RATio STATe LOWer DATA POWer RATio STATe EXPRession CATalog ELative MAGNitude AUTO POWer MAGNitude RATio MAGNitude STATe 1144 1400 12 string ON etl SEL SEL ON SEL f fl OFF oat value oat value oat value OFF oat value loat value oat value ON OFF string f OFF ONCE 1 f loat value loat value loat value ON OFF 6 21 DBM W DBUV DB DPCT O DBM W DBUV DB DPCT O DBM W DBUV DB DPCT O me ome 8 Query only The unit
150. RST REP H Note In the MoVing mode data from a point of time before the start of the current measurement can influence the measurement result if the data is still in the filter 1144 1400 12 6 53 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP SENSe 1 4 CORRection OFFSet float value With this command a fixed offset value can be defined for multiplying logarithmically adding the measured value of a sensor If the parameters are specified without a unit the unit set by UNIT POW RAT will be used Unit DB PCT Default unit DB Value range depending on sensor RST value depending on sensor SENSe 1 4 CORRection OFFSet STATe ON OFF This command switches the offset correction on or off RST value depending on sensor SENSe 1 4 CORRection DCYCle INPut MAGNitude float value This command informs the R amp S NRP about the duty cycle of the power to be measured The duty cycle correction is only applied in the ContAv mode where measurements are performed continuously without taking the timing of the signal into account Unit PCT Value range depending on sensor RST value depending on sensor SENSe 1 4 CORRection DCYCle STATe ON OFF This command switches duty cycle correction for the measured value on or off RST value depending on sensor SENSe 1 4 CORRection FDOFfset INPut MAGNitude float value This command is a query only The frequency dependent measured
151. Rection OFFSet With GAIN2 no unit may be specified Unit 1 is valid SENSe 1 2 CORRection LOSS2 Corresponds to the reciprocal of SENSe 1 2 CORRection OFFSet With LOSS2 no unit may be specified Unit 1 is valid SENSe 1 2 CORRection GAIN3 Has the same effect as SENSe 1 2 CORRection DCYCle With GAINS no unit may be specified Unit 1 is valid SENSe 1 2 CORRection GAIN4 Has the same effect as SENSe 1 2 CORRection FDOFfset INPut MAGNitude SENSe SWEep OFFSet TIME Is implemented in the R amp S NRP and has the same effect as SENSe TGATe OFFSet TIME SENSe SWEep TIME Is implemented in the R amp S NRP and has the same effect as SENSe TGATe TIME SYSTem COMMunicate SERial HELP HEADers LOCal REMote RINTerface RWLock Is not implemented in the R amp S NRP TRACe STATe Is not implemented in the R amp S NRP TRACe DATA Is not implemented in the R amp S NRP in this form Data of the Scope mode can only be queried via the high level commands FETCh READ MEAS and CALC DATA TRACe UNIT The UNIT node is only globally available in the R amp S NRP and affects all measurement results including Scope data and the unitless command parameters of the commands CALC LIM LOW CALC LIM UPP DISP MET ANAL LOW DISP MET ANAL UPP OUTP REC LIM LOW and OUTP REC LIM UPP
152. S Return loss CALC MATH RLOS SENSn REL STAT OFF REFL Reflection coefficient CALC MATH REFL SENSn REL STAT OFF Example RST CALC MATH SENS1 SENS2 CALC REL STAT ON relative measurement CALC REL 23 dB sets reference value INIT ALL starts measurements on all sensors FETCh processes sensors 1 and 2 Lr 1144 1400 12 Annex 1 20 E 2 R amp S NRP Annex Remote Control Commands Optimization of measurement speed The duration of a message can be reduced by making the following setting SYST SPEed FAST deactivates screen content The following settings also affect the measurement speed to a greater or lesser extent Which of these settings are possible however depends on what is to be measured For example if measurement accuracy is important filtering may also have to be activated which can reduce the measurement speed The length of the integration time also directly affects the measurement time and should therefore be kept as short as possible if a short measurement time is desired Consequently the following list can only serve as a guideline for minimizing the measurement time SYST SPEed FAST deactivates screen content SENS AVER STAT OFF deactivates filtering of measured values SENS FUNC POW AVG ContAv mode SENS BUFF STAT OFF no buffered measurements S
153. SCHWARZ China Ltd Representative Office Shanghai Central Plaza 227 Huangpi North Road RM 807 809 Shanghai 200003 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ China Ltd Representative Office Beijing Room 602 Parkview Center 2 Jiangtai Road Chao Yang Distric Beijing 100016 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ China Ltd Representative Office Guangzhou Room 2903 Metro Plaza 183 Tianhe North Road Guangzhou 510075 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ China Ltd Representative Office Chengdu Unit G 28 F First City Plaza 308 Shuncheng Avenue Chengdu 610017 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ China Ltd Unit 3115 31 F Entertainment Building 30 Queen s Road Central Hongkong ROHDE amp SCHWARZ China Ltd Representative Office Xi an Room 10125 Jianguo Hotel Xi an 0 2 Huzhu Road Xi an 710048 Shanghai ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Communication Technology Co Ltd Central Plaza Unit 809 221 Huangpi North Road Shanghai 200003 Beijing ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Communication Technology Co Ltd Room 106 Parkview Centre No 2 Jiangtai Road Chao Yang District Beijing 100016 siehe see Slovenia HINIS TELECAST LTD Agiou Thoma 18 Kiti Larnaca 7550 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Praha s r o Hadovka Office Park Evropsk 33c 16000 Praha 6 1 613 592 80 00 1 613 592 80 09 cgirwarnauth rscanada ca 1 514 331 43 34 1 514 331 59 91 56 2 339 20 00 56 2 339 20 10 dnussbaum dymeq com 86 21 63 75 00 18 86 21 63 75 91 70 86 10 64 31 28 28
154. SN EXTRemes RESet 1144 1400 12 6 114 E 3 R amp S NRP LCulat LIMit BEEP Remote Control Commands CA LCulat LIMit CLEar IMMediate CA LCulat LIMit FAIL CA LCulat LIMi FCOunt CA LCulat LIMi UPPer DATA CA LCulat LIMi UPPer STATe CA LCulat LIMi LOWer DATA CA LCulat LIMi LOWer STATe CA LCulat MATH EXPRession CA LCulat MATH EXPRession CATalog CA LCulat RE tive MAGNitude CA LCulat RE tive MAGNitude AUTO CA LCulat RE tive POWer MAGNitude CA LCulat RE tive RATio MAGNitude CA LCulat RE tive STATe CALibration command CALibration 1 4 ZERO AUTO DISPlay command DISPlay ILLumination DISPlay ERRorlist STATe DISPlay MESSage STATe DISPlay MESSage TEXT CLEar DISPlay MESSage TEXT DATA DISPlay MESSage TYPE DISPlay PIXMap DISPlay UPDate DISPlay WINDow AVALue DISPlay WINDow FORMat DISPlay WINDow METer ANALog AUTo DISPlay WINDow 1144 1400 12 METer ANALog LOWer 6 115 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands DISPlay Dow s METer ANALog UPPer DISPlay Dow es
155. ST value depending on sensor 1144 1400 12 6 52 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands SENSe 1 4 AVERage COUNt AUTO NSRatio float value Indicates the maximum noise ratio in the measurement result Achieving the same result by filter length setting is attempted only if SENS 1 4 AVER COUN AUTO ON and SENS 1 4 AVER COUN AUTO TYPE NSR are set Unit DB PCT Default unit DB Value range depending on sensor RST value depending on sensor SENSe 1 4 AVERage COUNt AUTO TYPE RESolution NSR Selects a method by which the automatic filter length switchover can operate SENS 1 4 AVER COUN AUTO TYPE Setting taken into account RESolution ENS 1 4 AVER COUN AU NSR ENS 1 4 AVER COUN AUI RST value depending on sensor SENSe 1 4 AVERage RESet Initializes the digital filter by deleting the stored measured values RST value none SENSe 1 4 AVERage TCONtrol MOVing REPeat As soon as a new single value is determined the filter window is advanced by one value so that the new value is taken into account by the filter and the oldest value is forgotten SENSe 1 4 AVERage TCONtrol terminal control then determines whether a new result is calculated immediately after a new measured value is available MOVi ng or only after an entire range of new values is available for the filter REPeat RST Wert PRES and SYST PRES MOV
156. Sensor Trigger Advanced Single There is no remote control command The functionality can only be achieved with an appropriate trigger system configuration e g INIT CONT ON TRIG SOUR BUS and triggering with TRG Windows Window 1234 DISP SEL Windows Open Close DISP 1 4 STAT Windows gt Expand Restore Windows Dig D amp A Graph DISP 4 FORM Windows gt Resolution DISP 1 4 RES SENS 1 4 AVER COUN AUTO RES Windows gt Timeslot DISP 1 4 TSLot Windows T slot Windows 2 Analog Meter Auto Once DISP 1 4 MET AUTO ONCE DISP 4 ANAL AUTO ONCE Windows Analog Meter Left DISP 1 4 MET LOW DISP 4 ANAL LOW Windows Analog Meter Right DISP 1 4 MET UPP DISP 1 4 ANAL UPP Menu item in manual control SCPI command in short form Measurement Window 1234 DISP 1 4 S S L Measurement Function Primary Channel Measurement Function Secondary Channel Measurement Function Function CALC 1 8 MATH EXPR Measurement Function Unit UNIT POW and UNIT POW RAT Measurement Function Auxiliary Value DISP 1 8 AVAL Sen CALC 1 8 MAX DATA Max Min CALC 1 8 MIN DATA CALC 1 8 PTP DATA Measurement W dBm dBuV UNIT POW Measurement dB A96 1 UNIT POW RAT Measurement Rel On Off CALC 1 8 REL STAT and 114
157. Sensor C Front Rear Indicates whether sensor C is connected at the front bit is not set or rear bit is set of the device 1144 1400 12 6 77 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP Bit 3 No Meaning 12 Sensor D Front Rear Indicates whether sensor D is connected at the front bit is not set or rear bit is set of the device 13 Not used 14 Key pressed This bit is always set if a key on the front panel is pressed CONDition or was pressed EVEN 15 Bit 15 will never be used Questionable Status Register This register contains information on questionable device states Such states may occur when the device is not operated in compliance with its specifications The register can be read by the queries STATus QUEStionable CONDition Or STATus QUEStionable EVENt Table 6 18 Meaning of bits used in the Questionable Status Register Bit 2 No Meaning 0to2 Not used 3 Questionable Power Status Register summary bit Corresponds to the summary bit of the Questionable Power Status Register 4 Questionable Window Status Register summary bit Corresponds to the summary bit of the Questionable Windows Status Register 5to7 Not used 8 Questionable Calibration Status Register summary bit Corresponds to the summary bit of the Questionable Calibration Status Register 9 POST Failure The built in test of the R amp S NRP carried out automatically upon po
158. Sensor Input NRP B5 1146 9608 02 3rd und 4th Sensor NRP B6 1146 9908 02 Rear Panel Sensor NRP Z3 1146 7005 02 USB Adapter NRP Z4 1146 8001 02 USB Adapter NRP Z11 1138 3004 02 Average Power Sensor NRP Z21 1137 6000 02 Average Power Sensor NRP Z22 1137 7506 02 Average Power Sensor NRP Z23 1137 8002 02 Average Power Sensor NRP Z24 1137 8502 02 Average Power Sensor NRP Z51 1138 0005 02 Thermal Power Sensor NRP Z55 1138 2008 02 Thermal Power Sensor complies with the provisions of the Directive of the Council of the European Union on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electrical equipment for use within defined voltage limits 73 23 EEC revised by 93 68 EEC relating to electromagnetic compatibility 89 336 EEC revised by 91 263 EEC 92 31 EEC 93 68 EEC Conformity is proven by compliance with the following standards EN61010 1 1993 A2 1995 EN55011 1998 A1 1999 EN61326 1997 A1 1998 A2 2001 For the assessment of electromagnetic compatibility the limits of radio interference for Class B equipment as well as the immunity to interference for operation in industry have been used as a basis Affixing the EC conformity mark as from 2002 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 D 81671 M nchen Munich 2003 11 13 Central Quality Management FS QZ Becker 1143 8500 02 CE E 4 Support Center Telefon Telephone 49 0 180 512 42 42 Fax 49 89 41 29 137 77 E mail C
159. Start IM EXCL 10 us Exclude Time End IM EXCL 15 us Timegate Offset 1 10 us 2 1 885 ms Timegate Time 1 1 597 ms 2 351 us Scope Offset Time OFFS TIMI 30 us Scope Capture Time TIMI 2 530 ms Scope Number Of Points 312 Scope Realtime OFF Trigger Delay 0s Trigger Level 30 dBm Trigger Source INT Trigger Slope POS Trigger Holdoff 4 980 ms Trigger Hysteresis 1144 1400 12 6 140 3 dB E 3 R amp S NRP Sensor parameter Sensor Mode Bluetooth DH5 Remote control command in short form Remote Control Commands POW XTIM Integration Time APER 3 75 ms Duty Cycle SDCYC 76 533 Duty Cycle Correction DCYC STAT ON Smoothing SMO OFF Dropout Tolerance BURST DTOL 2 870 ms Exclude Time Start IM EXCL 10 us Exclude Time End IM EXCL 15 us Timegate Offset 1 10 us 2 3 135 ms Timegate Time 1 2 845 ms 2 351 us Scope Offset Time OFFS TIMI 30 us Scope Capture Time TIMI 2 530 ms Scope Number Of Points 312 Scope Realtime OFF Trigger Delay 0s Trigger Level 30 dBm Trigger Source INT Trigger
160. T PERATA R A NTN 1 12 Configuration of the trigger system sssssssssssees eee 1 12 Configuration of sensor settngs tnt trttttnnrnnrnsstnssrnnstnnsrnnnrnnnnt 1 16 Configuration of CALCulate block 1 20 Optimization of measurement speed 1 21 1144 1400 12 l Annex 1 E 2 List of Figs Annex Chapter I R amp S NRP Figs Fig l 1 Overview of basic relationships in the trigger state system c cseeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeaeeeeeeeseeneess 1 10 Fig l 2 Processing of measured values in the R amp S NRP sss eee 1 14 Fig l 3 Meaning of settings for TRIG HOLD and TRIG DEL 1 14 1144 1400 12 l Annex 2 E 2 R amp S NRP Annex Remote Control Commands Programming Measurements with the R amp S NRP Measuring with high level commands The R amp S NRP is based on the instrument model defined in the SCPI 1999 0 standard This model provides a number of logic blocks that can be configured via remote control commands The R amp S NRP is provided with high level measurement commands that automatically perform the most important settings and simplify measurements thus making it unnecessary to completely configure these blocks for each measurement Only the high level commands are described starting with the simplest command which is expanded in the following sections Note the following for the syntax of commands There is a short and a long form for the commands The short form is normally used However
161. TIMing EXCL STARt NRf Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 TIMing EXCL STOP NRf Depending on sensor SYST BEEP NOT KEY OFF No key click SYST BEEP NOT OVER OFF No warning on sensor overload SYST ERR EX OFF Keine erweiterte Fehlemeldungen f r SYST ERR SYST 1 4 SPEed NORM Depending on sensor SYST STAN PWS OFF Window SYST STAN TRIG SOUR INT Internal triggering INIT 1 4 ALL CONT ON CPRES and SYST DPE OFF RST INIT 1 4 ALL DIS OFF TRIG ALL SYNC OFF TRIG 1 4 ALL ATR ON OFF Depending on sensor TRIG 1 4 ALL COUN NR1 Depending on sensor TRIG 1 4 ALL DELay NRf Depending on sensor TRIG 1 4 ALL DEL AUTO ON OFF Depending on sensor TRIG 1 4 ALL HOLD NRf Depending on sensor TRIG 1 4 ALL HYST NRf Depending on sensor 1144 1400 12 6 100 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands Command Preset and RST value Remark NRf Depending on sensor POS NEG Depending on sensor IMM HOLD EXT Depending on sensor INT BUS DBM Logarithmic result scaling POW RAT DB Logarithmic result scaling SYSTem SENSor 1 4 INFO lt string gt Returns information on a sensor lt string gt is used to query a specific information item If called without parameters the command returns all available information in the form of a list of strings separated by commas The permissible values for string depend on the sensor For de
162. TL Group 4 255 22 276 00 37 P 0 Box 7512 255 22 276 02 93 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ 7 095 745 88 50 to 53 Dunga Street Plot 343 345 sstI twiga com Representative Office Moscow 7 095 745 88 54 Dar es Salaam 119180 Yakimanskaya nab 2 rs russia rsru rohde schwarz com oscow Thailand Schmidt Electronics Thailand Ltd 66 2 643 13 30 to 39 63 Government Housing Bank Bldg 66 2 643 13 40 r Chris Porzky 966 1 465 64 28 Ext 303 ower II 19th floor Rama 9 Rd kamthoninthuyot schmidtthailand c ROHDE amp SCHWARZ International GmbH 966 1 465 6428 Ext 229 Huaykwang Bangkapi om c o Haji Abdullah Alireza Co Ltd chris porzkyG rsd rohde schwarz com Bangkok 10320 P 0 Box 361 Riyadh 11411 Thailand PP Operation Co Ltd 66 2 880 93 47 41 5 Mooban Tarinee 66 2 880 93 47 GENTEC Boromrajchonnee Road thipsukon tpp operation com alingchan Bangkok 10170 Representative Office Belgrade 381 11 305 50 25 ose Jovanovica 7 381 11 305 50 24 Trinidad siehe see Mexico 11030 Beograd amp Tobago Specialne systemy a software a s 421 2 65 42 24 88 Svrcia ul 421 2 65 42 07 68 841 04 Bratislava stefan lozek special sk Tunisia ELETEK ROHDE amp SCHWARZ 386 1 423 46 51 71 Rue Alain Savary Representation Ljubljana 386 1 423 46 11 Residence Alain Savary C64 Tbilisijska 89 rohdesi rsoe rohde schwarz com 1003 Tunis 1000 Ljubljana Turkey ROHDE amp SCHWARZ International GmbH 90 216 385 19 17 Protea Data Systems Pty Ltd 2
163. TO MTIMe NRf Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 AVER COUN AUTO RES NRf Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 AVER COUN AUTO SLOT NR1 Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 AVER COUN AUTO NSR NRf Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 AVER COUN AUTO TYPE RES NSR Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 AVER TCO OV CPRES and SYST PRES REP RST SENS 1 4 CORR DCYC NRf Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 CORR DCYC STA ON OFF Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 CORR FDOT No change SENS 1 4 CORR FDOT STA OFF SENS 1 4 CORR OFFS NRf Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 CORR OFFS STA ON OFF Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 FREO No change SENS 1 4 FUNC POW AVG Depending on sensor POW BURS AVG POW TSL AVG XTIM POW 1144 1400 12 6 99 E 3 Remote Control Commands Command Preset and RST value Remark R amp S NRP SENS 1 4 APER NRf Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 BUFF STAT ON OFF Depending on sensor SENS 1 4 BUFF SIZe NR1
164. There are 10 tables each of which can contain up to 80 fre quency offset pairs The default names of the Tables are Table 1 to Table 10 however the names can be changed using the table editor Remote Control SENSe 1 4 CORRection FDOTable SELect string Table C_ Activates the frequency dependent offset correction specified in the d Table you have selected Remote Control SENSe 1 4 CORRection FDOTable STATe ON OFF 1144 1400 12 4 16 E 2 R amp S NRP Data acquisition and parameters Sensor menu Edit Table CC Opens a dialog box for editing the selected offset correction table d d Remote Control MEMory TABLe FREQuency NRf NRf MEMory TABLe GAIN MAGNitude lt NRf gt lt NRf gt S Parameter SSC dd Activates the S parameter set stored in the sensor for a twoport that has been connected ahead of the sensor Remote Control SENSe 1 4 CORRection SPDevice STATe ON OFF 1144 1400 12 4 17 E 2 Data acquisition and parameters Sensor menu R amp S NRP Table editor for offset tables Offset Edit Table The table editor displays the name of the table being edited in its title bar Below the title bar there is a two column list containing frequency and offset pairs There are two table editor modes e Selection mode In this mode using the cursor keys you can select the number field you want to Edit Insert Or Delete Note The whole of a long list cannot be disp
165. This applies to both numeric and text parameters For this reason no fixed ranges are specified with these commands the ranges can be obtained from the respective sensor manual Table 6 34 Commands for setting the trigger system of a sensor m eme mem ABORt 4 ALL INITiate l 4 ALL CONTinuous DISable IMMediate TRIGger ALL SYNChronize STATe OFF TRIGger 1 4 ALL N OFF ATRigger STATe O COUNt lt int_value gt lt DELay float_value gt AUTO ON OFF HOLDoff lt float_value gt HYSTeresis lt float_value gt IMMediate LEVel float value SLOPe POSitive NEGative SOURce BUS EXTernal HOLD IMMediate INTernal ABORt 1 4 ALL Immediately sets the respective sensors to the IDLE state Measurements in progress are interrupted If INIT CONT ON is set a new measurement is immediately started since the trigger system is not influenced INITiate 1 4 ALL CONTinuous ON OFF Selects either single shot or continuous free running measurement cycles In the course of a measurement cycle a sensor passes through the IDLE INITIATED WAIT_FOR_TRG and MEASURING states before it is again set to the IDLE I NI T CONT OFF or the INITIATED I NI T CONT ON state The settings are not changed when control is switched from manual to remote INIT CONT ON is set when remote control is switched back to manua
166. V bit in the STB it is also shown in Fig 6 11 Structure of SCPI Status Register Each SCPI register consists of five 16 bit registers which have different functions Fig 6 10 The individual bits are independent of each other i e each hardware status is assigned a bit number which is the same for all five registers For instance bit 4 of the operation status register is assigned to the hardware status Measurement in all five registers Bit 15 the most significant bit is set to zero in all registers This prevents problems some controllers have with the processing of unsigned integers States events or summary bits of other registers T CONDition register ALTI PTRansition register EB BIZIZZZREZREEEE 15 14 13 12 NTRansition register 3 2 eege Nrferetenresser II ses EVENT and ENABle bits of all bits Simplified diagram E EVEN register 2 2 Jo 0000000000000000 2 Summary bit of SCPI register written into a bit of the STB or into the CONDition bit of a ENABle register EJ superordinate register Fig 6 10 Standard SCPI status register 1144 1400 12 6 70 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands Table 6 15 Decimal value of individual bits in the SCPI status register Decimal value Bit No Decimal value Bit No Decimal value Bit No Decimal value CONDition register PTRansition register NTRansition register EVENt register 1144 1400 12 The CON
167. ace Messages Interface messages are transmitted to the device on data lines where the ATN is set to active LOW They are used for communication between the controller and the R amp S NRP Common Commands Common commands are in the code range 0x10 to Ox1F They affect all devices on the bus without any addressing being required Table 6 38 Common commands Command Effect on device DCL Device Clear Interrupts processing of received commands and sets the command processing Software to a defined initial state This command does not change the device setting IFC Interface Clear Resets the interfaces to their initial condition LLO Local Lockout Manual switchover to LOCAL is disabled SPE Serial Poll Enable Ready for serial poll SPD Serial Poll Disable End of serial poll PPU Parallel Poll Unconfigure End of parallel poll query status Addressed Commands Addressed commands are in the code range 0x00 to OxOF hex They only affect devices addressed as a listener Table 6 39 Addressed commands Command Effect on device SDC Selected DeviceClear Interrupts processing of received commands and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state This command does not change the device setting GTL Go to Local Change to local mode manual control PPC Parallel Poll Configure Configures device for parallel poll 1144 1400 12 6 127 E 3 Remote Control Commands R
168. again Power On Reset v 1144 1400 12 5 3 E 3 Remote Control Fundamentals R amp S NRP Communication on Data Lines The IEC IEEE bus is the most common remote interface for measuring devices It has also been implemented in the R amp S NRP The remote controller and the R amp S NRP communicate by means of messages The messages sent on the data lines section Interfaces page 6 124 can be divided into two groups e Interface messages e Device dependent messages Interface Messages Interface messages are transmitted on the data lines of the IEC IEEE bus when the ATN control line is active Interface messages allow the controller and the device to communicate and can only be sent by a controller which serves as the IEC IEEE bus controller Interface commands can be further classified as e common commands e addressed commands Common commands affect all devices connected to the IEC IEEE bus without requiring an address whereas addressed commands only affect devices addressed as a listener The interface messages relevant for the device are described in the annex Interface Messages page 6 127 Device Dependent Messages Commands and Responses Device dependent messages are transmitted on the data lines of the IEC IEEE bus when the ATN control line is not active The ASCII code is used Device dependent messages are classified according to the direction in which they are sent Commands are messages sent by the controller
169. age is terminated by oPC or OPC the end of command processing is signalled to the controller provided the controller has been adequately programmed gt Table 5 1 Table 5 1 Synchronization with OPC OPC and WAI Command Effect Programming of controller Sets the Operation Complete bit in the ESR after Set bit O in the ESE of the R amp S NRP all commands sent prior to OPC have been Set bit 5 in the SRE of the R amp S NRP processed Wait for service request SRQ Writes 1 in the output buffer after all commands IEC IEEE bus the R amp S NRP is addressed as a talker sent prior to OPC have been processed Commands can be sent but they are only executed WAT is sent directly after the command that should be a completion of all commands sent prior to completed before other commands can be executed Dividing commands timewise before after WA serializes the command sequence 1144 1400 12 5 14 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Fundamentals Annex Automatic Settings for Manual Selection of a Measurement Mode When the measurement mode of a sensor is manually selected Sensor Mode automatic settings are made for the trigger system and timing which cannot be changed by manual control This considerably simplifies operation These settings are not changed when the measurement mode is selected by remote control SENSe FUNCtion and have to be set to the desired value by appropriate SCPI comman
170. al resolution should be high enough to allow the peak value to appear in the diagram as a round cap several pixels wide Otherwise the displayed and or measured value may be too low The reason lies in the fact that a measurement point repre sents the power for a time interval and the average power is assigned by the R amp S NRP 1144 1400 12 4 48 E 2 R amp S NRP Management of settings File menu Management of settings File menu WS Setup d Recall Save Default setting Preset p 4 49 Loading user defined settings und Storing user defined settings p 4 49 4 50 niea d Loading settings for mobile radio standards p 4 50 Error List 1 Programming aids p 4 52 Window Name Assigning names to windows p 4 52 Fig 4 42 File menu Default setting The EE softkey in the File menu changes the R amp S NPP to its default setting The black background of the text indicates that the function can also be started by pressing the hardkey In the default setting a window is opened for each connected sensor The default setting is sensor specific Storing user defined settings The R amp S NRP provides 19 memory spaces in which complete device settings can be stored Setup memory Settings can be stored by using the Save Setup dialog box The memory spaces can be la belled with a name for identification File menu Save Set Setup D gt Setup 1 E Save d Setup Name Set
171. alculate block outputs the measured value of sensor A The calculate block outputs the measured value of sensor B The calculate block outputs the measured value of sensor C The calculate block outputs the measured value of sensor D The calculate block outputs the difference between the measured values of sensor n and sensor m The calculate block outputs the sum of the measured values of sensor n and sensor m The calculate block outputs the quotient of the values measured by sensor n and m 1 4 SENSm SENSn 1 4 SENSm SENSn If sensor n measures the forward power of a wave and sensor m the reflected power the calculate block outputs the standing wave ratio of this wave The output unit is set to percent UNIT RAT PCT ASENSm SENSn If sensor n measures the forward power of a wave and sensor m the reflected transmitted power the calculate block outputs the reflection coefficient transmission factor of a DUT The output unit is set to percent UNIT RAT PCT 20 logio V SENSm SENSn If sensor n measures the forward power of a wave and sensor m the reflected transmitted power the calculate block outputs the return loss transmission loss of a DUT This function principally supplies the same result as the SENSn SENSm function The difference is that the output unit is automatically set to dB UNIT RAT DB This command sele
172. allowed The short form uses the first four characters of the long form If the fourth character is a vowel and the long form consists of more than four characters only the first three characters are used for the short form The short form is shown by upper case characters and the long form is the entire keyword Example STATus QUEStionable ENABle 1 and STAT QUES ENAB 1 Ki v Note Upper and lower case letters are only used for identifying the long and short form in the manual the device itself does not differentiate between the two types of characters The parameter must be separated from the header by a white space If a command contains several parameters they have to be separated by a comma LL Some of the commands allow the specification of the parameters MI Ni mum MAXi mum and DEFault For a description of the parameter types see gt section Parameters page 5 11 Example SENSe1 TIMing EXCLude STARt MINimum Response 0 This query asks for the minimum setting value If a device has several identical functions or features e g inputs the desired function can be selected by a suffix to the command Commands without a suffix are interpreted as having a suffix of 1 Example SENSe2 FUNCtion POWer AVG This command sets the measurement mode of sensor 2 to the ContAv mode 5 8 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Fundamentals Structure of a Program Message A program message may contain one or s
173. also recorded in the EVENt register The device generates an SRQ when the measurement is completed The SRQ is the only way for the device to become active of its own Each controller program should set the device such that a service request is triggered in case of malfunctions The program should respond accordingly to the service request Serial Poll Like the sTB command the serial poll is used to query the status byte of a device Querying is implemented by interface messages however and is therefore much quicker The serial poll method has already been defined in the IEEE 488 1 standard and used to be the only standard method of querying the Status Byte Register This method also works with devices that conform neither to SCPI nor to IEEE 488 2 Serial poll is mainly used to obtain a quick overview of the device status of several devices connected to the IEC IEEE bus 1144 1400 12 6 90 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands Parallel Poll In case of a parallel poll up to eight devices are simultaneously requested by the controller to transmit one bit of information on the data line i e to set the data line assigned to each device to logical 0 or 1 Analogously to the SRE register which determines the conditions for generating an SRQ a Parallel Poll Enable Register PPE is available which is ANDed bit by bit with the STB taking into account bit 6 The results are ORed and the result is then sent possibly in inverted fo
174. ame effect as DISPlay ILLUmination DISPlay SCREen FORMat NUMeric 1 2 Is not implemented in the R amp S NRP INITiate CONTinuous SEQUence 1 2 IMMediate SEQUence 1 2 EQUence node is not implemented in the R amp S NRP EMory TABLe GAIN Agilent specifies the values without a unit the unit PCT percent is implicitly assumed The units DB dB DPCT A96 and O unit 1 can be specified in the R amp S NRP The default unit is DB UTPut TRIGger STATe Is not implemented in the R amp S NRP ENSe BANDwidth AVERage COUNt AUTO SDETect DETector FUNCtion MRATe SPEed V2P SENSe 1 2 CORRection CSET 1 CSET2 SELect SENSe 1 2 CORRection CSET 1 CSET2 STATe Is not implemented in the R amp S NRP The R amp S NRP does not recognize any tables with frequency dependent calibration values since the sensors have to be calibrated only once in production For this reason there is no compliance with CSET1 Tables with frequency dependent offset correction values can be defined and addressed via CSET2 Agilent and R amp S NRP or FDOTable R amp S NRP only SENSe 1 2 CORRection GAIN 1 Has the same effect as SENSe 1 2 CORRection CFACtor 1144 1400 12 6 122 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands SENSe 1 2 CORRection GAIN2 Has the same effect as SENSe 1 2 COR
175. amp S NRP Standard Configurations The following tables list the settings that can be made when configuring the R amp S NRP with the SYST STAN PRE string remote control command The following values are provided for the string parameter e GSM EDGE e NADC UPLINK e NADC DOWNLINK e PDC UPLINK e PDC DOWNLINK e DECT WCDMA 3GPP FDD e WCDMA 3GPP TDD DL e WCDMA 3GPP TDD UL e TD SCDMA H Bluetooth DH1 e Bluetooth DH3 Bluetooth DH5 e CDMA2000 Ki Note The tables list only the sensor parameters If SYSTem STANdard PWSettings OFF is set the calculate blocks CALCulate the window system D1SPlay and the output unit UNIT are also configured 1144 1400 12 6 128 E 3 R amp S NRP GSM EDGE Sensor parameter Sensor Mode Remote control command in short form Remote Control Commands POW XTIM Integration Time APER 4 615 ms Duty Cycle SDCYC 11 762 96 Duty Cycle Correction DCYC STAT ON Smoothing SMO Dropout Tolerance BURST DTOL Exclude Time Start IM EXCL Exclude Time End IM EXCL Number Of Timeslots 1 COUN Timeslot Width CC WIDT Timegate Offset OFFS TIMI Timegate Time Scope Offset Time RAC OFFS Scope Capture Time RAC TIMI Scope Number Of
176. and Sensor amp Pad Previous d d Configuring the test measurement The tolerance limits can be set in this dialog box exceeding these limits results in an error message The factory default settings depend on the sensor and are in line with the data sheet values They should be observed in the entire ambient temperature range If the base unit and the sensors are used only at room temperature the tolerance limits can be restricted so that any damage to the sensor can be quickly detected 1144 1400 12 4 5 Gs Hardkeys Zero Cal dialog box Config C gt d A B C D CD dod Test Limits C Sensor d d Test Limits C Sensor amp Pad d d Set to defaults C 9 d Settings locked C d Contrast C d d Brightness C d d 1144 1400 12 R amp S NRP Config Test BK NRP Z11 Ser 900002 Test Limits 0 160 dB Sensor 0 160 dB Geer TIEN amp Pad Settings Set to defaults locked L Fig 4 7 Config Test dialog box Tabs for selecting the measurement channel When the dialog box opens it shows the data of the sensor last tested Tolerance limits for sensors without a lead in attenuator or with an attenuator that has been removed Tolerance limits for sensors with a lead in attenuator Resets the factory default settings Protects the settings against being changed by mistake Brightness l Fig 4 8 Display dialog box Sets the display contrast Sets th
177. and indicates the forward wave i e the wave that is incident at the DUT Measurement menu Func amp Uni Function CC gt gt Function Primary oul d Prim ChannellA Sec channel B X He Unit dBm 4 Aux None Fig 4 30 Func amp Unit dialog box 1144 1400 12 4 33 E 2 Configuring measurements Measurement menu R amp S NRP Functions and their use Func amp Unit dialog box Function Prim Channel Sec Channel 1144 1400 12 CD ded C ded 0 ded Func amp Unit Function The Function drop down list itemizes all the measurement functions provided by the R amp S NRP These are Function Primary A Power in the primary channel e g A Secondary B Power in the secondary channel e g B Ratio A B Ratio of the power in the primary channel to the power in the secondary channel SWR A B Standing wave ratio RCoeff A B Reflection coefficient RLoss A B Return loss Diff A B Power difference between the primary and secondary channel Sum A B Sum of power from first and second channel Scope A This function cannot be selected from the Function amp Unit dialog box but automatically appears there when the primary channel is in the Scope mode The Scope mode does not allow relative measurements or two channel measurement functions ratio SWR etc The functions for the matching measurement are so defined that the forward powe
178. and material number of sensor e Serial number e Software status e Date of last calibration e Frequency and power ranges e Other technical data System menu Info D gt d Sensor iA Manufacturer Rohde amp Schwarz Type NRP Z21 Stock Number 137 6000 02 Serial 000001 HWVersion 000000001 HWVariant 000000001 SW Build NRP FW 01 00 Technology 3 Path Diode Function Power Terminating Fig 4 59 Sensor Info dialog box 1144 1400 12 4 62 E 2 R amp S NRP System settings System menu A B C D C Tabs for selecting the sensor dod This dialog box can be closed with the key The up down cursor keys can be used to scroll the window contents if they cannot all be viewed simultaneously Remote Control SYSTem SENSor 1 4 INFO lt string gt v Tip The possible values for the lt string gt parameter are exactly the same as the items shown in this dialog e g Manufacturer or HWVersion Thus the values available for a specific sensor model are very easy to determine Information about the R amp S NRP System Info System The Info System dialog box displays the following basic device characteristics e Type and material number of sensor e Serial number e Software status of system BIOS and keyboard controller e Installed options e Memory expansions e Ethernet MAC address for instruments with option R amp S NRP BA installed System menu Info C 9 d System
179. ar the commands of the SENSe TRIGger and CALCulate systems Since the high level commands combine different low level commands they allow a simpler configuration of measurements Each measurement configuration should begin with the RST command which sets the R amp S NPP to a defined output state The accurate settings are described in the documentation of remote control command SYSTem PRESet The most important settings are listed below e Continuous measurements are stopped INIT CONT OFF e Offset correction are deactivated SENSe CORRection OFFSet STATe OFF SENSe CORRection DCYCle STATe OFF SENSe CORRection FDOFfset STATe OFF e All other settings of the SENSe system depend on the sensor used and are specified in the corresponding manual e The first 4 CALCulate blocks are set to sensors 1 to 4 CALCulaten MATH SENSN e The values are measured as absolute values CALulate RELative STATe OFF e Logarithmic units are used UNIT POWer d m and UNIT RATio dB The simplest measurement The fastest way to obtain a result is to use the following sequence of commands RST INIT FETCh Normally RST will set the ContAv mode The concept of smart sensor technology provides that each sensor determines the reset values of the assigned SENSe and TRIGger block Thus another mode than ContAv may come after RST with future sensors Information is provided in the operating manual of the sensor used I
180. asurement ENS TIM EXCL STOP 10 US ignores 10 us at the end of the measurement NIT ETCh o o S S S I F 1144 1400 12 Annex 1 14 E 2 R amp S NRP Annex Remote Control Commands Level hysteresis and dropout time With internal and external triggering TRIG SOUR INT EXT a trigger event is recognized when the level of a trigger signal exceeds a specific value This value is the trigger level and can be set with TRIG LEV With internal triggering the end of the measurement is recognized when the power level falls below the trigger level This is not desirable with modulated signals or short interruptions and also when the level just falls slightly below the trigger level SENS BURS DTOL is used to define a time span during which the power to be measured in the BurstAv mode must remain below the trigger level so that the end of the burst can be detected TRIG HYST is used to specify a value in dB by which the signal must fall below the trigger level so that the end of a burst can be detected 1144 1400 12 Annex 1 15 E 2 Annex Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP Con figuration of sensor settings The sensor settings are controlled by the SENSe command system The sensors tell the basic unit which commands they understand and which parameters are allowed As a result the commands described below cannot be used for some sensors Selecting a measurement mode The most
181. at the measurement begins before the trigger point This is possible because the sensors store sampling values for a while and can use past values when the measurement is started The command is also used when overshoots are to be ignored at the beginning of a power pulse 1144 1400 12 Annex 1 13 E 2 Annex Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP Example RST TRIG SOUR INT RIG DEL 50 us starts measurement 50 us after the trigger event TRIG HOLD 800 us starts next trigger event 800 us after the trigger event at the earliest INIT FETCh Another way to modify the trigger system timing is to set a holdoff time TRIG HOLD After a trigger event all following trigger events are ignored if they occur within the holdoff time This is to prevent signal components that have not yet decayed from causin triggering by mistake after the measurement has been completed This makes sense especially with internal triggering BurstAv mode Power Trigger event Ignored trigger event Trigger level Time Measurement TRIG HOLDoff Fig l 3 Meaning of settings for TRIG HOLD and TRIG DEL It is also possible to exclude time domains from the integration of the measured value at the beginning and the end of the measurement SENS TIM EXCL STARt and SENS TIM EXCL STOP Example RST ENS FUNC POW BURS AVG ENS TIM EXCL STAR 10 US ignores 10 us at the beginning of the me
182. ate block 6 are corrupt 7 Window 7 Power The measured values returned by Calculate block 7 are corrupt 8 Window 8 Power The measured values returned by Calculate block 8 are corrupt 9 to Not used 14 15 Bit 15 will never be used A bit is set if the error 231 Data questionable occurs in the respective calculate block 1144 1400 12 6 88 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands Questionable Calibration Status Register The EVENt register and the CONDition register contain information as to whether the zero offset of a sensor is still valid The Questionable Calibration Status Register can be read by the following commands STATus QUEStionable CALibration SUMMary CONDition andSTATus QUEStionable CALibration SUMMary EVENt Table 6 29 Meaning of bits used in the Questionable Calibration Status Register Bit No Meaning 0 Not used 1 Sensor A Calibration Zeroing of sensor A was not successful 2 Sensor B Calibration Zeroing of sensor B was not successful 3 Sensor C Calibration Zeroing of sensor C was not successful 4 Sensor D Calibration Zeroing of sensor D was not successful 5to Not used 14 15 Bit 15 will never be used Use of Status Reporting System For an efficient use of the status reporting system the information it contains has to be transferred to the controller and further processed There are various methods which are described in the following
183. atically selects the window size according to which combination of windows is dis played The windows menu The windows menu is context sensitive and displays only those menu items that are relevant to the current measurement scenario Selecting a window Windows2 Window You can select one of the windows numbered 1 to 4 whenever you want All the functions offered in the Windows and Measurement menus act on the selected window Window Hau ff Fig 4 23 Windows menu Window softkey Windows menu Selects the window whose number is highlighted in the menu If the Window SECH window is already open it is also identified by the window title bar be 1234 dod ing in inverse video and by the shadow that appears along the right and bottom edges of the window 1144 1400 12 4 27 E 2 Displaying measurement results Windows menu Using windows R amp S NRP The labelling of the second rocker switch in the Windows menu is context sensitive and changes ac cording to the status of the active window q Open opens the selected window Int opens and initializes the selected window Open init d cese Expand d close arrange Close closes the selected window Expand expands all windows to fill the display e Arrange arranges all windows in cascade fashion Fig 4 24 Windows menu softkeys for controlling the windows Opening windows Windows menu Open C d Creating windows Windows menu Init C_ d Clos
184. atile configuration data saved by the device has been lost 330 Self test failed The self test could not be executed 341 Zeroing failed The zeroing of a sensor CALibration ZERO AUTO ONCE has failed The most frequent cause for this error is a signal that is applied to the sensor input and prevents zeroing 350 Queue overflow This code is entered into the queue in lieu of the code that caused the error It indicates that an error occurred but was not recorded Five entries are accepted in the queue 363 Input buffer overrun More commands were sent to the device than can be simultaneously executed or stored 1144 1400 12 9 4 E 2 R amp S NRP SCPI Error Messages Query Errors Query errors cause bit 2 in the ESR register to be set Error code Error text returned upon queue query Explanations 400 Query error Generic query error that cannot be defined more precisely 410 Query INTERRUPTED The query was interrupted Example The query is followed by new data before the response was completely sent 420 Query UNTERMINATED An incomplete query was received 430 Query DEADLOCKED The query cannot be processed 440 Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response A query is received in the same program message after a query requesting an indefinite response Device Dependent Errors Device dependent error causes bit 5 to be set in the ESR register Error code Error text retur
185. ay 0s Trigger Level Trigger Source Trigger Slope Trigger Holdoff Trigger Hysteresis 1144 1400 12 6 131 E 3 Remote Control Commands Sensor parameter Sensor Mode PDC DOWNLINK Remote control command in short form R amp S NRP POW AVG Integration Time 40 ms Duty Cycle Correction ENS DCYC STAT OFF Smoothing ENS SMO Trigger Source 1144 1400 12 RIG SOUR 6 132 E 3 R amp S NRP Sensor parameter Sensor Mode PDC UPLINK Remote control command in short form Remote Control Commands POW XTIM Integration Time APER 40 ms Duty Cycle SDCYC 16 25 Duty Cycle Correction DCYC STAT ON Smoothing SMO Dropout Tolerance BURST DTOL Exclude Time Start IM EXCL Exclude Time End IM EXCL Number Of Timeslots 1 COUN Timeslot Width 2WIDT 6 667 ms Timegate Offset OFFS TIMI 1 125 us 2 20 125 ms Timegate Time 1 6 406 ms 2 6 406 ms Scope Offset Time RAC OFFS 500 us Scope Capture Time RAC TIMI 42 ms Scope Number Of Points RAC POIN 312 Scope Realtime REAL OFF Trigger Delay 0s Trigger Level Trigger Source Trigger Slope Trigger H
186. ay values due to a modulation of a test signal described under SENS 1 4 SAMP can also be eliminated by lowpass filtering of the video signal The lowpass filter eliminates the variations of the display even in case of unperiodic modulation and does not require any other setting If the modulation is periodic the setting of the sampling window is the better method since it allows for shorter measurement times RST value depending on sensor SENSe 1 4 POWer BURSt DTOLerance float value The end of a burst power pulse is recognized when the signal level drops below the trigger level Especially with modulated signals this may also happen for a short time within a burst To prevent the supposed end of the burst from being recognized too early or incorrectly at these positions a time interval can be defined via SENS 1 4 BURS DTOL drop out tolerance in which the pulse end is only recognized if the signal level no longer exceeds the trigger level This is shown in Fig 6 7 the drop out time i e the time in which the signal remains below the trigger level is shorter than the drop out tolerance The burst end is thus recognized correctly Time Drop out time BURSt DTOLerance BURSt DTOLerance Pulse interval Fig 6 7 Meaning of drop out TOLerance Unit s Value range depending on sensor RST value depending on sensor 1144 1400 12 6 58 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands SENSe 1
187. bled to manual mode The key is automatically assigned its function according to context in other words there is no manual assignment by the operator The key is used to delete numbers or text in a field so that a completely new entry can be made As the key it triggers single shot measurements in the Scope mode The function of the key is selected automatically according to context 3 2 E 2 R amp S NRP Screen layout Screen layout Window The R amp S NRP displays results in windows A maximum of four windows can be displayed simultaneously on the screen They are numbered 1 to 4 Windows have a title bar which contains the number not user assignable and a name user selectable for the window BS BEE AJBF ME DN A e 125965 aine 1 000 GHz E 31 713dB Menu bar A menu bar is always displayed at the top of the screen It contains the names of the R amp S NRP s menus Windows do not have any control elements Sensor Measurement File System A Ge do Ge E y One of these names is always in inverse video and this is the name of the active menu active menu Menu selection The menu you want to activate can be selected by pressing the right or left hand side of the topmost rocker switch one Sensor DE Measurement File System EED or more times n d Alternatively you can also use the cursor keys CE Sensor Windows DEEI File System CO d Sensor PERA Measurement File System F
188. carrier frequency of the applied signal if the specified measurement accuracy is to be reached d Frequency 50 000 MHz A BICID C D 1144 1400 12 gt Connect an unmodulated signal with a level between 10 dBm and 10 dBm to the sensor gt Press the key The dialog box for entering the frequency appears gt Select channel A by pressing the appropriate rocker switch 2 3 E 2 Measuring average power Cont Av mode R amp S NRP Frequency C d d 1234567890U d d Press the Frequency softkey A panel with all the characters you will need to enter the frequency is displayed next to the softkeys Clear the field with the key Enter the frequency of the signal that is fed in by pressing the appropriate softkeys Using the UNIT softkey select the unit you want Y Try the following To familiarize yourself with the editor try the following steps 4 MENU d 4 MENU d 1144 1400 12 Using the left right cursor keys move the block cur sor and overwrite the digits with new values Use the up down cursor keys to scroll the digits to the cursor position Move the insertion mark to the right onto the units Use the vertical up down keys to change the unit Confirm your entry Close the dialog box 24 E 2 R amp S NRP Setting the unit in the display DE Windows Measurement File System C dod Sensor Windows EXPERTEN File S
189. ck has two input channels called the primary and secondary channel In the above example the primary channel is assigned sensor 1 and the secondary channel sensor 4 via the source list The measurement result is the ratio of the results from sensors 1 and 4 Example MEAS SWR DEF 2 81 802 It is assumed that sensor 1 delivers the forward power of a wave and sensor 2 the reflected power of a wave The measurement result represents the SWR of the two power values 1e e 2 0 1 1 e 2 e 1 Note that the unit is automatically set to percent refer to Selecting the output unit for measured values 1144 1400 12 Annex 1 3 E 2 Annex Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP Selecting a measurement mode Other MEAS commands are available for measurements to be performed in a mode other than the ContAv mode The short form of these commands is obtained by adding a keyword for the measurement mode to keyword MEAS Timeslot measurement EAS TSLot lt tslot_width gt lt no_slots gt lt start_exclude gt lt stop_exclude gt BurstAv measurement EAS BURSt lt dtolerance gt lt start_exclude gt lt stop_exclude gt Scope measurement EAS XTIMe scope size capture time Measurement in the ContAv mode with data buffering MEAS ARRay tslot width no slots start exclude stop exclude V Note In the Timeslot mode the trigger source is set to EXTernal In the BurstAv
190. command contains mathematical expression data at a point where they are not allowed Execution Error Execution errors cause bit 4 in the ESR register to be set Error code Error text returned upon queue query Explanations 200 Execution error An error occurred upon command execution 203 Command protected An attempt was made to execute a protected command 210 Trigger error Error on triggering the device 211 Trigger ignored A TRG or a triggering signal was ignored 213 Init ignored A request for a measurement initialization was ignored as another measurement was already in progress 214 Trigger deadlock A measurement could not be started or a result query could not be processed since the device would otherwise enter a deadlock state This occurs under the following conditions 1 TRIG SOUR BUS INIT FETCh A TRG Or TRIG IMM would be required for triggering but these commands cannot be executed since FETCh blocks the entry But FETCh waits until the measured values are available 2 FETCh was called but no valid result was available and the trigger system of the sensor is IDLE FETCh blocks the entry so that a measurement cannot be started with INIT either 220 Parameter error The command contains a faulty or invalid parameter 221 Settings conflict There is a setting conflict between two or more parameters 222 Data out of range A program data element is outside the legal ra
191. cond Example SENSel FREQuency 1 5 GHZis equivalent to SENSe1 FREQuency 1 5E9 The parameters MI Ni mum MAXi mum and DEFault are interpreted as special numeric values The numeric value is returned in response to a query Example Command SENSe2 POWer APERture MAXimum Query SENSe2 POWer APERture Response 1 000000E02 MIN MAX MINimum and MAXimum denote the minimum and maximum value DEF DEFault denotes a preset value This value is identical to the basic setting called by the RST command NAN Not A Number NAN stands for 9 91E37 NAN is only sent as a device response This value is not defined NAN is typically returned for dividing by zero subtracting a value from infinity and representing missing data 5 11 E 3 Remote Control Boolean parameters Character data Strings Block data Coupled commands 1144 1400 12 Fundamentals R amp S NRP Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logical true is represented by ON or a numeric value other than 0 The OFF state logical false is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 Queries yield 0 or 1 Example Command SENSe POWer BUFFered ON Query SENSe POWer BUFFered Response 1 Character data follows the syntax rules for keywords i e it also has both a short and a long form They must be separated from the header by a white space same as any parameter A query returns the short form of t
192. connected e areset was performed RST or SYSTem PRESet The Operation Sense Status Register can be read by the following commands STATus OPERation SENSe SUMMary CONDition STATus OPERation SENSe SUMMary EVENt Table 6 24 Meaning of bits used in the Operation Sense Status Register Bit e No Meaning 0 Not used 1 Sensor A initializing Sensor A is being initialized 2 Sensor B initializing Sensor B is being initialized 3 Sensor C initializing Sensor C is being initialized 4 Sensor D initializing Sensor D is being initialized 5 to Not used 14 15 Bit 15 will never be used 1144 1400 12 6 84 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands Operation Lower Limit Fail Status Register The CONDition register contains information as to whether a displayed value is currently below a configured lower limit and the EVENt register indicates whether a measured value dropped below a limit value since the last readout of the Operation Lower Limit Fail Status Register Details of the behaviour are defined by the transition register The limit value can be set with the command CALC LIM LOW DATA float value Command CALC LIM LOW STAT ON configures the PTRansition and NTRansition registers so that the corresponding bit is set in the EVENT register when the displayed value drops below the limit The Operation Lower Limit Fail Status Register can be read by th
193. control 3 Questionable Status Register summary bit This bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the QUEStionable Status Register and the associated ENABLe bit is set to 1 A set bit denotes a questionable device status which can be specified in greater detail by querying the QUEStionable Status Register 4 MAV Bit Message available This bit is set if a readable message is in the output queue This bit may be used to automate reading of data from the device into the controller 5 ESB Standard Event Status Register summary bit This bit is set if one of the bits in the Standard Event Status Register is set and enabled in the Event Status Enable Register Setting this bit denotes a serious error which can be specified in greater detail by querying the Standard Event Status Register 6 MSS Master Status summary bit This bit is set if the device triggers a service request This is the case if one of the other bits of this register is set together with its enable bit in the Service Request Enable register SRE 7 Operation Status Register summary bit This bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the Operation Status Register and the associated ENABLe bit is set to 1 A set bit denotes that an action is being performed by the device Information on the type of action can be obtained by querying the Operation Status Register 1144 1400 12 6 76 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register
194. creasing resolution The values of the transfer parameter have the following meaning Parameter Linear scale of measurement result Logarithmic scale of measurement result 1 significant place No decimal place 2 significant places 1 decimal place 3 significant places 2 decimal places 4 significant places 3 decimal places es Note Automatic filter ranging must be switched on SENSe 1 4 AVERage COUNt AUTO ON DISP 1 8 RES has an effect on the setting SENS 1 4 AVER COUN AUTO RES of the sensors used in the measurement function CALC 1 8 MATH However the resolution setting of the sensors does not affect the resolution of values in the display This command corresponds to the resolution option of the high level measurement commands CONFi gure FETCH READ and MEASure RST value 0 01 Error messages 127 Invalid numeric data An invalid number was specified for the resolution Example DISP WIND1 RES 0 1 With a measured value of 123 456789 W the first two places are free of noise and thus 120 W is displayed DISPlay WINDow 1 4 STATe ON OFF Opens or closes a window When a window is closed the other windows are automatically expanded so that the free space is utilized Likewise open windows become smaller when a new one is opened RST value ON Window 1 OFF Window 2 3 4 1144 1400 12 6 35 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP DISPlay WINDow
195. creen and function test Hardware faults are reported at this stage The Selftest dialog box in the System menu is used to check the keyboard and the display and to start a selftest function in the sensors System menu Test Gb Keyboard d Display Test Patterns Sensor Test Sensor Bes not tested Fig 4 57 Selftest dialog box Keyboard C Opens the dialog box for testing the keyboard d d Display Test C Displays a sequence of different test patterns for checking the display Patterns d d The procedure can be aborted by pressing any key Sensor AB C The right hand softkey starts a hardware test function in the sensor Test Sensor d d selected with the left hand softkey Remote Control SYSTem SENSor 1 4 TEST Test Sensor ee Opens a window containing detailed data of the sensor test Details d d 1144 1400 12 4 60 E 2 R amp S NRP System settings System menu Keyboard test Selftest Keyboard In the keyboard selftest dialog box the keys can be pressed in any order Each time a key is pressed there is acoustic feedback and the detected key is marked If a key is pressed more than once a warn ing is output This means that specific keys or the whole keyboard can be tested This dialog box can be quit only if the symbol appears on the right of the title bar This symbol ap pears either after all keys have been pressed or when no key has been pressed for 15 seconds Selftest dialog box
196. ction Only the most important functions are shown in the figures Measured Manual control values SENSe CALCulate UNIT TRIGger Remote control IEC Bus ren MEMory Ethernet Information flow o Analog Out Power Reference Fig 6 1 Overview of SCPI command systems and their mutual interaction Fig 6 1 gives an overview of the SCPI command systems of the R amp S NRP The measured values are forwarded to the SENSe block where they are processed and handed to the CALCulate blocks The values from the SENSe block are not immediately made available to the user but only after they have been processed in the CALCulate blocks In the CALCulate blocks the values of several sensors can be processed together before they are output MEASurement commands may be used to configure SENSe and CALCulate blocks with a single command This may considerably simplify operation of the R amp S NRP The frequency dependent correction tables for the measured values are managed by the MEMory command system The other command systems have the following functions DISPlay Configures the reading on the R amp S NRP display FORMat Sets the data format on the remote control interfaces OUTPut Switches the test generator on off and calibrates it STATus Configures and queries the Status Reporting System gt page 5 14 SYSTem Makes different system settings that affect the operation of the R amp S NRP UNIT Sets the out
197. ctivate the relative mode press the right hand side of the rocker switch next to Relative As the default setup was loaded in step the value relative to 0 dBm is displayed gt Press the rocker switch next to Relative again on the right hand side In the second line Off On GEE is displayed briefly and then the original display returns The last power result obtained has now been made the new reference value If the power has not changed in the meantime the reference value and the power are equal and the indicated value is 0 dB gt If an attenuator is still connected remove it now and connect the sensor directly to the signal source The displayed value should now equal the attenuation that has been entered 2 9 E 2 Measuring average power Cont Av mode R amp S NRP Checking settings window zoom sensor EIERE Measwronent e gt Using the topmost rocker switch or the cursor keys wow 4 dod lt gt select the Windows menu Close Expand Window Dau K Close Expand The Windows menu contains all the functions required for opening closing and configuring windows EEJ DRA Graph d Resolution dB 10 1 Po oo Timesotel T Select nC gt Check if window 1 has been selected 234 dod Close Expand Een Press the Expand softkey Window 1 now expands to occupy the full space below System the menu bar and displays all the key measurement pa auto rameters
198. cts a measurement function that processes one sensor or two together The result of this calculation is made available as a measured value and can be queried with FETch 1 8 or CALCulate 1 8 DATA RST value CALC1 MATH SENS1 CALC2 MATH SENS2 CALC3 MATH SENS3 CALC4 MATH SENSA CALC5 MATH SENS1 CALC6 MATH SENS1 CALC7 MATH SENS1 CALC8 MATH SENS1 Error messages 151 Invalid string data An invalid lt string gt parameter was transmitted 1144 1400 12 6 26 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands CALCulate 1 8 MATH EXPRession CATalog Lists all supported calculation functions All functions are sent in the form of strings which are allowed as parameters for the CALCulate 1 8 MATH EXPRession command CALCulate 1 8 RELative MAGNitude float value This command determines a value that is used as a divisor logarithmic subtraction for all measured values of the calculate block in the CALC REL STAT ON state The unit of this value is equal to the unit of the output value of the calculate block and is defined according to Table 6 3 Table 6 3 Output unit of measured value of calculate block CALC REL STAT OFF CALC REL STAT ON DBM W DBUV DBM W DBUV DBM W DBUV DB DPCT O O O Unit of measure
199. culate block exceeds the upper limit value 6 Window 6 Upper Limit Fail The measured value supplied by the sixth Calculate block exceeds the upper limit value 7 Window 7 Upper Limit Fail The measured value supplied by the seventh Calculate block exceeds the upper limit value 8 Window 8 Upper Limit Fail The measured value supplied by the eighth Calculate block exceeds the upper limit value 9 to14 Not used 15 Bit 15 will never be used 1144 1400 12 6 86 E 3 R amp S NRP Questionable Power Status Register Remote Control Commands The CONDition register contains information as to whether the measured power values are questionable The Questionable Power Status Register can be read by the following commands STATus QUEStionable POWer SUMMary CONDition STATus QUEStionable POWer SUMMary EVENt Table 6 27 Meaning of bits used in the Questionable Power Status Register Bit No Meaning 0 Not used 1 Sensor A Power The measurement data of sensor A is corrupt 2 Sensor B Power The measurement data of sensor B is corrupt 3 Sensor C Power The measurement data of sensor C is corrupt 4 Sensor D Power The measurement data of sensor D is corrupt 5 Sensor A please zero The zero correction for sensor A is no longer correct and should be repeated 6 Sensor B please zero The zero correction for sensor B is no longer correct and should be repeat
200. d thus also the measurement time An upper time limit can be set via SENS 1 4 AVER COUN AUTO MTIME maximum time It should never be exceeded Undesired long measurement times can thus be prevented in the SENS AVER COUN AUTO TYPE NSR mode if the automatic filter length switchover is on Unit s Value range depending on sensor RST value depending on sensor SENSe 1 4 AVERage COUNt AUTO RESolution 1 2 3 4 Defines the number of significant places for linear units and the number of decimal places for logarithmic units which should be free of noise in the measurement result This setting is also performed by the DISP 1 4 RES command gt page 6 35 that tries to set the sensors involved in the measurement results accordingly For further details see Chapter 4 The setting is only taken into account if SENS AVER COUN AUTO TYPE is set to RES and SENS AVER COUN AUTO is ON However SENS 1 4 AVER COUN AUTO RES does not affect the DISPlay command The parameters of the two commands are different but have the same meaning SENS 1 4 AVER COUN AUTO RES DISP 1 4 RES Unit Value range depending on sensor RST value depending on sensor SENSe 1 4 AVERage COUNt AUTO SLOT int value Sets a timeslot whose measured value is used to automatically determine the filter length Unit Value range depending on sensor R
201. d value 9 99999E 13 0103 Value range 9 99999E5 196 897 Unit gt Table 6 3 RST value 0 DBM or 0 DB 1144 1400 12 6 27 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP CALCulate 1 8 RELative POWer MAGNitude float value Has the same direct effect as CALC REL on the reference value for measured values that share the unit of a power Unit DBM W Default unit DBM Valuerange 1e 18 1e18 W 150 210 DBM RST value 0 DBM CALCulate 1 8 RELative RATio MAGNitude float value Has the same direct effect as CALC REL on the reference value for measured values that share the unit of a power ratio Unit DB PCT Default unit DB Value range 200 200 DB 1e 18 1e22 PCT RST value 0 DB CALCulate 1 8 RELative MAGNitude AUTO OFF ONCE Sets the current measured value as the reference value When used as a setting command this command can only be called by the parameter ONCE OFF will be ignored OFF is always returned in response to a query RST value OFF Error messages 230 Data corrupt or stale The current measured value is invalid CALCulate 1 8 RELative STATe ON OFF Determines whether a reference value is used If this command is called with ON all results of the calculate block are divided by the reference value set with CALCulate 1 8 RELative MAGNitude RST value OFF 1144 1400 12 6 28 E 3 R amp S NR
202. d MEM TABL MOVE Table 1 Test setup renames the table Table 1 into Test setup 1144 1400 12 6 42 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands MEMory TABLe SELect string Selects the table name string The following commands affect this table e MEMory CLEar NAMe lt string gt e MEMory CLEar TABLe e all MEMory TABLe commands The selection is not changed in case of an RST or a SYSTem PRESet RST value none Error messages 256 File name not found A table named string is not known 1144 1400 12 6 43 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP OUTPut The OUTPut system serves for generator configuration The R amp S NRP can be equipped with an optional RF test generator which produces a reference power of 1 mW at 50 MHz Moreover the analog outputs at the rear of the power meter can be configured Table 6 8 Commands of the OUTPut system OUTPut RECorder 1 2 FEED string LIMit LOWer float value The value range of the parameter depends on the output unit of the measured value POWer float value RATio float value UPPer float value The value range of the parameter depends on the output unit of the measured value POWer float value RATio float value STATe ON OFF ROSCillator STATe ON OFF Option R amp S NRP B1 CALibration READ NR1 Option R amp S NRP B1 WR
203. d messages in progress are aborted The TRIGger system goes to the IDLE state input and output queues are cleared and the parser is reset and waits for the beginning of a new command When INITiate CONT ON is set a new measurement is started This command makes the device ready to receive commands GTL Go To Local The device is set to local mode and can again be operated manually LLO Local Lock Out Deactivates the front panel keypad with the exception of the power key In the LLO state it is possible to return to the LOCAL mode only by remote control GTL command or switching the R amp S NRP off and on again PPC Parallel Poll Configure Sets the device to the Parallel Poll Addressed to Configure State PACS PPD Parallel Poll Disable In the PACS the parallel poll function is deactivated with PPD PPE Parallel Poll Enable In the PACS the parallel poll function is activated with PPE and the bit position and the sense bit are set PPU Parallel Poll Unconfigure This command deactivates the parallel poll function without previous addressing SDC Selected Device Clear Same as DCL except that it applies to all devices that are currently in the listen mode 1144 1400 12 6 4 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands SPD Serial Poll Disable Terminates the serial poll mode SPE Serial Poll Enable Activates the serial poll mode When addressed as a talker the device sends the status byte
204. d to read and write binary calibration data sets for the sensors 1144 1400 12 6 29 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP DISPlay The DISPlay command system is mainly used to configure the display of windows on the R amp S NRP The WINDow commands are assigned to the calculate blocks 1 to 4 The values calculated from the sensor values by the respective calculate block with the aid of the measurement function are displayed Table 6 5 Commands of the DISPlay system fone eme mem DISPlay ILLumination ESSage STATe TEXT CLEar DATA TYPE PIXMap UPDate WINDow 1 4 AVALue FORMat METer ANALog AUTo LOWer POWer RATio UPPer POWer RATio NAME 2 RESolution STATe TRACe LOWer UPPer TSLot WINDow SELect SIZE DISPlay ILLumination ON ERRorlist STATe lt boolean gt lt boolean gt QUERy MESSage NORMal SLOW FREeze MINimum MAXimum PTPeak OFF DIGital ANALog GRAPhical ONCE OFF float val float float float float val float val string Typo 0501 ON OFF 0 001 float value float value int value 1121314 NORMa1 ZOOMed OFF This command switches the backlighting ON or OFF reset RST value ON 3 1144 1400 12 DISP ILL is id
205. d values from sensors 1 and 2 by means of FETCh DIFF which measure in the ContAv mode as the default setting CONF DIFF INIT ALL FETCh DIFF OK FETCh RAT OK FETCh BURst 221 Settings conflict The FETCh RAT command then delivers the ratios of the two measured values This is possible without a new measurement since the required data is available The last FETCh command requires a result that was measured in the BurstAv mode Such a measured value is not available and thus this command will generate a SCPI error 221 Settings conflict FETCh immediately delivers a measured value if a valid result is available If no measured value is available the R amp S NRP waits for such a value and then answers the query During this time no other command should be sent to the R amp S NRP since the query has to be answered first If a command is sent to the R amp S NRP the SCPI error 410 Query interrupted is output However FETCh should wait only if a measurement result is expected since command processing is blocked if a command is not answered If FETCh is executed although no measured values are expected the SCPI error 214 Trigger deadlock is output This may occur if the trigger source is set to BUS or HOLD With low level TRIG SOUR and FETCh immediately follows INIT 1144 1400 12 Annex l 7 E 2 Annex Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP Example CONF TRIG SOUR BUS
206. data and with the device hardware If the setting is not possible an error message will be sent to the status reporting system and the setting will be ignored After successful completion of the verification the setting will immediately be performed If the setting influences the result calculation the MEASuring bit is set in the status operation register until new measured values are available The MEASuring bit is described in more detail in the Status Reporting System section that follows This bit may be used for the synchronization of command processing Queries cause the data set management to send the desired data to the output unit 1144 1400 12 5 13 E 3 Remote Control Fundamentals R amp S NRP Status Reporting System The status reporting system collects information on the device status and makes it available to the output unit on request Structure and function of this system are described in the following section Output Unit The data output unit collects the information requested by the controller from the data set management It processes the information in line with the SCPI rules and makes it available in the output buffer Command Sequence and Command Synchronization All commands are executed in the order in which they are sent There is no overlapping of command processing Exception the commands INIT and CAL ZERO AUTO ONCE The user therefore can determine the sequence of execution If a long program mess
207. de Burst Smoothing of Modulated Signals SENS SMO STAT Sensor Mode Burst Exclude Start SENS IM EXCL STAR Sensor Mode Burst Exclude Stop SENS IM EXCL STOP Sensor Mode Timeslot No of Timeslots SENS POW TSL COUN Sensor Mode Timeslot Nominal Width SENS POW TSL WIDT Sensor Mode Timeslot Exclude Start SENS IM EXCL STAR Sensor Mode Timeslot Exclude Stop SENS I EXCL STOP Sensor Mode T gate Gate SENS SWE SEL Sensor Mode T gate Start of Gate SENS SWE 1 4 OFFS TIMI Sensor Mode T gate End of Gate Sum of SENS SWE 1 4 0FFS TIME and SENS SWE 1 4 TIME Sensor Mode Scope Points SENS TRAC POIN Sensor Mode Scope Realtime SENS RAC REAL Sensor Offset Global SENS CORR OFFS SENS CORR OFFS STAT 1144 1400 12 5 17 E 3 Remote Control Fundamentals R amp S NRP Sensor Offset Table SENS 1 4 CORR FDOT SENS 1 4 CORR FDOT STAT Sensor Offset Edit Table see MEMory Sensor Offset S Parameter Device SENS 1 4 CORR SPD STAT Sensor Filter gt Auto SENS 1 4 AVER COUN AUTO In Scope mode SENS 1 4 TRAC AVER COUN AUTO Sensor Filter Length SENS 1 4 AVER COUN In Scope mode SENS 1 4 TRAC AVER COUN Sensor Filter2 Auto Once SENS 1 4 AVER COUN AUTO ONCE In Scope mode SENS 1 4 TRAC AVER COUN AUTO ONCE Sensor gt Filter gt
208. ds The following table lists the respective setting capabilities and the values that are automatically set in manual control Table 5 2 Automatic settings for manual selection of a measurement mode SCPI command RIGger l SOURce IMMediate Cannot be modified in manual mode RIGger l SLOPe Unchanged is irrelevant RIGger l COUNt Cannot be modified in manual mode RIGger 1l DELay Unchanged is irrelevant TRIGger 1 HOLDoff Cannot be modified in manual mode TRIGger 1 LEVel Unchanged is irrelevant SENSe 1 TIMing EXCLude STARt Unchanged is irrelevant SENSe 1 TIMing EXCLude STOP Unchanged is irrelevant INITiate RIGger l CONTinuous SOURce Cannot be modified in manual mode Unchanged is irrelevant RIGger 1l SLOPe Unchanged is irrelevant RIGger 1 COUNt Cannot be modified in manual mode RIGger 1l DELay Unchanged is irrelevant HOLDoff Depends sensor User selectable T TRIGger l TRIGger l LEVel Depends sensor User selectable SENSe 1 TIMing EXCLude STARt Depends sensor User selectable SENSe 1 TIMing EXCLude STOP Depends sensor User selectable INITiate RIGger l CONTinuous SOURce ON EXTernal INTernal Cannot be modified in manual mode User s
209. e Unit s Value range depending on sensor RST value depending on sensor 1144 1400 12 6 59 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP SENSe 1 4 POWer TSLOt COUNt int value Sets the number of simultaneously measured timeslots in the Timeslot mode Unit Value range depending on sensor RST value depending on sensor SENSe 1 4 POWer TSLot AVG WIDTh float value Sets the length of the timeslot in the Timeslot mode Unit s Value range depending on sensor RST value depending on sensor SENSe 1 4 SAMPling FREQ1 FREQ2 If the signal to be measured has modulation sections just above the video bandwidth of the sensor used measurement errors might be caused due to aliasing effects In this case the sampling rate of the sensor can be set to a safe lower value FREQ2 However the measurement time required to obtain noise free results is extended compared to the normal sampling rate FREQ1 RST value depending on sensor SENSe 1 4 SGAMma MAGNitude float value The R amp S NRP can perform a measured value correction taking the complex reflection coefficient source gamma of the signal source into account SENS 1 4 SGAM CORR STAT ON must be set The magnitude of the reflection coefficient is set with SENS 1 4 SGAM MAGN Unit Value range depending on sensor RST value depending on sensor SENSe 1 4 SGAMma PHASe float value The R amp S NRP can
210. e Control Commands R amp S NRP SENSe 1 4 TRACe REALtime ON OFF In the default state OFF each measurement from the sensor is averaged With SENSe 1 4 TRACe REALtime ON this behaviour can be switched off which may increase the measurement speed This ensures that the measured values of an individual measurement are immediately delivered See also Chapter 4 RST value depending on sensor SENSe 1 4 TRACe TIME float value Sets the time to be covered by the Scope sequence Unit s Value range depending on sensor RST value depending on sensor SENSe 1 4 TIMing EXCLude STARt float value Sets a time that is to be excluded at the beginning of the integration gt Fig 6 9 Unit s Value range depending on sensor RST value depending on sensor SENSe 1 4 TIMing EXCLude STOP float value Sets a time that is to be excluded at the beginning of the integration Fig 6 9 Unit s Value range depending on sensor RST value depending on sensor 1144 1400 12 6 64 E 3 R amp S NRP Power EXCLude STARt Remote Control Commands Time EXCLude STOP Integration period Fig 6 9 Effect of commands si 1144 1400 12 EXCL STAR and STOP ENS 1 4 TIM I 6 65 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP SERVice The commands of the SERVice system are used for maintenance or test purposes They were implemented primarily to support device d
211. e Scope mode on page 4 41 1144 1400 12 4 15 E 2 Data acquisition and parameters Sensor menu R amp S NRP Offset correction Sensor Offset The Offset dialog box is for activating and entering correction factors to effect an increase or decrease in the measurement result which is not level dependent This means that the effects of any attenuators directional couplers or amplifiers that are connected ahead of the sensor can be allowed for Global is used to set a fixed correction factor Frequency dependent corrections can be made with Table Both types of correction can be made simultaneously S Parameter Device is for correcting the effects of a twoport connected ahead of the sensor in terms of its S parameters The S parameters of the twoport must be stored in the sensor see Program module Update S Parameters in the sensor operating manual Sensor menu Offset Global RW Table o Edit Table S Parameter Device L Fig 4 15 Offset dialog box A B CID CC Tabs for selecting the sensor dod L Global C Field for entering the global offset d Positive values correspond to external losses negative values to ex ternal gains Remote Control SENSe 1 4 CORRection OFFSet lt float_value gt Global C_ Activates the global offset correction d Remote Control SENSe 1 4 CORRection OFFSet STATe ON OFF Table C The left hand Table softkey opens a drop down list with correction d tables
212. e above Drop down lists are used to select an item from an a la carte list When the drop down list is activated the list folds out upwards or downwards The up down cursor keys or one of the rocker switches next to the list are used to select items from folded out pop up menus Confirm the selection with the key or reject with the key 3 10 E 2 R amp S NRP Display windows Display windows Window sizes and types Results are displayed in the main section of the screen in windows Windows come in three sizes half height quarter height and full height In windows values can be displayed digitally or in a combined digital and analog mode See Chapter 4 section Displaying measurement results for instructions on selecting these modes DIG window full height Analog window full height 0 1000dB S N 10 000 dB 4 Auto 1L I2 e Atten 3 dB fr 50 000 AIBFe Limit Fail ae 1 10dB Limit Fail A 1000GHz F 35 229 B 1 000GHz dB E 14314dB Scope window full height Scope window half height EE 0 0 0 5 0 jJ RUN T slots MITT Gates Q A Start 0 000 ps 30 000 den 000 dBm Length 4 616 ms Mm 60 000 dBm d DIG window half height Analog window half height E RIES E AJB NN EZ EDU jv A CY a 17808 1 000 GHz 1 2 596 1 000 GHz dB 1 31 713 dB DIG window
213. e display brightness Remote Control DISPlay ILLumination ON OFE 4 6 E 2 R amp S NRP Data acquisition and parameters Sensor menu Data acquisition and parameters Sensor menu Depending on the options that have been installed up to four sensors can be connected to the R amp S NRP The sensors perform the complete power measurement from the acquisition of the RF signal to every aspect of result processing All parameters for configuring data acquisition are entered in the Sensor menu Some of the parameters listed below are not available for certain types of sensor The Sensor menu contains the following items Mode 1 Setting the measurement mode page 4 7 Offset Filter d e Offset correction page 4 16 and Filter averaging page 4 19 Range Measurement ranges page 4 22 RF Source d Effect of the RF source page 4 23 Trigger Trigger settings page 4 24 Fig 4 9 Sensor menu Setting the measurement mode Sensor gt Mode The measurement mode is selected and configured in the Mode dialog box In addition to the Cont Av mode there are further measurement modes for the various sensor types available Sensor menu Mode o ContAv Burst T slot T gate Scope Fig 4 10 Mode dialog box A B C D C Tabs for sensor selection dod Cont Av Burst Measurement modes dod In the Continuous Average mode the average signal power is continu ously measured without the wi
214. e following commands STATus OPERation LLIMit SUMMary CONDition STATus OPERation LLIMit SUMMary EVENt Table 6 25 Meaning of bits used in the Operation Lower Limit Fail Status Register Bit No Meaning 0 Not used 1 Window 1 Lower Limit Fail The measured value returned by the first Calculate block drops below the lower limit value 2 Window 2 Lower Limit Fail The measured value returned by the second Calculate block drops below the lower limit value 3 Window 3 Lower Limit Fail The measured value returned by the third Calculate block drops below the lower limit value 4 Window 4 Lower Limit Fail The measured value returned by the fourth Calculate block drops below the lower limit value 5 Window 5 Lower Limit Fail The measured value returned by the fifth Calculate block drops below the lower limit value 6 Window 6 Lower Limit Fail The measured value returned by the sixth Calculate block drops below the lower limit value 7 Window 7 Lower Limit Fail The measured value returned by the seventh Calculate block drops below the lower limit value 8 Window 8 Lower Limit Fail The measured value returned by the eighth Calculate block drops below the lower limit value 9to Not used 15 Bit 15 will never be used 1144 1400 12 6 85 E 3 Remote Control Commands Operation Upper Limit Fail Status Register R amp S NRP The CONDition reg
215. e following commands STATus OPERation TRIGger SUMMary CONDition STATus OPERation TRIGger SUMMary EVENt Table 6 23 Meaning of bits used in the Operation Status Register Bit No Meaning 0 Not used 1 Sensor A waiting for trigger Sensor A is in the WAIT FOR TRG state and is waiting for a trigger event that will change it to the MEASURING state 2 Sensor B waiting for trigger Sensor B is in the WAIT FOR TRG state and is waiting for a trigger event that will change it to the MEASURING state 3 Sensor C waiting for trigger Sensor C is in the WAIT FOR TRG state and is waiting for a trigger event that will change it to the MEASURING state 4 Sensor D waiting for trigger Sensor D is in the WAIT FOR TRG state and is waiting for a trigger event that will change it to the MEASURING state 5to Not used 14 15 Bit 15 will never be used 1144 1400 12 6 83 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP Operation Sense Status Register The CONDition register contains information as to whether a sensor is currently being initialized and depending on the configuration of the transition register the EVENt register indicates whether a sensor initialization was started or completed since the last readout of this register This status is assumed by a sensor if one of the following conditions is met e the supply voltage is switched on power up e the sensor was just
216. e keywords are used at several levels within a command system Their effect depends on the command structure i e on their position in the command header Example SENSe1 TRACe POINts int value This command contains the POINts keyword in the third level Example SENSe1 TRACe OFFSet POINts int value This command contains the POINts keyword in the fourth level It defines the time offset for the display of points in the Scope mode Optional In some command systems certain keywords can be inserted into or removed keywords from the header These keywords are shown in the manual in square brackets For reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standard the device must be able to recognize the full length of the command Some of the commands become considerably shorter when the optional keywords are omitted Example SENSe1 POWer TSLOot COUNt 6 1144 1400 12 5 7 E 3 Remote Control Fundamentals R amp S NRP Long and short form Parameters Numeric suffix 1144 1400 12 This command sets the number of timeslots in the Timeslot mode to 6 The following command has the same effect POWer TSLot COUNt 6 Note An optional keyword cannot be omitted if its effect is specified in more detail by a numeric suffix Example SENSe2 POWer TSLot COUNt 6 in short form SENSe2 POWer TSLot COUNt 6 The keywords have a long and a short form The keyword may be entered in short or in long form other abbreviations are not
217. e of the window has not changed and all window specific settings have been maintained gt Again close window 1 with Close but open it this time with Init The window again displays the measurement function A in digital format The difference between Open and Init is that Open keeps the values of all the parameters that have been previ ously set in this window while Init sets all the parameters to their default values Caution This function only resets the window settings made in the Windows and Measurement menus but it does not affect the sensor set tings 2 13 E 2 Window handling R amp S NRP O Display options The Dig and D amp A softkeys are used to select various dis play modes The standard display mode is Digital measured value ET D amp a Grape 4 Dig D A Graph gt Select the D A display mode Window 1 now shows an analog scale and a digital read CT ing a 18 77 dBm v 70 dBm 30 dBin The menu now includes the new item Analog Meter for setting the scale limits pig PES Dig D A CO Switch back to Dig display mode d 1144 1400 12 2 14 E 2 R amp S NRP Window handling e Auxiliary values Maximum Minimum Max Min Sensor Windows EXTERNEN File system C rien dod Function C d Function Primary A Prim Channel A Sec Channel elt Auxiliary Value _ de d Au
218. e ono dre ad eee teat 5 3 Hardware Requirements ites cet ipee pei erm eda Seeded Ee hy dae tele ee dis 5 3 IEC IEEE BUSS Aste eat ete Atal ie eiie eee ud eitis 5 3 Switchover to Remote Control REMOTE sessi 5 3 Return to Manual Operation LOCAL 5 3 Communication on Data Lines 5 4 Interface Messages EE 5 4 Device Dependent Messages Commands and Responses ssssssssrnsssrrssrrnnsrtnnnsrtrnnne nnnm 5 4 elle 5 4 RESPONSES waviness eem 5 5 Structure and Syntax of Device Dependent Messages 5 6 SGPI Staridard e t D et e e EE 5 6 GOMMANG SUM E 5 6 Gommon Comimarnds eer ea dazed ad d ips na dag ako na see EP at davatiaddeustviadagaciaa da ENT Tel dare 5 6 Device Specific Commande sse eene nennen senten nene 5 7 Structure of a Program Message ou ht n E E ue re dE E Dena 5 9 RESPONSES to Querios Agen ee egene d etn anc eee te EEN dete Ran eeu 5 10 irc C XE 5 11 Device Model and Command Processing sse enne 5 13 legal 5 13 Command Identification Parser eene nennen nnne nene 5 13 Data Base and Device Hardware eene entente nnn 5 13 Status Reporting System ssssssssssssssssssssees enne enne trne entes nennen isst tenter nnn 5 14 Output TE 5 14 Command Sequence and Command Synchronization sss 5 14 Annex Automatic Settings for Manual Selection of a Measurement Mode 5 15 Annex Correspondence between Remote Control and Manual Control
219. e user with fundamentals of remote control and describes the status reporting system as well as the procedure for connecting a PC for remote control Differences between Remote Control and Manual Control The manual control of the R amp S NRP is designed for ergonomic operation This means among other things that certain parameters are assigned default values that cannot be changed and that specific changes of device settings influence other settings In the remote control mode all settings can be changed and the user has to make sure that the device is correctly set for the measurement to be performed We therefore recommend performing a reset RST or SyYSTem PRESet page 6 98 prior to a remote control measurement so that the device is placed in a defined state Display In the REMOTE mode the display of measured values can be disabled SySTem SPEed FAST the display is cleared except for a status line at the top of the screen Blanking of menu elements that need not be continually updated increases the data processing speed The display can be reactivated with the SCPI command SYSTem SPEed NORMal The backlighting can also be completely switched off with DISPlay ILLumination OFF In the remote mode the menu line at the upper screen edge is blanked and replaced by the indication Remote Mode The SCPI error queue can be displayed using the topmost softkey labelled Error List If the LLO character is displayed in the
220. ed 7 Sensor C please zero The zero correction for sensor C is no longer correct and should be repeated 8 Sensor D please zero The zero correction for sensor D is no longer correct and should be repeated 9 to Not used 14 15 Bit 15 will never be used The sensor power bit is set when error 230 Data corrupt or stale or 231 Data questionable occurs in the respective sensor 1144 1400 12 6 87 E 3 Remote Control Commands Questionable Window Status Register R amp S NRP The CONDition register contains information as to whether the displayed data or the power calculated by the calculate blocks is questionable The Questionable Window Status Register can be read by the following commands STATus QUEStionable WINDow SUMMary CONDition STATus QUEStionable WINDow SUMMary EVENt Table 6 28 Meaning of bits used in the Questionable Window Status Register Bit No Meaning 0 Not used 1 Window 1 Power The measured values returned by Calculate block 1 are corrupt 2 Window 2 Power The measured values returned by Calculate block 2 are corrupt 3 Window 3 Power The measured values returned by Calculate block 3 are corrupt 4 Window 4 Power The measured values returned by Calculate block 4 are corrupt 5 Window 5 Power The measured values returned by Calculate block 5 are corrupt 6 Window 6 Power The measured values returned by Calcul
221. ed are lost as a result of this procedure Resetting and setting brightness and contrast If you press the A key immediately after switching on the o R amp S NRP after about 3 seconds the R amp S NRP goes into a o efi n state in which you can adjust brightness and contrast Ve Es Initially contrast and brightness are automatically set to their default values You can then make the settings you want using the diagram on the screen ON state Whenever the meter is switched off its settings are saved The next time it is switched on these set tings are automatically restored If the last setup before switch off is to be restored the R amp S NRP must be switched off with the standby key If the meter is turned off by disconnecting the AC supply it is possible that the settings being used immediately beforehand are not saved 1144 1400 12 1 10 E R amp S NRP Preset Preset You can change the R amp S NPP to a defined default state by pressing the PRESET key twice Various parameters including the following will be set as a result e All channels in the Cont Av mode continuous average power e Absolute power measurement in dBm e One window per channel opened e Offset 0 dB e Automatic filtering normal mode When the preset state is selected all default parameters are set even those for operating modes that have not been activated 1144 1400 12 1 11 E 2 R amp S NRP Table of Contents Chapter 2 Table
222. ed value of the sensor assigned to the primary channel CALC 1 8 RE 0 DBM Or 0 DB 7 CALC 1 8 REL POW 0 DBM CALC 1 8 REL RAT 0 DB CALC 1 8 REL STAT OFF Measurements are not converted into a reference value DISP ILL Display lighting remains unchanged and can be activated by pressing Ce DISP 1 4 AVAL OFF Dont show additional information on measured values DISP MESS OFF Do not display messages DISP MESS TEXT No change DISP MESS TYPE MESS Messages cannot be confirmed manually DISP 1 4 FORM DIG Digital result display DISP 1 4 MET LOW 90 DBM Lower limit value for analog result 120 DB display DISP 1 4 MET UPP 70 DBM Upper limit value for analog result 60 DB display DISP 1 4 NAME wn Text to be displayed in result window DISP 1 4 RE 0 01 Measurement accuracy and display accuracy DISP SEL 1 Selection of first result window DISP SIZE NORM Automatic window sizes DISP 1 4 ON OFF A window will automatically be opened for each sensor DISP 1 4 TRAC LOW 120 DBM Lower limit of power axis in Scope mode 1144 1400 12 6 98 E 3 R amp S NRP Command Remote Control Commands Preset and RST value Remark
223. electable RIGger l SLOPe POSitive NEGative User selectable RIGger 1 COUNt 1 in der HB nicht veranderbar RIGger 1l DELay Depends on sensor User selectable Timegate 71716997 lt HOLDoff Depends on sensor User selectable T T T T T T RIGger l LEVel Depends on sensor User selectable SENSe 1 TIMing EXCLude STARt Unchanged is irrelevant SENSe 1 TIMing EXCLude STOP Unchanged is irrelevant INITiate 1 4 1144 1400 12 CONTinuous ON 5 15 Cannot be modified in manual mode E 3 Remote Control Fundamentals SCPI command RIGger SOURce EXTernal INTernal R amp S NRP Remark User selectable RIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative User selectable RIGger COUNt Cannot be modified in manual mode RIGger DELay Sensor User selectable HOLDoff Sensor User selectable Sp Timeslot TRIGger T RIGger LEVel Sensor User selectable SENSe 1 TIMing EXCLude STARt Unchanged is irrelevant SENSe 1 TIMing EXCLude STOP Unchanged is irrelevant ITiate RIGger CONTinuous SOURce EXTernal INTernal Cannot be modified in manual mode User selectable RIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative User selectable RIGger COUNt
224. ement you can set the Excluded from Start and Dropout Excluded from End parameters accordingly Excluded from Start from End The parameter Dropout helps to ensure the reliable detec 0 000 ps 0 000 us tion of the end of modulated signal bursts e g NADC See Chapter 4 Measuring the average burst power for a detailed description 1144 1400 12 2 21 E 2 Measuring average power in defined time interval R amp S NRP Measuring average power in defined time interval Timeslot mode In the Timeslot mode average power can be measured in a defined time interval of any complex signal An external trigger signal is normally used since it always ensures reliable triggering and the measure ment of very low power Thus for example the power in one or more timeslots of TDMA signals can be measured simultaneously Q Setting the Timeslot mode e9 T slot No of Timeslots Nominal Width Excluded from Start from End 0 000 us 0 000 us 1144 1400 12 Connect a power sensor of the R amp S NRP Z1x or R amp S NRP Z2x family to connector A of the R amp S NRP and apply a signal having TDMA time structure within the level range 10 dBm to 10 dBm Once in the Scope mode see section e Scope make sure that the sensor detects a signal and relia bly triggers Change to the Sensor menu and select Mode When the Mode dialog box opens select Timeslot The associated parameters will appear in the lowe
225. en ROHDE amp SCHWARZ SVERIGE AB 46 8 605 19 00 arketing Div 46 8 605 19 80 Siehe see Australia Flygfaltsgatan 15 info rss se 128 30 Skarpnack MARCOM INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENT Inc 63 2 813 29 31 Switzerland Roschi Rohde amp Schwarz AG 41 31 922 15 22 6 L Vernida Condominium 63 2 810 58 07 hlestr 7 41 31 921 81 01 120 Amorsolo St marcom i next net 3063 Ittigen sales roschi rohde schwarz com Legaspi Village Makati City Philippines 1229 Syria Electro Scientific Office 963 11 231 59 74 963 11 231 88 75 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Osterreich SP z 0 0 4 48 22 860 64 94 Baghdad Street memo hamshointl com Przedstawicielstwo w Polsce 48 22 860 64 99 Dawara Clinical Lab Bldg ul Stawki 2 Pietro 28 rohdepl amp rsoe rohde schwarz com P 0 Box 8162 00 193 Warszawa Damascus Rohde amp Schwarz Portugal Lda 351 21 415 57 00 Taiwan Lancer Communication Co Ltd 886 2 23 91 10 02 351 21 415 57 10 for Div 1 and 7 886 2 23 95 82 82 Alameda Antonio Sergio n 7 telerus mail telepac pt 16F No 30 Pei Ping East Road info lancercomm com tw R C Sala A aipei 2795 023 Linda a Velha Taiwan System Communication Co Ltd 886 2 23 91 10 02 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ 40 21 410 68 46 for Div 2 and 8 886 2 23 95 82 82 Representation Office Bucharest 40 21 411 20 13 6F No 30 Pei Ping East Road info lancercomm com tw Str Uranus 98 rohdero rsoe rohde schwarz com aipei Sc 2 Et 5 Ap 36 76102 Bucuresti Sector 5 Tanzania SS
226. ence DIFFerence Xcontav parameter list RELative RELative lt contav_parameter_list gt SU DIFFerence lt contav_parameter_list gt RELative RELative lt contav_parameter_list gt RATio RATio lt contav_parameter_list gt RATio RELative RATio RELative lt contav_parameter_list gt SWR SWR lt contav_parameter_list gt REFLection REFLection lt contav_parameter_list gt RLOSs RLOSs lt contav_parameter_list gt Timeslot mode CONFigure 1 8 READ 1 8 EASure 1 8 FETCh 1 8 SCALar SCALar POWer TSLot POWer TSLot AVG AVG timeslot parameter list RELative RELative lt timeslot_parameter_list gt DIFFerence DIFFerence lt timeslot_parameter_list gt RELative RELative lt timeslot_parameter_list gt SU DIFFerence timeslot parameter list RELative RELative timeslot parameter list RATio RATio lt timeslot_parameter_list gt RATio RELative RATio RELative lt timeslot_parameter_list gt SWR SWR lt timeslot_parameter_list gt REFLection REFLection lt timeslot_parameter_list gt RLOSs RLOSs lt timeslot_parameter_list gt Burst mode CONFigure 1 8 READ 1 8 EASure 1 8 FETCh 1 8 SCALar SCALar POWer BURSt POWer BURSt AVG AVG Xpurst parameter list RELative RELative lt burst_parameter_list gt DIFFerence DIFFerence Xpurst parameter list RELative RELative Xpurst parameter list SU DIFFerence Xpurst parameter list
227. ensor B connected gt Sensor A error Sensor B error Sensor A Front Rear Sensor B Front Rear gt Sensor C connected gt Sensor D connected gt Sensor C error Sensor D error UU Sensor C Front Rear gt Sensor D Front Rear D STAT DEV Key pressed 0 Questionable Status c EN Register EN Error Event Queue es Questionable Power Summary 3 Questionable Window Summary 4 0 5 0 6 0 malo Questionable Calibration Summary gt 710 POST iu E UC iL STAT SOURS vane ps Standard Event Status Operation Complete gt T 0 Register Service Request Enable SRE Status Byte FSB Operation Status Operation CAL Summary gt 0 Ee E 1 nod EN TUM NM E a B 11 13 15 Operation SENSe Summary gt Lower Limit Fail Uper Limit Fail 0 0 0 C6 GX9X9XeXexe Service Request to controller STAT OPER at transition from 0 to 1 Fig 6 11 Overview on structure of Status Reporting System 1144 1400 12 6 73 E 3 Remote Control Commands Operation Calibrating Status Register STAT OPER CAL Operation Measuring Status Register STAT OPER MEAS Operation Trigger Status Register STAT OPER TRIG Operation Sense Status Register STAT OPER SENS Operation Lower Limit Fail Status Register STAT OPER LOF Operation Upper Li
228. entical to DISP ENABle See Annex Compatibility Information 6 30 No query No query Query only The value range of the parameter depends on the output unit of the measured value The value range of the parameter depends on the output unit of the measured value DBM W DBUV DBM W DBUV Backlighting is switched on again in case of a E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands DISPlay ERRorlist ON OFF Displays ON or removes OFF a windows which contains the contents of the SCPI error queue The queue may be deleted by pressing the key RST Value OFF DISPlay MESSage STATe ON OFF Displays a window containing a user defined message The message text is defined via DISP MESS TEXT In addition DISP MESS TYPE can select between two types of message windows Calling the command with the OFF parameter is ignored if DISP MESS TYPE QUERy is set because in this case a window must be closed by pressing the key RST value OFF DISPlay MESSage TEXT CLEar Deletes the stored text for user defined messages DISPlay MESSage TEXT DATA lt string gt Defines the text that can be displayed in a message window The text can contain ASCII characters from code 32 to code 126 The string n is interpreted as a line break Up to 4 lines DISP MESS TYPE MESS or up to 2 lines DISP MESS TYPE QUERy can be shown The length of a line depends on the charac
229. entionally neither in the incoming cable nor on the unit itself as this may cause the unit to become electrically hazardous Any extension lines or multiple socket outlets used must be checked for compliance with rele vant safety standards at regular intervals If the unit has no power switch for disconnection from the AC supply the plug of the connecting cable is regarded as the disconnecting device In such cases it must be ensured that the power plug is easily reachable and accessible at all times length of connecting cable approx 2 m Functional or electronic switches are not suit able for providing disconnection from the AC supply If units without power switches are integrated in racks or systems a disconnecting device must be provided at system level Applicable local or national safety regulations and rules for the prevention of accidents must be observed in all work performed Prior to performing any work on the unit or opening the unit the latter must be discon nected from the supply network Any adjustments replacements of parts main tenance or repair may be carried out only by authorized R amp S technical personnel Only original parts may be used for replacing parts relevant to safety eg power switches power transformers fuses A safety test must be performed after each replacement of parts relevant to safety visual inspection PE conductor test insulation resistance leakage current measurement func
230. epresented by a vector that can contain up to 26 indices and contains the power of a time window at each index POWer TGATe Avc Timegate l The Timegate mode is a pseudo mode It is used to determine accurate measured values in the gates defined with the aid of the Scope mode in manual operation If one of the four gates is selected SENS TRAC SEL the sensor is internally put into the Timeslot mode and configured such that it determines the average power in this gate with high accuracy POWer BURSt AvG Burst l u In remote control this measurement mode is very similar to the ContAv mode The integration time is however not predefined but determined by the sensor with the aid of a burst detector The start of a burst is detected when the measurement signal rises above the set trigger level The end is set when the signal drops below the trigger threshold SENS POW BURS DTOL defines the time interval during which a signal drop below the trigger level is not interpreted as the end of the burst In the Burst mode the set trigger source is ignored and TRIG SOUR INT is implicitly assumed XTIMe Scope A sequence of measurements is performed The individual measured values are determined as in the ContAv mode The length of an individual measurement is determined from the ratio of the total time SENS TRAC TIME and the number of individual test points SENS TRAC POIN In remote c
231. ered During the Holdoff time which starts with the trigger event other trigger events are suppressed The holdoff time is set in an editing field with direct entry of values see Chapter 3 Dialog boxes and their controls Remote Control TRIGger 1 4 ALL HOLDoff float value Allows a trigger hysteresis to be set The signal level must be lower higher than the trigger level minus hysteresis trigger level plus hys teresis before triggering can occur again brackets apply to triggering on the falling edge The trigger hysteresis is set in an editing field with direct entry of val ues see Chapter 3 Dialog boxes and their controls Remote Control TRIGger 1 4 ALL HYSTeresis lt float_value gt This setting is used to stop continuous triggering and thus execute only one trigger event at a time To enable the trigger refer to Trigger sequence control p 4 26 To record single events in the Scope mode the Realtime check box must be enabled in the Mode dialog box The chopper for the meas urement is thus switched off Otherwise a second measurement would automatically follow the regular measurement initiated by the trigger event and corrupt the measurement result Remote Control INITiate 1 4 ALL CONTinuous ON OFF Switches to the first page of the Trigger dialog box 4 25 E 2 Data acquisition and parameters Sensor menu R amp S NRP Trigger sequence control The key is used in the Scope mode to
232. erform action Close Use hardkey to perform action Open dialog box Mode Set parameters Relative Ii On Reset Softkeys with dual assignments Y Close Expand 1144 1400 12 If the menu contains only one or two descriptive terms an action is performed directly If the name of the action to be performed is shown in a wide black field you can start the action by pressing the hardkey of the same name e g in this case If a menu item is followed by three dots it can be used to open a dialog box to set a variety of parameters Parameter setting options are presented in the menu The currently selected option is shown in inverse video You can select the option you want by pressing the left or right side of the rocker switch Some softkeys are assigned two menu items One is se lected by pressing the left hand side of the rocker switch the other the right hand side The two menu items are separated by a vertical line 3 7 E 2 Dialog boxes and their controls R amp S NRP Dialog boxes and their controls Dialog boxes contain check boxes option fields editing fields and drop down lists as control elements They are activated using the appropriate rocker switch to their right If two control elements are posi tioned side by side the element on the left is operated with the left hand side of the rocker switch and the element on the right with the right hand side of the rocker switch
233. eric PTRansition 0 32767 non decimal numeric STATus PRESet Table 6 30 1144 1400 12 6 69 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP The status reporting system stores all information about the current operating status of the device and errors that occur The information is stored in the status registers and the error queue The contents of the status registers and error queue can be queried via the IEC IEEE bus The information is hierarchically structured The highest level is formed by the Status Byte Register STB defined by IEEE 488 2 and the associated Service Request Enable SRE register The STB receives its information from the Standard Event Status Register ESR also defined by IEEE 488 2 and the associated Standard Event Status Enable ESE Register as well as from the SCPl defined Operation Status Register and the Questionable Status Register which contain detailed information on the device and from the Device Status Register The status reporting system also includes the IST flag Individual STatus and the Parallel Poll Enable Register PPE assigned to it The IST flag like the SRQ combines the complete device status in a single bit The PPE has the same function for the IST flag as the SRE has for the service request The output buffer output queue contains the messages the device returns to the controller It is not part of the status reporting system but since it determines the value of the MA
234. erically displayed Switching the sensor to the Scope mode To use the Scope mode display the sensor must first be switched to a special operating mode Scope and configured This is done by way of the Mode dialog box in the Sensor menu Mode dialog box T gate Scope C gt dod ContAv Burst T slot T gate Scope Points 312 Horiz Resolution Reducedto 266 O Fig 4 35 Mode dialog box Scope mode Realtime Q Desired number of measurement points Each point represents the average power of a time interval whose width is determined by the length of the measurement window e Trace p 4 44 and the number of measurement points Points Se Remote control SENSe 1 4 TRACe POINts lt int_value gt Reduced to If the desired time resolution cannot be obtained with the connected sensor the number of measurement points is automatically reduced With the Sensors R amp S NRP Z1x and R amp S NRP Z2x this limit is ap proximately 2 5 us per measurement point external triggering 10 us is possible with internal triggering Realtime C In the Realtime mode each measurement point comes from a single d sweep Successively recorded traces are not averaged For this pur pose the chopper is switched off and the averaging filter deactivated Advantage unstable or unclear trigger conditions are detected imme diately preventing the display of unrealistic traces caused by averag in
235. es marked by tabs Symbols T slots Gates Tabs for selecting the page Marks the trigger level visible at the left and right hand edges If the Trigger dialog box is open an unbroken line appears A Time of trigger event Time at which the trigger delay has elapsed delayed trigger In the A Timeslot mode this time should coincide with the beginning of the first timeslot Y Tip If you use the up down cursor keys for making changes to parameters Entry fields on page 3 8 you can observe the effects immediately and make adjustments interactively Coarse or fine adjustments are possible depending on the decimal place in which you scroll Trace The parameters on the Trace page are used to determine the position and the size of the screen win dow The number of measurement points must be specified in the Mode menu Switching the sensor to the Scope mode p 4 41 Scope mode display T slots Trace CD gt RUN T slots SEN Gates Soe ee Start 0 000 p s 000 ps 30 000 dem 000 dBm Length 4 616 ms Min 60 000 dBm d Fig 4 38 Scope mode display Trace page Start C Start of the measurement window left hand screen edge relative to d the delayed trigger The value can be negative so that signal components before the trigger event can be shown limited to a few ms depending on the sensor Remote control SENSe 1 4 TRACe OFFSet TIME float value 1144 1
236. et 4 1144 1400 12 Menu layout All sensor settings can be made using the Sensor menu The type and details of data acquisition can be specified with this menu See Chapter 4 section Data acquisition and parameters for a detailed description The Windows menu is used to configure windows and the result display in the windows See Chapter 4 section Displaying measurement results for a detailed description The details of postprocessing are summarized in the Meas urement menu See Chapter 4 section Configuring measurements for a detailed description 3 5 E 2 R amp S NRP Menu layout File System 1144 1400 12 Power Ref puo Sensor System d Info Info Misc d WS Setup d Recall Save Standard Recall Error List d Window Name Remote VO Batt Test The File menu is used to handle the setup memories and display information about the instrument and any sensors that have been connected See Chapter 4 section Management of settings for a detailed description The System menu is used to handle functions that are not specifically used to perform measurements See Chapter 4 section System settings for a detailed description 3 6 E 2 R amp S NRP Menu handling Menu handling The menus can contain up to eight menu items which are used to perform an action open a dialog box or set a parameter P
237. eturned in short form gt also see section Parameters page 5 11 Example UNIT2 POWer Response DBM 1144 1400 12 5 10 E 3 R amp S NRP Parameters Remote Control Fundamentals Most commands require the specification of a parameter Parameters must be separated from the header by a white space Parameters may be specified as numeric values Boolean parameters character data strings or block data The type of parameter required for the specific command as well as the permissible value range are described together with the commands Numeric values Units Special numeric values 1144 1400 12 Numeric values may be entered in any customary form i e with sign decimal point and exponent If the values exceed the resolution of the device they will be rounded off Values between 9 9E37 and 9 9E37 can be entered The exponent is denoted by E or e The exponent alone must not be used Physical quantities may be stated with the unit Permissible prefixes for the unit are G Giga MA Mega MHZ is also allowed K kilo M milli U micro and N nano If no unit is specified the basic unit will be used Some settings allow relative values to be stated in One and percent According to SCPI these units are represented by the strings O or DPCT The unit DPCT designates the deviation of a measurand from 10096 A power ratio of 95 thus corresponds to 5 A96 Unit used in the R amp S NRP SCPI notation Hertz Se
238. evelopment The numeric suffix refers to the sensors v Note Before commands of the SERVice system can be sent to a sensor they must be enabled via the SERVice UNLock 1234 command Table 6 12 Commands of the SERVice command system Eme emm mem 1 4 SERVice CALibration TEST Query only EMP F No query TEMP DATA Kelvin Query only RCOunt RESult UNLock SERVice 1 4 CALibration TEST NR1 Tests the consistency of the calibration data set according to three criteria If the following bit is set in lt NR1 gt the following action is executed The serial number of the calibration data set is tested The checksum of the calibration data set is tested The header of the calibration data set is tested If an inconsistency of the data set is detected the query returns a 1 otherwise a 0 Value range 0 to 255 RST value none SERVice 1 4 CALibration TEMP ONCE Initiates a temperature measurement of the sensor in question The temperature can be queried with SERV CAL TEMP DATA SERVice 1 4 CALibration TEMP DATA NR1 Returns the temperature of the sensor in Kelvin if a temperature measurement was previously initiated by means of SERV CAL TEMP ONCE 1144 1400 12 6 66 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands SERVice 1 4 RCOunt lt NR1 gt SERVice 1 4 RESult lt NR1 gt These commands allow simula
239. everal commands Several commands in a program message are separated by a semicolon If the next command belongs to a different command system the semicolon is followed by a colon The colon stands for the root node of the command tree Example SYSTem TIME 20 30 00 SENSe FUNCtion POWer AVG This program message contains two commands The first command belongs to the SYSTem system and is used to set the time of the system clock The second command belongs to the SENSe system and must be preceded by a colon Otherwise confusion might be caused if the SYSTem tree also had a subordinate SENSe node In this case it would be possible to omit the introductory keyword SyYSTem see the following explanation If the successive commands belong to the same system and therefore have one or several common levels the program message may be abbreviated The second command following the semicolon then starts at the level that is below the common levels The colon after the semicolon must be omitted in this case Example SENSe2 TIMing STARt 10 SENSe2 TIMing STOP 10 This program message contains two commands separated by a semicolon Both commands belong to the SENSe system and its TIMing subsystem i e they have two common levels In the abbreviated program message the second command starts at the level below SENSe TIMing The colon after the semicolon has to be omitted The short form of the program message is SE
240. f the Trigger dialog box is opened in the Scope display a dotted line indicates the trigger threshold in the diagram Delay gt S trigger threshold sete dias Geer Source Choose between external triggering connector 1 02 n at the rear or internal triggering derived from the signal and between positive or negative edge Note Since I O2 functions both as a trigger input and analog output be sure to select the cor Next rect setting System 2 O dialog gt Level In the case of internal triggering set the trigger threshold here Y Tip When a symbol in the display shows that the sensor doesn t trigger the DELATRIG key can be used to trigger the sensor once The then appearing graph often can give a hint how to choose trigger set tings Next Geen gt Open the second page of the Trigger dialog box Previous 1144 1400 12 The Holdoff and Hysteresis parameters allow you to make settings that enable reliable triggering even in the case of complex signals Holdoff steresis Use this parameter to set the time range in which ad ditional trigger events measured from the last suc cessful triggering are to be ignored Singe C gt Hysteresis Setting the trigger hysteresis to a value other than 0 dB will prevent triggering from occurring again until the measurement level has fallen below the trigger threshold by at least this value For a detailed description of these parameters refer to Chapter
241. g asynchronous measurement values Disadvantage if power is very low display noise zero offset and line arity are worse than in the Normal mode Remote control SENSe 1 4 TRACe REALt ime ON OFF 1144 1400 12 4 41 E 2 Displaying data in the Scope mode R amp S NRP Background information Points The highest possible number of measurement points 312 corresponds exactly to the number of pixels available on the display of the R amp S NRP The most detailed image is obtained with this value If the required time resolution is too high depending on the width of the measurement window the number of measurement points is automatically reduced to the largest possible value Reduced to display A closed trace is always displayed with linear interpolation between the measurement points Generally 312 measurement points should be set and the reduction performed automatically See also the tip on page 3 9 An exception is smoothing noisy traces by decreasing the number of points As each measurement point represents the average power of an equivalent time interval noise can be reduced by 30 by reducing the number of points by half Another means of reducing noise is the averaging filter Filter averaging p 4 19 which can be used whenever Realtime is not enabled With very large averaging factors the display will tend to re spond slowly Realtime When the R amp S NRP is in the Normal mode averaging is always perfo
242. g on the sensor The trigger delay is set in an editing field with direct entry of values see Chapter 3 Dialog boxes and their controls v Tip Entering a correct value for the trigger delay is absolutely essential for accurate measurements in the Timeslot mode For this reason the setting should always be checked in the Scope mode T slots p 4 45 Remote Control TRIGger 1 4 ALL DELay float value Source C Drop down list for the trigger source external or internal and trigger d d slope positive or negative Remote Control TRIGger 1 4 ALL SOURCce BUS EXTernal HOLD IMMediate INTernal Level C When this level is exceeded a measurement is triggered or when the d d signal drops below this level in the case of a falling slope The trigger level is set in an editing field with direct entry of values see Chapter 3 Dialog boxes and their controls Remote Control TRIGger 1 4 ALL LEVel float value Next C Switches to the second page of the Trigger dialog box d 1144 1400 12 4 24 E 2 R amp S NRP Trigger dialog box Advanced AIBICID Holdoff Hysteresis Single Previous 1144 1400 12 U Wy eo i 1 e U eo U Se U eo Data acquisition and parameters Sensor menu Hysteresis Singe Previous Fig 4 22 Trigger Advanced dialog box Tabs for selecting the sensor Allows the Holdoff time to be ent
243. he character data Example Command SENSe2 AVERage TCONTrol MOVING Query SENSe2 AVERage TCONTrol Response MOV Strings must always be indicated in single or double quotes Example SENSe1 FUNCtion ON POWer AVG or SENSe1 FUNCtion ON POWer AVG The block data format is suitable for the transmission of large data volumes A command with a block data parameter has the following structure Example DISPlay PIXMap Response 49600xxxxxxxx The ASCII character denotes the beginning of the data block The next numeral specifies the number of subsequent digits defining the length of the data block In the example above the four digits specify a length of 9600 bytes The data bytes follow next During transmission of these data bytes all terminators and other control data are ignored Setting one command influences the value of another command According to SCPI 1999 this should be avoided but it makes sense when user friendly high level measurement commands are to be provided to configure an entire section of the device at once The high level commands CONF FETCh READ and MEASure are therefore an exception to this rule 5 12 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Fundamentals Device Model and Command Processing The device model shown in Fig 5 2 was prepared from the point of view of the processing of remote control commands The individual components operate independently of each other and si
244. he exterior To clean the exterior use a soft lintfree cloth and an alcohol free solvent e g a commercially available dishwashing liquid Storage The R amp S NRP has a storage temperature range of 20 C to 70 C 1144 1400 12 8 1 E 1 R amp S NRP Table of Contents Chapter 9 Contents 9 SCPI Error Mieren ene Eege 9 1 SCPI Specific Error Messages nennen rennen nnne nennen 9 1 Klee 9 1 Command e 9 1 ExecuUtlonjJEIor si o rt eet esie ite tea tati teta etd dete et bte e etes 9 3 Device SpecifIC ETTOIS deu re Ei he E b o i e e eben retenus 9 4 Query Errors 2 ide ee I ene Hi e d e 9 5 Device Dependent Errors sees eene e nnn nnne 9 5 1144 1400 12 l 9 1 E 2 R amp S NRP SCPI Error Messages 9 SCPI Error Messages The list below contains all error messages that may occur in the instrument Negative error numbers are defined in the SCPI standard positive error numbers identify device specific errors The left column of the following table gives the error code In the right column the text of the error message displayed or entered in the error event queue is printed in bold An additional explanation is given below this text SCPI Specific Error Messages No error Error code Error text returned upon queue query Explanations 0 No error This message is displayed if the error queue is empty Command Error Command errors causes bit 5 in the ESR to be set Error c
245. he maximum and minimum values for each calculate block The current measured value is stored with CALC 1 8 EXTR RES as the new minimum and maximum value The extreme values can be queried with CALC 1 8 MIN DATA and CALC 1 8 MAX DATA CALCulate 1 8 FEED 1 2 lt string gt The sensors connected with the calculate block via the primary and secondary channel can yield differently processed data peak value average value peak to average value or even a measurement sequence as is the case in the Scope mode The CALC FEED determines which of this data is to be processed by the calculate block Depending on the measurement mode the following settings are possible Primary channel measurement string mode ContAv AVERage Average value Burst AVERage Average value Timeslot AVERage Average value Timegate AVERage Average value TRACe Measurement sequence AVERage SWEep 1 4 Average value in time gate 1 2 3 or 4 PTAVerage ON SWEep 1 4 Peak to average value in time gate 1 2 3 or 4 PEAK ON SWEep 1 4 Peak value in time gate 1 2 3 or 4 CALC FEED is only important if used in the Scope mode Average values are processed exclusively in all other modes RST value POW AVER 2 CALC EXTR RES is identical to CALC PHOLd CLEar See Annex Compatibility Information 1144 1400 12 6 22 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands CALCulate 1
246. he measurement modes ContAv ContAv with data buffering Burst Timeslot or Scope SENSe 1 4 FUNCtion command on page 6 56 Keywords H SCALar POWer AVG SCALar POWer TSLot SCALar POWer BURSt ARRay POWer AVG e XTIMe POWer expression Specification of a calculation function for the addressed CALCulate block gt CALCulate 1 8 MATH EXPRession command on page 6 26 If expression is not specified the measured value of the primary channel is output Keywords H RELative e DIFFerence H DIFFerence RELative SUM H SUM RELative e RATio H RATio RELative RLOSs SWR e REFLection Queries must be terminated with an parameter list A list with parameters whose meaning is determined by the selected function Since all four high level measurement commands use the same parameter lists they are described together in this section 1144 1400 12 6 13 E 3 Remote Control Commands Table 6 1 High level measurement commands CONFigure commands CONFigure 1 8 Measurement commands FETCh 1 8 READ 1 8 Parameters R amp S NRP ContAv mode CONFigure 1 8 READ 1 8 EASure 1 8 FETCh 1 8 SCALar SCALar POWer POWer AVG AVG lt contav_parameter_list gt RELative RELative lt contav_parameter_list gt DIFFer
247. he rocker switch beside Timeslot to view the various timeslot values in the measurement window v Tip You can open a separate window for each slot and thus display up to 4 timeslot values simultaneously 1144 1400 12 2 23 E 2 R amp S NRP Table of Contents Chapter 3 Table of Contents 3 M nual Operation E 3 1 Keys ns SEIL Dux i 3 1 Screen layout o a odds AB aia poA oit edd are eterne 3 3 LUCI TH VE 3 5 Menu handling EE 3 7 Dialog boxes and their controls eene nennen nennen nnns 3 8 Display WIndOWSs odeur ERU eO DR READER EUER ONE e READ ANE 3 11 Window sizs arid types TEE 3 11 Special symbols tete tree cbe ei dde e ew etatis 3 12 1144 1400 12 I 3 1 E 2 R amp S NRP Keys 3 Manual Operation This Chapter describes the controls displays etc the screen layout and how to operate the R amp S NRP Keys Keys on the front panel of the meter are used to manually operate the instrument There are several groups of keys each group having a different function Sofikeys The six softkeys are rocker switches in other words they can be rocked backwards and forwards by pressing on the right or left side of the key The softkey function is context sensitive and is indicated by screen labelling For more information on the softkeys see Menu handling on p 3 7 and Dialog boxes and their control elements on p 3 8 Hardkeys The hardkeys are a direct way of activating the main func tions and are alway
248. header and usually one or several parameters Header and parameters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g space The headers may be composed of several keywords The query is created by appending a question mark directly to the header Common Commands Device independent commands consist of a header preceded by an asterisk The header may be followed by one or several parameters Examples RST Reset resets the device ESE 253 Event Status Enable sets the bits of the Standard Event Status Enable Register ESR Event Status Query queries the contents of the Standard Event Status Register 1144 1400 12 5 6 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Fundamentals Device Specific Commands Hierarchy Device specific commands have a hierarchical structure Fig 5 1 The various levels are represented by compound headers Headers at the highest level root level have one keyword only This keyword describes an entire command system Example SENSe 1 4 This keyword denotes the command system SENSe lt n gt For lower level commands the full path has to be specified starting with the highest level in the left most position The individual keywords are separated by a colon Example SENSe 1 4 TRACe POINts int value This command is at the third level of he SENSE system and sets the number of test points for the Scope mode FREQuency Fig 5 1 SCPI command tree Som
249. hen the power at a sensor exceeds the power limit RST Wert OFF 1144 1400 12 6 93 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP SYSTem BEEPer NOTify KEY ON OFF Enables ON or disables OFF acoustic key clicks respectively RST Wert OFF SYSTem BEEPer STOP Stops the output of an audible signal SYSTem BEEPer TIME lt NRf gt Sets the length in milliseconds of the audible signal output with SYS BEEP Value range 1 60 Unit s RST value This setting is not changed by RST SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess NR1 Sets the address with which the R amp S NRP can be addressed via the IEC IEEE bus The address is factory set to 20 and is not changed by a reset Value range 0 30 RST value This setting is not changed by RST SYSTem DATE lt year gt lt month gt day Parameter Value range lt year gt 2000 2100 lt month gt 1 January 12 December lt day gt Toig GL Sets the date Since the R amp S NRP has no battery backed clock the date has to be reset if the clock was not set after the last power on of the R amp S NRP RST value This setting is not changed by RST 1144 1400 12 6 94 E 3 R amp S NRP SYSTem INFO Returns information Remote Control Commands lt string gt about the system string value is used to query a specific information item If called without parameters the command returns all available inf
250. hest level of the SCPI hierarchy Its special feature is that bit 6 acts as the summary bit of all other bits of the Status Byte Register The status byte is read by the query STB or a serial poll The SRE is associated with the STB The function of the SRE corresponds to that of the ENABle register of the SCPI registers Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit in the SRE Bit 6 of the SRE is ignored If a bit is set in the SRE and the associated bit in the STB changes from 0 to 1 a service request SRQ will be generated on the IEC IEEE bus which triggers an interrupt in the controller configured for this purpose and can be further processed by the controller The SRE can be set by the command SRI Gl and read by the query SRE Table 6 16 Meaning of bits used in the status byte Bit No Meaning 0 Not used 1 Device Status Register summary bit Depending on the configuration of the device status register this bit is set when a sensor is connected or disconnected when an error has occurred in a sensor or when a key has been pressed 2 Error Queue not empty The bit is set if the error queue has an entry If this bit is enabled by the SRE each entry of the error queue will generate a service request An error can thus be recognized and specified in detail by querying the error queue The query yields a conclusive error message This procedure is recommended since it considerably reduces the problems of IEC IEEE bus
251. his limit is exceeded see other CALCul ate 1 8 LI Mi t commands The value range depends on the current output unit of the measured value of the calculate block Unit of measured value 9 999998 13 0103 Value range 9 99999E5 196 897 Unit gt Table 6 3 on page 6 27 RST value 0 DBM or 0 DB CALCulate 1 8 LIMit UPPer DATA POWer float value This command sets an upper limit for the measured power unit W DBM or DBUV The R amp S NRP can respond when this limit is exceeded see other CALCulate 1 8 LIMit commands Unit DBM W DBUV Default unit DBM Value range 120 DBM to 90 DBM RST value 0 DBM CALCulate 1 8 LIMit UPPer DATA RATio float value This command sets an upper limit for the measured power ratios unit DB DPCT or O The R amp S NRP can respond when this limit is exceeded see other CALCulate 1 8 LIMit commands Unit DB DPCT O Default unit DB Value range 200 DB to 200 DB RST value 0 DB CALCulate 1 8 LIMit UPPer STATe ON OFF This command switches the monitoring function for the upper limit on or off RST Value OFF 1144 1400 12 6 25 E 3 Remote Control Commands CALCulate 1 8 MATH EXPRession R amp S NRP string The string parameter may assume the following values 1 2 3 and 4 for n and m A sensor must be connected to the respective channel string Meaning E Bi E Hd The c
252. ibration 1 4 Z2ERO AUTO ONCE If the power measured during zeroing is too large the R amp S NRP re ports an error The most common cause of this error is that the user started zeroing without turning off the test signal beforehand Other wise the sensor probably has a hardware defect Zeroing B C D successful Zeroing A failed Accept 4 MENU Fig 4 4 Zeroing error message The R amp S NRP Z power sensors are absolutely calibrated a calibration measurement after switching on the instrument is not necessary and also not planned The sensors should be recalibrated in regular intervals for details on this please refer to the data sheet However overload other damage or ex treme operating conditions may cause the measurement uncertainty to exceed the specified values The option R amp S NRP B1 sensor check source makes it possible to check the reliability of the sensor by performing a test measurement In the case of sensors with a lead in attenuator pad R amp S NRP Z22 R amp S NRP Z23 and R amp S NRP Z24 the test measurement can be made with or without an at tenuator Hardkey ZERO CAL d Test at Power Ref Sensor only Test at Power Ref With Pad Report 1144 1400 12 gt Pe Zero AI o Zero A 8 Zero B Test at Power Ref Sensor only with pad Report Config Fig 4 5 Zero Cal dialog box Starts a test measurement for a sensor without a
253. icate the following Sensor menu Context in which the operation below can be performed Mode dialog Name C Softkey menu item or dialog element KEY Hardkey T Function is activated with the left hand side of the rocker switch CD Function is activated with the right hand side of the rocker switch d C Function can be activated with either side of the rocker switch d d C Selection function change direction by pressing the other side of the dod rocker switch Action arrow Action Result 1144 1400 12 4 1 E 2 Hardkeys Hardkeys R amp S NRP The main settings for the Power Meter R amp S NRP can be accessed via hardkeys Stored setting PRE SET is used to change the instrument to its default state Preset or to a user defined Setup state maximum of 10 possible pressing this key once opens the File menu pressing it a second time loads the Preset setting The user defined setups and settings for measurements on mobile radio stan dards can also be loaded from the File menu Hardkey or d 1144 1400 12 C d d WS Setup d Recall Save Standard Recall Error List d Window Name Fig 4 1 Setup dialog box Changes the R amp S NRP to its default state Preset v Tip The black background of the text indicates that the function can also be started by pressing the hardkey if the File menu is open Remote Control RST Default state for remote control operation
254. igger event The source for this event is set via TRIG SOUR When the event defined in this way occurs the R amp S NRP enters the MEASURING state As long as the R amp S NRP measures data it remains in this state and exits it immediately after completion of the measurement Annex 1 9 E 2 Annex Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP GET or TRIG IMM TRIG IMM or Trigger signal TRIG IMM 9 D m x ABORT RST Poweron Fig l 1 Overview of basic relationships in the trigger state system Fig l 1 Overview of basic relationships in the trigger state system shows the basic structure of the trigger system It is possible to improve the sequence of measurement using the commands from the TRIGger command system 1144 1400 12 Annex 1 10 E 2 R amp S NRP Annex Remote Control Commands Logic relationship of command systems SENSe CALCulate and UNIT The following section provides an overview of the measurement procedure of the R amp S NRP The commands are mentioned as examples These commands are described in detail in chapter 6 To perform measurements with the R amp S NRP the user should have a good understanding of the trigger system and be familiar with the result processing The measured values delivered by the sensors cannot be directly queried As shown in Fig l 2 Processing of measured values in the R amp S NRP the raw data is first determined in the sensors taking into account the SENSe settings It
255. ing windows Windows menu Close C d 1144 1400 12 Windows Open Opens a window with the previous settings This means that a meas urement which has been removed from the display can be restored Remote Control DISPlay WINDow 1 4 STATe ON Windows nit Opens a window with preset values Configures a completely new measurement Windows gt Close Closes an opened window The sizes of any remaining windows are adjusted accordingly Remote Control DISPlay WINDow 1 4 STATe OFF 4 28 E 2 R amp S NRP Expanding windows Windows menu Expand C d Arranging windows Windows menu Displaying measurement results Windows menu Windows Expand All opened windows are expanded to the full display height The se lected window is the only window that can be seen as all the other windows are masked by the selected window However the masked windows are still open and can be selected in sequence with Window 1B 34 or by means of the up down cursor keys Expanded windows display all relevant parameters For a graphical representation of the various window types and a description of sym bols see Chapter 3 section Window sizes and types and Special sym bols Remote Control DISPlay WINDow SIZE ZOOMed Windows Arrange Expanded windows are reduced to their normal size and returned to Arrange C their original state with Arrange d Remote Control DISPlay WINDow SIZE NO
256. ion with several links 1144 1400 12 04 Supplement 2 E 1 R amp S NRP Supplement Communication channels of a VXI11 connection Channel Meaning Core All client server communication excluding aborts and interrupts is handled via this channel Abort Since the commands in the core channel are serialized and therefore cannot be interrupted asynchronous abort commands must be transmitted via a separate independent channel This channel serves no further purpose Interrupt Service requests SRQs are reported to the network instrument client via this channel As all links share this channel the client must subsequently determine which device triggered the SRQ by polling the status bytes device_readstb function of all connected devices Connection setup A socket connection is set up for each channel All commands via the core or abort channel contain an ID that is used to assign the command to a link The interrupt channel which is also implemented using sockets is shared by all links Commands transmitted via this channel do not contain a link ID The setup is handled by the network instrument client which first requests the connections from the network instrument server s portmapper service at port 111 The portmapper subsequently activates the channel in the R amp S NRP and tells the client at which ports channel services can be addressed For this reason it is important that any firewalls or routers between the
257. iplied by a correction factor logarithmically added Example RST ENS CORR OFFS STAT ON global offset correction ON ENS CORR OFFS 20 DB corrects result by 20 dB NIT ETCh S S I F Frequency dependent offset correction Two column tables can be entered in which frequencies and correction values can be stored A frequency dependent correction value is determined by linear interpolation in the units Hz and dB using the signal frequency defined with SENS FREQ The interpolated correction value can be queried with SENS FDOF for checking purposes Example RST MEM TABL MOVE Table 1 Splitter renames first table MEM TABL SEL Splitter selects table MEM TABL CLEar deletes selected table MEM TABL FREQ 0 1e4 5e4 1e5 1e9 interpolation points on the frequency axis MEM TABL GAIN 3 1 3 1 3 0 2 9 2 9 associated offset values SENS FREQ 900 MHZ signal frequency SENS CORR FDOT STAT ON activates frequency dependent offset correction SENS CORR FDOT Splitter selects an offset table SENS CORR FDOF queries correction value used INIT FETCh This example assumes that a table called Table 1 is available Duty cycle If the duty cycle of a pulsed signal SENS DCYO is reported to the R amp S NRP the R amp S NRP delivers the average power in the pulse Example RST ENS CORR DCYC STAT ON duty cycle correction ON ENS CORR DCYC
258. is the current unit of the measurement result Query only The unit is the current unit of the measurement result Query only The unit is the current unit of the measurement result Query only The unit is the current unit of the measurement result No query No query No query Query only Query only The value range of the parameter depends on the output unit of the measured value The value range of the parameter depends on the output unit of the measured value Query only The value range of the parameter depends on the output unit of the measured value E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP CALCulate 1 8 MINimum Maximum PTPeak DATA With this command the current output value of a calculate block can be queried If one of the optional keywords MAXi mum MINi mum or PTPeak is specified other values can be queried instead of the current measured value MAXi mum Maximum and minimum of all measured values that previously occurred in this MI Ni mum calculate block The two limit values are set to the current measured value when e the device is switched on e aresetis performed RST e the values are explicitly set to the current measured value using the command CALCulate 1 8 EXTRemes RESet PTPeak Peak to peak distance maximum minimum of measured values in the calculate block Unit gt Table 6 3 on page 6 27 CALCulate 1 8 EXTRemes RESet The R amp S NRP stores t
259. is then transferred to the CALCulate blocks where the measured values of up to two sensors are processed and made available to the user in the unit defined by UNIT Data output output queue in REMOTE mode or display Measured values in LOCAL mode raw data CALC 1 8 MATH EXPR SENSn SENSn SENSm SENS 1 4 SENSn SENSm CALC 1 8 REL UNIT 1 8 POW REFL UNIT 1 8 RAT SWR RLOS Fig l 2 Processing of measured values in the R amp S NRP e Note The high level commands and the SENSe block allow indices to be specified These indices refer to the connected sensors indices 1 to 4 for the SENSe commands whereas the indices of the high level commands select the CALCulate blocks indices 1 to 8 Depending on the configuration of the first CALCulate block FETCh same meaning as FETCh1 zl may not deliver the measured value of sensor 1 in contrast to the above examples After RST the first CALCulate block delivers the measured value of sensor 1 CALC1 MATH SENS1 and the second one the measured value of sensor 2 etc see command SYSTem PRESet 1144 1400 12 Annex 1 11 E 2 Annex Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP Measuring with low level commands Low level commands allow the user to perform the most important modifications on the measurement configuration In the present context low level commands are all commands that do not belong to high level commands These are in particul
260. isplay can be used As usual the functions in the Windows menu are used to switch between the expanded Expand p 4 29 and half height window Arrange p 4 29 AG RS BEE A RUN Tests ik Gates A Start 0 000 ps Max 30 000 dBm d Length 4616ms Min 60 000 dBm d Fig 4 36 Expanded window Fig 4 37 Mode dialogHalf height window in the Scope with control elements in the Scope mode mode Trigger settings To obtain a stable image the trigger parameters must be set in the Trigger and Trigger Adv dialog boxes so that they correspond to the signal Trigger settings and Trigger sequence control p 4 24 Filter settings Like any other result of a power measurement the displayed trace can also be smoothed using the averaging filter For this purpose a number of sweeps are recorded and the corresponding points of each sweep are averaged For configuring the filter Filter averaging p 4 19 To prevent the meas urement result from being corrupted by unstable trigger conditions non correlating points of different Sweeps are averaged a test should first be run in the Realtime mode to determine whether stable trig ger conditions exist Realtime p 4 42 1144 1400 12 4 43 E 2 Displaying data in the Scope mode R amp S NRP Setting parameters All parameters relevant to the trace display can be directly set in the expanded window The parameters are spread across four pag
261. ister contains information as to whether a displayed value is currently above a configured upper limit and the EVENt register indicates whether a limit value was exceeded since the last readout of the Operation Upper Limit Fail Status Register Details of the behaviour are defined by the transition register The limit value can be set with the command CALC LIM UPP DATA float value Command CALC LIM UPP STAT ON configures the PTRansition and NTRansition registers so that the corresponding bit is set in the EVENt register when the displayed value exceeds the upper limit value The Operation Upper Limit Fail Status Register can be read by the commands STATus OPERation ULIMit SUMMary CONDition and STATus OPERation ULIMit SUMMary EVENt Table 6 26 Meaning of bits used in the Operation Upper Limit Fail Status Register Bit No Meaning 0 Not used 1 Window 1 Upper Limit Fail The measured value returned by the first Calculate block exceeds the upper limit value 2 Window 2 Upper Limit Fail The measured value returned by the second Calculate block exceeds the upper limit value 3 Window 3 Upper Limit Fail The measured value returned by the third Calculate block exceeds the upper limit value 4 Window 4 Upper Limit Fail The measured value returned by the fourth Calculate block exceeds the upper limit value 5 Window 5 Upper Limit Fail The measured value returned by the fifth Cal
262. it DBM W DBUV Default unit DBM RST value 20 DBM OUTPut RECorder 1 2 LIMit UPPer RATio float value Specifies the upper power limit of the characteristic for one of the two analog outputs if the associated calculate block returns a power ratio unit DB DPCT or O as the measured value Figure 6 5 Value range 200 DB 200 DB Unit DB DPCT O Default unit DB RST value 10 DB 1144 1400 12 6 46 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands OUTPut RECorder 1 2 STATe ON OFF Switches the analog outputs OUT1 and OUT2 TRIG on rear panel ON or OFF The magnitude of the output voltage 0 V to 3 3 V depends on the measured power of the assigned calculate block OUTP REC FEED and the configuration of the characteristic OUTP REC LIM As in manual operation this setting is coupled to other operating modes of the outputs Only one mode can be active at any one time Analog output TTL output e OUTP REC OUTP TTL Zi Tigger in OUT OUT2 TRIG RST value output 1 ON output 2 OFF OUTPut ROSCillator STATe ON OFF The command switches the optional RF generator ON or OFF RST value OFF OUTPut ROSCillator CALibration READ lt NR1 gt Reads the setting of one of the internal electronic potentiometers of the test generator option R amp S NRP B1 The number of the potentiometer 1 to 4 is indicated with the parameter lt NR1 gt The response is
263. it monitoring Measurement Limits An upper and a lower limit for each window can be set in the Limits dialog box If either limit is vio lated a warning is issued The warning may be one of the following e The message is displayed on the screen e A warning tone is output e A signal is issued on analog output OUT1 Setting the analog outputs on page 4 58 Measurement menu Limits Limits S D gt 10 000 d m Upper O d 30 000 dBm Lower Warning Beep KI Fig 4 34 Limits dialog box Upper C_ Turns monitoring of the upper limit on off d Remote Control CALCulate 1 8 LIMit UPPer STATe ON OFF L Upper C Upper limit d Remote Control CALCulate 1 8 LIMit UPPer DATA float value Lower C Turns monitoring of the lower limit on off d Remote Control CALCulate 1 8 LIMit LOWer STATe ON OFF Lower C Lower limit d Remote Control CALCulate 1 8 LIMit LOWer DATA float value Warning Beep C For activating the acoustic alarm dod Remote Control CALCulate 1 8 LIMit BEEP ON OFF 1144 1400 12 4 40 E 2 R amp S NRP Displaying data in the Scope mode Displaying data in the Scope mode Mode Scope Envelope power versus time can be graphically displayed in the Scope mode allowing timeslot and gate structures to be blended into the signal characteristic and configured The average and peak power values measured within a gate and the Peak Avg ratio can be num
264. ithmic units 1 2 3 and 4 correspond to a resolution of 1 0 1 0 01 and 0 001 number of decimal places With a lt resolution gt of 3 two decimal places are thus noise free with logarithmic display The default setting is 3 The third parameter selects a sensor It has the syntax n where n can assume the values 1 to 4 The default setting is 81 1144 1400 12 Annex I 1 E 2 Annex Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP Relative measurements If the measurement results are to be output not as absolute values but relative to a reference value the keyword RELative can be added to the measurement command The result is then divided by a ly set by means of CALC REL POW Or CALC REL value that was previous EAS ALC REL AUTO O EAS REL EO NCE AUTO ONCE The first MEAS command determines the reference value which is acquired and stored with CALC REL AUTO ONC E he second measurement command M EAS R commands will divide the absolute measured value by the stored reference value CALC REL POW float value is used to define such a reference value CALC REL POW 0 MEAS REL DBM All measured values are then divided by 0 dBm 1 mW prior to being transferred to the user EL and all other ME AS R EL The following section describes an extension of the MEAS command in which the
265. l control INIT CONT ON Continuous measurements are performed If a measurement is completed the respective sensors do not return to the IDLE state but are immediately set to INITIATED and then to WAIT_FOR_TRG INIT CONT OFF A measurement cycle is only performed once After completion the sensors remain in the IDLE state INIT CONT OFF has no effect when the sensor is already in the IDLE state A measurement in progress is completed RST Wert and SYST PRES ON RST OFF 1144 1400 12 6 103 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP INITiate 1 4 ALL DISable ON OFF This command prevents the execution of the INIT IMM command for one or more sensors It can thus suppress the start of a measurement for specific sensors if the INIT ALL IMM command is used RST value OFF INITiate 1 4 ALL IMMediate This command starts a single shot measurement The respective sensor goes to the INITIATED state The command is completely executed when the sensor returns to the IDLE state The command is ignored when the sensor is not in the IDLE state or when continuous measurements are selected INIT CONT ON The command is only fully executed when the measurement is completed and the trigger system has again reached the IDLE state Besides CAL zERO AUTO INIT is the only remote control command that permits overlapping execution Other commands can be received and processed while the command is being executed e Note INIT Imm i
266. l or external triggering Some of the sections later on in this Chapter assume familiarity with the basic operating techniques which are introduced in the first two sections It is therefore advisable to go through the first two sec tions before considering other topics Requirements e Read the notes on putting the meter into operation in Chapter 1 e A single channel R amp S NRP is sufficient for most of the examples used in the sequel However if you want to work through all the steps in the section e Setting measurement functions p 2 16 you will need a dual channel instrument e An R amp S NRP Z1x or R amp S NRP Z2x sensor is required for the section Measuring av burst power Burst Av mode p 2 21 all other sections can be worked through with the Thermal Sensors R amp S NRP Z5x e A signal source is required for the measurements that are described It is best to use a signal gen erator whose level can be adjusted If a generator of this type is not available the R amp S NRP s inte gral power reference option R amp S NRP B1 can be used instead 1144 1400 12 2 1 E 2 Measuring average power Cont Av mode R amp S NRP Measuring average power Cont Av mode Set the R amp S NRP to the PRESET state The instrument is set to a well defined initial state to prevent any previous settings from causing incor rect results d Setup Recall Save Standard Recall Error List Window Name
267. layed in the window The entries are therefore viewed through a window which automatically moves if the cursor keys take the cursor outside the section that can be seen The position of the currently active field is shown by the scroll bar e Edit mode When you press the Edit rocker switch the value in the selected field can be edited In this mode the cursor keys cannot be used for selection but can be used normally to edit values in the entry field Offset dialog box Table 1 Edit Table A NM gt Frequency Offset Edit d 1 10 GHz Insert 1 20 GHz 1 30 GHz Delete 1 40 GHz 1 50GHz 12 30 dB Sort 1 60GHz 12 70 dB 1 70GHz 13 55 dB Name Fig 4 16 Offset dialog box Table editor A G5 QD In the selection mode the cursor keys are used to select the field you want to edit Edit C For selecting the edit mode for the marked field dd The entry can be confirmed with the key or aborted with the key Afterwards the table editor is again in the selection mode Insert C Inserts a new line containing the values of the selected line The values d d from the line in the selected field are also copied into the new fields The maximum table length is 80 lines Delete e Deletes the marked line d d Sort C Sorts the lines in the table so that the frequencies in the lines are in d d ascending order Name C For renaming the selected table to make it easier to identify The char d d acter editor is desc
268. le the device was waiting for measurement results 42 Failed to initialize sensor A sensor could not be initialized 43 Error in receiving calibration data from sensor An error occurred in receiving calibration data from the sensor command CALibration 1 4 DATA 44 Error in sending calibration data to sensor An error occurred in sending calibration data to the sensor command CALibration 1 4 DATA block data 45 Command not supported by sensor Attempt was made to send a command to a sensor that does not support this command This may depend on the current sensor status The sensors can inform the R amp S NRP at any point which commands they support or do not support This mainly concerns commands of the Sense and Trigger systems 46 Sensor failure no command receipt A sensor did not acknowledge any command 47 Error in receiving battery data An error occurred in receiving battery data command SYSTem BATTery STATus 48 Error in sending battery data An error occurred in sending battery data command SYSTem BATTery MODE block data 50 Fatal sensor error A sensor signalled a serious error If the problem persists please contact the R amp S servicing center 51 Overload A sensor signalled that the signal applied has exceeded the permissible maximum power CAUTION Sensor overload can destroy the electronic measurement system 52 Overrange This error is sig
269. lution NSR Selects a method for the Scope mode by which the automatic filter length switchover can operate SENS 1 4 AVER COUN AUTO TYPE Setting taken into account RESolution ENS 1 4 AVER COUN AU ENS 1 4 AVER COUN AUI ENS 1 4 AVER COUN AUI NSR RST value depending on sensor SENSe 1 4 TRACe AVERage TCONtrol MOVing REPeat As soon as a new single value is determined the filter window is advanced by one value so that the new value is taken into account by the filter and the oldest value is forgotten SENSe 1 4 AVERage TCONt rol terminal control then determines in the Scope mode whether a new result will be calculated immediately after a new measured value is available MOVi ng or only after an entire range of new values is available for the filter REPeat RST Wert PRES and SYST PRES MOV RST REP SENSe 1 4 TRACe OFFSet TIME float value This command determines the relative position of the trigger event in relation to the beginning of the Scope measurement sequence Unit s Value range depending on sensor RST value depending on sensor SENSe 1 4 TRACe POINts lt int_value gt Sets the number of desired values per Scope sequence Unit Value range depending on sensor RST value depending on sensor Error m essages 28 Sensor not idle The sensor is not in the IDLE state 1144 1400 12 6 63 E 3 Remot
270. mit Fail Status Register STAT OPER ULF 1144 1400 12 Fig 6 12 Operation Status Register 6 74 R amp S NRP Operation Status Register to bit 7 of status byte register STB E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands Questionable Status Register to bit 3 of status byte register STB Fig 6 13 Questionable Status Register Description of Status Registers In the following sections the SCPI status registers shown in Fig 6 11 to Fig 6 13 are described in detail Status Byte STB Service Request Enable Register SRE Device Status Register Questionable Status Register Standard Event Status Register ESR with ENABle register ESE Operation Status Register Operation Calibrating Status Register Operation Measuring Status Register Operation Trigger Status Register Operation Sense Status Register Operation Lower Limit Fail Status Register Operation Upper Limit Fail Status Register Questionable Power Status Register Questionable Window Status Register Questionable Calibration Status Register 1144 1400 12 6 75 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP Status Byte STB and Service Request Enable Register SRE The STB is already defined in IEEE 488 2 It gives a rough overview of the device status collecting information from the lower level registers It is comparable with the CONDition register of a SCPI defined register and is at the hig
271. mode it is not modified but ignored Triggering in response to the signal is performed as if TRIGger SOURce INTernal Were set These commands have the specified parameters whose meanings are explained in the operating manual In addition parameters DEF resolution source list can be optionally specified as for the MEAS command Examples MEAS TSLot 577 us 8 18 us 18 us A timeslot measurement of a GSM signal is performed 8 timeslots with a length of 577 us each 18 us at the beginning and the end of the timeslots are ignored The measurement is carried out with sensor 1 default The instrument is triggered by an external signal which must be routed to the R amp S NRP rear panel via the trigger input The measurement result is a list of 8 measured values separated by a comma for the timeslots MEAS BURSt 5 us 10 us 0 us DEF 3 82 Sensor 2 measures in the BurstAv mode Triggering in response to a rising edge is internal At the beginning of the power pulse 10 us are ignored to avoid overshoots in the signal which could distort the measurement result If the power falls below the trigger level but does not exceed 5 us dropout time the measurement will not be stopped The measurement result is noise free within the first 3 places and it is measured with sensor 2 82 MEAS XTIMe 256 577 us Within the next 577 us 256 measured values are recorded and displayed with respect to time in te same man
272. more than 10 dB If you want to turn off the Auto range function e g to test the drive range of a path you can define one of the three paths as the measurement range with Path Thermal sensors R amp S NRP Z5x have only one measurement range over the whole dynamic range No facilities for switching between measurement ranges are therefore provided Sensor menu Range C 2 d User def d Crossover Level OdB Fig 4 19 Range dialog box A B C D C Tabs for selecting the sensor dod Auto C For turning the Auto range function on off dd Remote Control SENSe 1 4 POWer AVG RANGe AUTO ON OFF Path C_ For selecting a measurement path when the Auto range function is off 1 ds d d Remote Control SENSe 1 4 POWer AVG RANGe gd GN User def d C 9 Activates a decrease in the crossover range Crossover d d 1144 1400 12 4 22 E 2 R amp S NRP Data acquisition and parameters Sensor menu Level C dB value by which the crossover level is reduced d d Editing field with direct entry of values see Chapter 3 Dialog boxes and their controls Remote Control SENSe 1 4 1POWer AVG RANGe AUTO CLEVel float value Effect of the RF source Sensor RF Source In this dialog box you can enter information relating to the reflection coefficients 7 of the signal source If Source r considered for Enhanced Accuracy is activated measurement accuracy can be increased by correcting for
273. mote dialog box Selects the installed remote control interfaces or turns them off Remote GPIB Remote Interface o Ki gt gt Off GPIB Ethernet 68 GPIB Address Fig 4 51 Remote dialog box GPIB A GPIB address in the range 0 to 30 can be selected RemoteControl SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess NR1 4 55 E 2 System settings System menu R amp S NRP Remote control via USB Remote USB Remote dialog box Remote Interfac x o o e o GPIB C gt Off GPIB USB vi ded VISA ressource identifier USBZOxOAAD zOxO001Bz 00000BZINSTR Fig 4 52 Remote Dialog GPIB Remote control of the R amp S NRP via the USB is according to the USBTMC standard For this purpose a VISA library that supports remote control via the USB is required by the remote control computer The VISA library is equipped with the necessary USB device driver The R amp S NRP has a fixed unchange able address comprising a manufacturer number OxOAAD for Rohde amp Schwarz an instrument num ber 2 for the R amp S NRP and the serial number of the R amp S NRP The serial number can be displayed in the System Info dialog box Information about the R amp S NRP page 4 63 and must be completely as displayed included in the address The VISA address string suitable for the device is displayed in the dialog box Configuring the Ethernet Remote VXI 11 Remote control of the R amp S NRP via Ethernet is according to the VXI 11 standard
274. mp S NRP channel PC and the secondary channel SC One parameter functions source list n n 1 2 3 4 RELative PC Yields the measured average power of the sensor assigned to the PC PC reference value The value measured in the PC is divided by the reference value determined with the aid of one of the following commands CALCulate 1 8 RELative MAGNitude CALCulate 1 8 RELative AUTO Two parameter functions source list n m n 1 2 3 4 m 1 2 3 4 DIFFerence DIFFerence RELative SUM SUM RELative RATio RATio RELative 1144 1400 12 PC SC Yields the difference between the PC and SC This means that two sensors must be specified in source list This also applies to the following functions PC SC reference value The difference between the PC and SC is divided by the reference value determined with the aid of one of the following commands CALCulate 1 8 RELative MAGNitude CALCulate 1 8 RELative AUTO PC SC Yields the sum of the PC and SC The lt source_list gt must therefore contain two sensors This also applies to the following functions PC SC reference value The sum of the PC and SC is divided by the reference value determined with the aid of one of the following commands CALCulate 1 8 RELative MAGNitude Or CALCulate 1 8 RELative AUTO PC SC Yields the ratio of PC to SC PC S
275. multaneously They communicate with each other by means of messages Data set e IEC IEEE FORES Input unit Device hardware Output unit us Command 77 identification arser ee gt Input unit p P Output unit eterna Status reporting system Fig 5 2 Device model for remote control Input Unit The input unit receives the commands in the form of characters from the remote control interface and collects them in the input buffer The input unit sends a message to the command identification as soon as the input buffer is full or as soon as it receives a delimiter The received data is processed in the parser command identification Command Identification Parser The parser analyzes the data received from the input unit Data is processed in the sequence in which it was received Syntax errors in the command are recognized and passed on to the status reporting system Following the syntax test the value range of the data is verified and the setting is adapted Only after the command has been completely executed will the next command be processed Data Base and Device Hardware The term device hardware refers to that part of the device which performs the measurement function The data base contains all parameters required for setting the device hardware Setting commands cause a modification of the data set Before the data is entered in the data set it is verified for compatibility both with the other
276. n Kauf eines Rohde amp Schwarz Produktes entschieden Hiermit erhalten Sie ein nach modernsten Ferti gungsmethoden hergestelltes Produkt Es wurde nach den Regeln unseres Qualit ts managementsystems entwickelt gefer tigt und gepr ft Das Rohde amp Schwarz Qualit tsmanagementsystem ist u a nach IS0 9001 und ISO 14001 zertifiziert Certificate of quality Dear Customer You have decided to buy a Rohde amp Schwarz product You are thus assured of receiving a product that is manufactured using the most modern methods available This product was developed manufac tured and tested in compliance with our quality management system standards The Rohde amp Schwarz quality manage ment system is certified according to stan dards such as 1509001 and ISO 14001 Certificat de qualit Cher client Vous avez choisi d acheter un produit Rohde amp Schwarz Vous disposez donc d un produit fabriqu d apr s les m tho des les plus avanc es Le d veloppement la fabrication et les tests respectent nos normes de gestion qualit Le syst me de gestion qualit de Rohde amp Schwarz a t homologu entre autres conform ment aux normes ISO 9001 et ISO 14001 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ ROHDE amp SCHWARZ EC Certificate of Conformity Certificate No 2002 36 This is to certify that Equipment type Stock No Designation NRP 1143 8500 02 Power Meter NRP B1 1146 9008 02 Sensor Check Source NRP B2 1146 8801 02 Second
277. nalled if a sensor detects that one of its measurement channels is overranged The result is then probably incorrect This error can occur if the automatic range function is deactivated SENSe RANGe AUTO OFF and the manually selected measurement channel is not suitable or the cross over level SENSe RANGe AUTO CLEVe1 was incorrectly selected 53 Truncated measurement In the BurstAv mode the samples for the power are stored in an internal buffer until the end of the power pulse is detected If the buffer overflows the measurement is terminated and error 53 Truncated measurement is generated 1144 1400 12 9 6 E 2 R amp S NRP SCPI Error Messages Error code Error text returned upon queue query Explanations 54 Sample error Samples were lost while sampling the signal applied The measured value can thus be incorrect 55 Sensor hardware error A sensor signalled an error in the sensor hardware If the problem persists please contact the R amp S servicing center 56 Filter truncated With the automatic filter function activated a sensor tries to set the filter length such that the required accuracy is obtained If the measurement time required for this exceeds the value set with SENSe AVERage COUNt AUTO MTIMe max time the filter length is shortened such that a measurement does not last more than the max time and error message 56 Filter truncated is generated 57 Standard setting
278. name rz Assigning names to windows p 4 52 The name can therefore be changed and deleted as desired but above all it is not automatically deleted when one of the preset parameters is changed and the instrument setting no longer corresponds to the loaded standard A table of sensor parameter values for the different standards can be found at the end of Chapter 6 under Standard configurations 1144 1400 12 4 50 E 2 R amp S NRP File menu Standard Recall Standard Preserve Window Settings External Trigger 1144 1400 12 Q E CR eo eo C Management of settings File menu Recall Standard GSM EDGE D Preserve Window Settings L External Trigger Recall Fig 4 45 Recall Setup dialog box Selects a mobile radio standard If enabled only the sensor parameters are loaded but the windows are not reconfigured Remote Control SYSTem STANdard PWSettings ON OFF Selects between configurations with an internal or an external trigger External triggering should be selected if the test signal yields no clearly defined or only an unstable trigger event If external triggering is used in the timeslot mode ensure that the trig ger delay setting is such that the start of the first timeslot coincides with the delayed trigger e Trigger settings p 4 24 Remote Control SYSTem STANdard TRIGger SOURce INT EXT Remote Control SYSTem STANdard PREset lt string gt 4 51 E
279. ndow Window 1 to indicate that a limit value has been exceeded Remote Control Analog OUTPut TTL 1 STATe OFF OUTPut RECorder 1 2 STATe ON Pass Fail OUTPut RECorder 1 2 STATe OFF OUTPut TTL 1 STATe ON Specifies the window the output pertains to Remote Control OUTPut RECorder 1 2 FEED string OUTPut TTL 1 FEED string Display value which corresponds to an output voltage of 0 V Remote Control OUTPut RECorder 1 2 LIMit LOWer float value Display value which corresponds to an output voltage of 3 V Remote Control OUTPut RECorder 1 2 LIMit UPPer float value Logic level within the limits that have been set The valid range is 0 V to 3 3 V Remote Control OUTPut TTL 1 HVOLtage float value Logic level when there is a limit violation The valid range is 0 V to 3 3 V Remote Control OUTPut TTL 1 LVOLtage float value 4 58 E 2 R amp S NRP System settings System menu Analog Out Selects the function of port I O 2 Trigger In C In the case of Analog Out a voltage is output to I O 2 that is proportional d to the value currently displayed in the selected window Window 1 In the case of Trigger In I O 2 serves as an external trigger input Remote Control Analog OUTPut TTL 1 STATe ON Trigger In OUTPut TTL 1 STATe OFF Background information The voltage at the analog outputs does not follow the power fed to the sensor continuously but
280. ndow and signal being in sync Free running average power page 4 8 The Burst mode is for measuring the average burst power of pulsed signals Measuring the average burst power page 4 11 In the Timeslot and Timegate modes the average power can be measured over defined time intervals of a periodic signal The Timeslot mode should be used peferably for TDMA signals with 1144 1400 12 4 7 E 2 Data acquisition and parameters Sensor menu R amp S NRP multiple timeslots Measuring the power of TDMA signals p 4 13 The Timegate mode provides four user configurable gates for meas urement Measuring power in gates p 4 14 In the Scope mode the R amp S NRP records the power versus time and displays it graphically The time parameters of the Timeslot and Timegate modes can also be interactively configured in this mode 7 Analyzing the envelope power p 4 15 Remote Control SENSe 1 4 FUNCtion ON string Free running average power measurements Mode Cont Av The Continuous Average mode is the preferred measurement method if the measurement is not to be or cannot be synchronized with a specific signal event This is the only available measurement mode for thermal sensors because they are too slow for the other measurement modes Mode dialog box Cont Av Burst gt dod Sampling Window C_ d 1144 1400 12 o ContAv Burst T slot T gate Scope Window Rate 2000
281. nds Responses are messages sent by the device to the controller after a query This may be measurement results for instance or device status information 1144 1400 12 5 5 E 3 Remote Control Fundamentals R amp S NRP Structure and Syntax of Device Dependent Messages SCPI Standard SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments describes a standardized command set for the programming of instruments regardless of the type of instrument or manufacturer The objective of the SCPI Consortium is to standardize device specific commands as far as possible For this purpose a device model has been developed which defines identical functions within a device or between different devices Command systems have been created and assigned to these functions so that it is possible to address identical functions with the same commands The command systems have an hierarchical structure Fig 5 1 shows this tree structure using details from the SENSe command system which selects the measurement to be performed by the device Most of the other examples of command syntax and structure are taken from this command system SCPI is based on the IEEE 488 2 standard i e it uses the same syntax elements and the common commands defined in IEEE 488 2 The syntax of the responses is subjected to somewhat stricter rules than those specified by the IEEE 488 2 standard section Responses to Queries page 5 10 Command Structure Commands consist of a
282. ned upon queue query Explanations 1 Device dependent error This error message is sent when the device cannot detect a more specific error 2 IEEE 1174 error unknown emulation code An invalid IEEE 1174 emulation mode was selected for the Ethernet link 22 IEEE1174 mode 488 1 not allowed Setting the IEEE 1174 1 mode is not permissible 24 Sensor mode not supported An attempt was made to set the sensor to a measurement mode which is not supported 25 Not supported A command is not supported by the sensor 26 State not supported Attempt was made to set an invalid value The permissible values for sensor dependent commands can be declared as impermissible by a sensor depending on the context 27 Sensor not present A command could not be executed because the required sensor is not connected 1144 1400 12 9 5 E 2 SCPI Error Messages R amp S NRP Error code Error text returned upon queue query Explanations 28 Sensor not idle A command could not be executed because the respective sensor was not in the IDLE state at that time 29 Measurement aborted while waiting for data A measurement was aborted while the device was waiting for measurement results 30 No extremes available in this mode Extreme values minimum maximum und peak to peak values are not calculated in the set measurement mode 39 Sensor removed while waiting for result A sensor was disconnected whi
283. ner as with an oscilloscope in order to display the power characteristics There is no triggering TRIG SOUR IMM the measurements are started after the command is received from the R amp S NRP After a partial measurement has been completed the next one is started If the trigger source setting is to be changed MEAS XTIMe must be replaced by the CONF XTIMe and READ XTIMe commands between which user defined settings can be performed Dividing MEAS into the CONF and READ commands is described further down The measurement result is a list of 256 measured values separated by a comma 1144 1400 12 Annex LA E 2 R amp S NRP Annex Remote Control Commands MEAS ARRay 1000 1000 measured values are recorded in the ContAv mode After termination of the last measurement the results are stored in the output queue There is no triggering as in the ContAv mode The measurement result is a list of 1000 measured values separated by a comma The keywords for processing two sensors can be added to the MEAS TSL MEAS BURS and MEAS ARRay commands but the SWR RLOS and REFL functions are not available Example MEAS TSL RAT 577 us 8 18 us 18 us DEF 3 G1 83 The above timeslot example is extended to two sensors The measurement result is a list of 8 measured values separated by a comma for the 8 timeslots these values were obtained by division from the measured values of sensors 1 and 3
284. ng correction tables and device states as well as the memory already used 1144 1400 12 6 40 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands MEMory FREE STATe Returns the number of bytes available in memory for storing device states as well as the memory already used for device states MEMory FREE TABLe Returns the number of bytes available in memory for storing device states as well as the memory already used for device states MEMory NSTates Returns the number of storable device states Since 20 device states can be stored 20 is always returned MEMory STATe CATalog Returns a list of names of stored device states in the format lt string gt lt string gt MEMory STATe DEFine MAP lt string gt 1 19 MEMory STATe DEFine MAP lt string gt The value 0 to 19 are assigned to the memory locations of the device states where the memory location with the number 0 is the factory set state and cannot be changed Names lt string gt can be assigned to these numbers with MEM STAT DEF except for the factory set state The command MEM CLE NAME expects parameters that are actually strings rather than the numbers of the memory locations The default names of these memory locations are Setup 0 to Setup 19 The name may contain the characters A to Z atoz 0to9and _ The query of this command returns the number of the memory location with the name of lt string gt MEMory TABLe FREQuency lt NRf gt
285. nge as defined by the device 223 Too much data A valid parameter is received but it contains more data than the device can handle 224 Illegal parameter value The parameter value is invalid 1144 1400 1 2 9 3 E 2 SCPI Error Messages R amp S NRP Error code Error text returned upon queue query Explanations 225 Out of memory The device has insufficient memory to perform the required operation 226 Lists not same length A list of offset values and frequencies has not the same length as an associated list of frequency and offset values 230 Data corrupt or stale The data are incomplete or invalid 240 Hardware error The command cannot be executed because of a hardware problem in the device 241 Hardware missing The command cannot be executed because of missing device hardware Device Specific Errors Device specific error causes bit 5 to be set in the ESR register Error code Error text returned upon queue query Explanations 300 Device specific error Generic device dependent error that cannot be defined more precisely 310 System error Indicates that some system error has occurred Please contact the R amp S service center 311 Memory error An error was detected in the device s memory 314 Save recall memory lost Indicates that the nonvolatile data saved by the SAV command has been lost 315 Configuration memory lost Indicates that nonvol
286. ngth d When measurements are made on TDMA signals GSM EDGE PDC NADC PMS etc the nominal timeslot length must be entered here i e the frame length divided by the number of timeslots GSM example Frame length 4 615 ms No timeslots 8 Nominal width 4 615 8 ms 576 875 uS Remote Control SENSe 1 4 1 OWer TSLot WIDTh float value Excluded from End C__ These intervals at the start end of the timeslot whose length is defined with Nominal Width are excluded from the measurement Measurement from Start C can thus be restricted to the relevant part of a timeslot d Remote Control SENSe 1 4 TIMing EXCLude STARt float value SENSe 1 4 TIMing EXCLude STOP float value v Tip For the most common mobile radio standards the specified parame ters can easily be loaded via the Recall Standard dialog box in the File menu They can also be set interactively in the Scope mode 7 T slots p 4 45 1144 1400 12 4 13 Gs Data acquisition and parameters Sensor menu R amp S NRP Background information Timing diagram The timing diagram below shows the relation between the following parameters e Trigger event trigger delay and start of the first timeslot e Width exclude intervals and measurement interval of the timeslots Trigger event internal Power A Trigger threshold internal Measurement interval 1 AE gt 2E ie Bai E re 1 js d i Nb Time
287. ning messages are cleared Y Tip To set the maximum or minimum value permitted for a parameter first move the insertion mark to the left edge of the entry field by using the key Then press the key several times if necessary to set the maximum per missible value or the key to set the mimimum permis sible value The Filter Range Trigger and Trigger Advanced dialog boxes are designed such that you can read the values even when the dialog box is open If you edit a value in a dialog box using the cursor keys Ch the new value is accepted immediately when you press a key This feature allows you to quickly assess the effect of editing and to perform interactive adjustment If you enter a new value with the letter panel see below however the symbol appears above the editing field to indicate that the new value is not accepted until you confirm it with the key 3 9 E 2 Dialog boxes and their controls Digit and letter panels 1144 1400 12 abco ghi2 mnog stug yz8 def1 jkis pars vwxT R amp S NRP Panels which are displayed when an editing field is acti vated see above are used to enter digits letters and units Entering letters with the letter panel is like entering letters on a phone keypad The Caps key is used to select upper case for the next letter Caution To edit the Trigger Delay you must select the unit by means of the cursor keys se
288. nuous ON OFF ON or OFF can be specified as a parameter Parameters in braces may be included in the command once several times or not at all 6 2 E 3 R amp S NRP Types of Parameters lt NR1 gt NRf int value float value boolean string block data non decimal numeric 1144 1400 12 Remote Control Commands Stands for integers with sign Examples e 1 e 33 e 32767 Stands for floating point numbers that can also be written in exponential notation Examples e 1 e 1 0 e 21 2345553e 6 Is an abbreviation for NR1 MINimum MAXimum DEFault Is an abbreviation for NR MINimum MAXimum DEFault Stands for ON OFF 0 1 where ON and 1 are identical in meaning as are OFF and 0 Stands for character strings that have to be within single or double quotes Examples e Harry Potter e Sirius Black Stands for block data section Parameters on page 5 11 Is a non decimal value in one of the following representations e binary e g 4b0111010101001110 or 80111010101001110 e hexadecimal e g h754e or H754E e octal e g q72516 or 4975216 6 3 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP Common Commands to IEEE 488 1 The following messages are interface commands developed for the IEC IEEE bus which can be sent when the ATN line is active gt section IEC IEEE Bus Interface page 6 124 DCL Device CLear All commands an
289. nvalidates all previous measuring results AFETCh command following INIT Will thus always return a new measurement result Error messages 28 Sensor not idle The sensor is not in the IDLE state TRIGger ALL SYNChronize STATe ON OFF Using this command one can assure that measurements with externally triggered sensors start synchronously As the initiation of measurements in the sensors is serialised in the R amp S NRP it is possible that a sensor is triggered before another sensor is initiated if synchronisation is off Sensors to be synchronised are required to have the same TRIG SLOP setting otherwise a SCPI error 221 Settings conflict occurs on TRIG ALL SYNC ON Example synchronised measurement with 2 heads RST TRIG ALL SLOP POS TRIG ALL SOUR EXT TRIG ALL SYNC ON INIT ALL FETCh1 FETCh2 RST Value OFF TRIGger 1 4 ALL ATRigger STATe ON OFF When TRIG ATR is set to ON the WAIT FOR TRG state is automatically exited when no trigger event occurs within a period that corresponds to the reciprocal of the display update rate RST value depending on sensor 1144 1400 12 6 104 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands TRIGger 1 4 ALL COUNt int value Sets the number of measurement cycles to be performed when the measurement is started with INIT Unit 1 Value range depending on sensor RST value depending on sensor TRIGger 1 4 ALL DELay
290. ode Error text returned upon queue query Explanations 100 Command error Command faulty or invalid 101 Invalid character The command contains a character which is invalid for that type 102 Syntax error The command is invalid 103 Invalid separator Command contains an illegal character where a separator is expected 104 Data type error Command contains an invalid data element 108 Parameter not allowed The command contains too many parameters 109 Missing parameter The command contains fewer parameters than required 111 Header separator error The header contains an illegal delimiter 1144 1400 12 9 1 E 2 SCPI Error Messages R amp S NRP Error code Error text returned upon queue query Explanations 112 Program mnemonic too long The header contains more than 12 characters 113 Undefined header The header is not defined for the device 114 Header suffix out of range The header contains an illegal numeric suffix 120 Numeric data error The command contains a faulty numeric parameter 121 Invalid character in number A numeric contains an invalid character 123 Exponent too large The magnitude of the exponent is larger than 32000 124 Too many digits The numeric contains too many digits 127 Invalid numeric data 128 Numeric data not allowed The command contains a numeric data element in a position where
291. ode there are no other parameters in the menu 101 X o 0011 1 0 1 X 0 0011 The many possible settings in this display mode are made directly in i the window which for this purpose has to be expanded Expanding windows Expand p 4 29 Fig 4 26 Windows menu display specific softkeys Setting the resolution Windows Resolution The resolution of the digital measurement result can be set in 4 stages designated as 1 dB 0 1 dB 0 01 dB and 0 001 dB If dB dBm or dBuV is selected as the unit the number of places after the deci mal point is set directly In the linear mode W A96 1 the number of digits after the decimal point de pends on the resolution a digit being added or removed for each resolution stage that is added or re moved The selected resolution also influences the action of the autofilter in the The Normal mode see page 4 19 The greater the selected resolution the longer the averaging filter to reflect the number of digits Windows menu Sets the result resolution you want Resolution dB CC y 10 1 0 01 0 001 dd Remote Control DISPlay WINDow 1 4 RESolution Lk p Owl op O20 0 001 1144 1400 12 4 30 E 2 R amp S NRP Displaying measurement results Windows menu Setting the analog scale Windows Scale The analog scale in the combined digital analog display D A can be set with the Analog Meter softkey Windows menu Analog D gt Aute Once Meter d 40 000 dBm
292. olding menus out or back folds out the active menu The usual PC convention is not followed instead of drop ping down directly below the menu name in the menu bar menus fold out to the right hand edge of the screen This means that the menu items are directly next to the rocker gail Switches used to select them If you press the key again the menu folds back The menu also folds out automatically if another menu is selected Sensor Windows DESE File System 4 MENU Relative C MENU Go Reset RefVal Limits Max Hold Reset 1144 1400 12 3 3 E 2 Screen layout R amp S NRP Menus See p 3 7 Menu handling for more information Mode d Offset Fiiter Range d RF Source d Trigger d Dialog boxes Dialog boxes can be opened from the menus The dialog boxes present a group of related parameters that can be set See Dialog boxes on p 3 8 for more information on handling dialog boxes 0 000 dB Global Table 1 Table Edit Table SParameter Device U 1144 1400 12 3 4 E 2 R amp S NRP Menu layout Sensor Mode d Offset Fiiter Range d RF Source 4 Trigger d Windows Window Dau K Close Expand DT p amp a Graph d Resolution dB 10 1 Po oo Teeesotdi Measurement Window Dau K LJ Func tion dbp Relative Eon Reset RefVal Limits 4 Max Hold Res
293. oldoff Trigger Hysteresis 1144 1400 12 6 133 E 3 Remote Control Commands Sensor parameter Sensor Mode DECT Remote control command in short form R amp S NRP POW XTIM Integration Time APER 10 ms Duty Cycle SCDE 3 7 Duty Cycle Correction DCYC STAT ON Smoothing SMO Dropout Tolerance BURST DTOL Exclude Time Start IM EXCL STAR Exclude Time End IM EXCL STOP Number Of Timeslots TSL COUN 24 Timeslot Width i WIDT 416 667 us Timegate Offset OFFS TIM 1 15 us 2 5 015 ms Timegate Time 1 348 055 ms 2 348 000 ms Scope Offset Time RAC OFFS 200 us Scope Capture Time RAC TIM 10 250 ms Scope Number Of Points RAC POIN 312 Scope Realtime REAL OFF Trigger Delay 0s Trigger Level Trigger Source Trigger Slope Trigger Holdoff Trigger Hysteresis 1144 1400 12 6 134 E 3 R amp S NRP Sensor parameter Sensor Mode WCDMA 3GPP FDD Remote control command in short form Remote Control Commands POW AVG Integration Time 10 ms Duty Cycle Correction DCYC STAT OFF Smoothing SMO OFF Filter AVER COUN AUTO OFF Filter Length
294. ong the window s right and bottom edges 1144 1400 12 4 32 E 2 R amp S NRP Configuring measurements Measurement menu Selecting a measurement function Measurement Function The R amp S NRP can combine measured values from several channels sensors using a mathematical function and display the result in the selected window The necessary settings are made in the Func tion dialog box The first step is to select the measurement function i e the mode of combination for multi channel measurements Possible functions are the power ratio of two channels a matching measurement func tion derived from this or the power in a single measurement channel All or any of the connected sen sors can be selected A primary channel and possibly a secondary channel can be selected for each measurement window The simplest case is a measurement with just one sensor To configure this measurement first of all select Primary X or Secondary X X A B C or D in the Function list and then the channel sensor you want in the Primary Channel or Secondary Channel list Select the function Ratio X Y to measure the power ratio and then the measurement channel assignment For all dual channel measurements the first argument X of the measurement function is the primary measurement channel For the sake of clarity the primary measurement channel is referred to as the Incident Power for matching measure ment functions SWR Rcoeff and Rloss
295. ons Relative measurements Measurement Rel The Rel function is a simple way of obtaining the ratio of a measured value to a constant value e g a measured power Measurement menu Rel C ott Measurement using the measurement function that has been set off On Reset ded Rel C On Relative display mode en On dee dod Remote Control CALCulate 1 8 RELative STATe ON OFF Rel C If the right hand side of the rocker switch is pressed when On is se ott On E ded lected the current measured value is transferred to the active window s reference memory The display then returns to On Fernsteuerung CALCulate 1 8 RELative MAGNitude AUTO ONCE Setting the reference value manually Measurement Ref Val The reference value can also be directly entered or edited using the Ret Val dialog box Measurement menu Ref Val C gt 0 000 dBm Result Ref Fig 4 33 Ref Value dialog box Ref Value C For directly entering a new reference value or for editing an old value dd Remote Control CALCulate 1 8 RELative MAGNitude float value Result gt Ref C The current result is transferred to the reference value memory of the d d active window and displayed This function can also be started from the Measurement menu by using the Reset softkey Remote Control CALCulate 1 8 RELative MAGNitude AUTO ONCE 1144 1400 12 4 39 E 2 Configuring measurements Measurement menu R amp S NRP Lim
296. ontrol the timing SENS TIM EXCL STAR and STOP and the trigger system of all measurement modes except the Burst mode are user selectable Note To increase measurement accuracy the sensors measure each signal e twice in the Burst Timeslot and Scope measurement modes exception in the Scope mode with SENS TRAC REAL ON As long as the trigger system is set to internal or external triggering this is usually of no importance to the user If TRIG SOUR HOLD or BUS is used however then each measurement must be triggered twice with TRG or TRIG IMM RST value depending on sensor Error messages 24 Sensor mode not supported A sensor does not support a measurement mode 28 Sensor not idle The sensor is not in the IDLE state 151 Invalid string data An invalid parameter was transmitted for string 1144 1400 12 6 56 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands SENSe 1 4 POWer AVG APERture float value This command determines the integration time for a single measurement in the ContAv mode To increase the measurement accuracy this integration is followed by a second averaging procedure in a window with a selectable number of values The filter window is configured with the SENSe 1 4 AVERage commands Unit s Value range depending on sensor RST value depending on sensor SENSe 1 4 POWer AVG BUFFer SIZE int value Sets the number of desired values for the
297. ork administrator regarding the data to be set If the network consists only of the R amp S NRP and the control computer the two units can be connected with each other directly using a special network crossover cable The IP addresses are then set manu ally and can for example be selected according to the following table Table 4 1 Example of a network configuration for a direct R amp S NRP PC connection using a crossover cable IP Address 192 168 0 2 192 168 0 1 Mask 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 3 192 168 0 3 1144 1400 12 4 57 E 2 System settings System menu R amp S NRP Setting the analog outputs System IO There are two multifunction BNC connectors at the rear of the R amp S NRP The function of these connec tors is specified in the Analog Out dialog box System menu 10 O ED d Analog Pass Fail d Window 1234 0 V Equivalent 3 V Equivalent Pass Fail 1144 1400 12 d 0 O O i VO j Window X Analog Pass Fail Off ese 0 V Equivalent 3 V Equivalent NE 20 000 dBm 20 000 dBm Window Analog Out Trigger In iS cuc a e anos Fig 4 56 Analog Out dialog box Selects the function of port Out 1 In the case of Analog a voltage is output that is proportional to the value currently displayed in the selected window Window 1 In the case of Pass Fail a logic signal is output in the selected wi
298. ormation in the form of a list of strings separated by commas string value can have the following values No difference is made between upper case and lower case letters string value Meaning Manufacturer Manufacturer of device Type Type R amp S NRP Stock Number Order No of R amp S NRP Serial Serial number HWVersion Hardware version SW Build Firmware version BootloadVer Version of boot loader KeybCtrlVer Version of keyboard controller Options Installed options MACAddr MAC address of the R amp S NRP if Ethernet option has been installed RAMSize RAM size ROMSize ROM size CPUClock Clock frequency of processor CPLDVersion Version of CPLD chip PICVersion Version of PIC Chip SYSTem ERRor This query returns error numbers and text from the error event queue of the R amp S NRP A specific error number with text is entered in the error event queue for each error that occurs in the R amp S NRP The queue functions according to the FIFO principle The message entered first in the queue is also output first when a SYST 1 Up to 30 errors can ERR query is sent Querying clears the message be stored in the error event queue If further errors occur the most recent error is overwritten by the message 350 Queue overflow If the error event queue is empty the mes
299. ower It is available with sensors from the R amp S NRP Z1x and R amp S NRP Z2x series When this mode is selected the sensor itself detects the start and end of the burst no external trigger signal is required The parameter Dropout Tolerance and the trigger parameters Holdoff and Hysteresis are ways of providing stable triggering Using the parameters Exclude from Start and Exclude from End the starts and ends of bursts can be excluded from the measurement This means that signal over shoots can be omitted from measurements for example Mode dialog box Cont Av Burst C ES dod ContAv Burst T slot T gate Scope Dropout 100 000 ps Excluded from Start from End 0 000 us 0 000 us Fig 4 12 Mode dialog box Burst mode Dropout Tolerance amp Prevents brief power drops due to modulation from being misinter d d preted as the end of a burst Remote Control SENSe 1 4 1 OWer BURSt DTOLerance float value Caution A The Dropout Tolerance must be less than the no power interval between the end and start of a burst Excluded from End C_ This time interval at the end of the burst is excluded from the meas d urement Remote Control SENSe 1 4 TIMing EXCLude STOP float value from Start C This time interval at the start of the burst is excluded from the meas d urement Remote Control SENSe 1 4 TIMing EXCLude STARCt float value v Tip For the most common
300. p SCHWARZ Liaison Office c o Haji Abdullah Alireza Co Ltd P 0 Box 361 Riyadh 11411 etcom Siehe see Switzerland ROHDE amp SCHWARZ DANMARK A S Lithuanian Office Lukiskiu 5 228 2600 Vilnius Siehe see Belgium Siehe see Slovenia DAGANG TEKNIK SDN BHD No 9 Jalan SS 4D 2 Selangor Darul Ehsan 47301 Petaling Jaya ITEC International Technology Ltd B Kara Road San Gwann SGN 08 Rohde amp Schwarz de Mexico RSMX S de R L de C V German Centre Oficina 4 2 2 Av Santa F 170 Col Lomas de Santa F 01210 Mexico D F Rohde amp Schwarz de Mexico RSMX Av Prol Americas No 1600 2 Piso Col Country Club Guadalajara Jal exico CP 44610 Siehe see Romania ROHDE amp SCHWARZ NEDERLAND B Perkinsbaan 1 3439 ND Nieuwegein ichecom Lincoln Ave awa Wellington Siehe see Mexico Ferrostaal Abuja Plot 3323 Barada Close P 0 Box 8513 Wuse Off Amazon Street aitama Abuja 4254 2 55 80 88 4254 2 54 46 79 82 2 514 45 46 82 2 514 45 49 sales rskor rohde schwarz com service rskor rohde schwarz com 965 244 91 72 73 74 965 244 95 28 jk_agarwal yahoo com 371 7 50 23 55 371 7 50 23 60 rsdk rsdk rohde schwarz com 966 1 465 64 28 Ext 303 966 1 465 64 28 Ext 229 chris porzky rsd rohde schwarz com 370 5 239 50 10 370 5 239 50 11 60 3 27 03 55 68 60 3 27 03 34 39 mey nara danik com my 356 21 37 43 00 or 37 43 29 35
301. parentheses Example 1 is used for sensor A Example The values 3 2 are set for source list Sensor C is assigned to the primary channel and sensor B to the secondary channel The calculate blocks process the primary channel together with the secondary depending on the desired function If RATio is selected as the calculation function the result from the calculate block is the ratio of the values measured by sensor C and sensor B Value range depending on sensor Default value depending on sensor Unit S Width of a timeslot in the Timeslot mode gt SENSe 1 4 POWer TSLot AVG WIDTh lt float_value gt Value range depending on sensor Default value depending on sensor Unit Number of timeslots to be measured in the Timeslot mode Value range depending on sensor Default value depending on sensor Unit s Amount of time at the beginning and the end of a timeslotor integration period that should not be taken into account gt SENSe 1 4 TIMing EXCLude STARt float value and gt SENSe 1 4 TIMing EXCLude STOP float value 6 19 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP lt dtolerance gt Value range depending on sensor Unit s Default value depending on sensor The length of a time interval in which the power level may drop below the trigger level without the end of a power pulse being detected gt SENSe 1 4 POWer BURSt DT
302. perform a measured value correction taking the complex reflection coefficient source gamma of the signal source into account SENS 1 4 SGAM CORR STAT ON must be set The phase angle of the reflection coefficient is set with SENS 1 4 SGAM PHAS Unit Degree is assumed as unit Value range depending on sensor RST value depending on sensor SENSe 1 4 SGAMma CORRection STATe ON OFF Switches the measured value correction of the reflection coefficient effect of the source gamma ON or OFF RST value depending on sensor 1144 1400 12 6 60 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands SENSe 1 4 TRACe AVERage STATe ON OFF For the Scope mode this command switches the filter function of a sensor on or off When the filter is switched on the number of measured values set with SENSe 1 4 AVERage COUNt is averaged This reduces the effect of noise so that more reliable results are obtained RST value depending on sensor SENSe 1 4 TRACe AVERage COUNt int value This command sets the length of the filter for the Scope mode The wider the filter the lower the noise and the longer it takes to obtain a measured value int value can only be 1 2 4 8 16 2 If int value is not a power of two the value is rounded to the next 2 value without an error message v Note The SENS TRAC AVER COUN command switches the automatic filter length switchover off SENS TRAC
303. put unit of the measured values 1144 1400 12 6 9 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP SENSe System zl FUNCtion Scope Sea k L ContAv i gt Sege E r Teo PYS Burstav gt AVERage k BUFFer y BAG Timeslot Measured values to CALCulate blocks Fig 6 2 SENSe system This command system is used for configuring the sensors and determines the processing of measured data in the sensors The blocks have the following functions RANGe Shifts the range boundaries to increase the measurement accuracy CALibration Is a command system of its own and responsible for sensor calibration CORRection Corrects measured values in three steps fixed offset value frequency dependent FREQuency Offset value and duty cycle APERture Determines the timeslot in which power values are averaged TIMing FUNCtion Determines a measurement mode AVERage Filters the measured values BUFFer Stores the measured values temporarily to optimize the speed of data transmission to the remote controller CALCulate System SENSe1 SENSe2 SENSe3 SENSe4 MATH EXPRession SENSn SENSn SENSm SENSn SENSm SENSn SENSm SWR SENSn SENSm REFL SENSn SENSm RLOS SENSn SENSm Data output UNIT gt DATA MINimum DATA MAXimum DATA PTPeak DATA RELative SENSe1 SENSe2 SENSe3 SENSe4 Fig 6 3 Command system CALCulate
304. quarter height Analog window quarter height ee eee SR REN You can expand all opened windows to full height by activating the Expand function from the Windows menu In this state the full height windows can be displayed consecutively using the Window 1 B3 4 menu item The opened windows can be reduced to their previous sizes with the Arrange menu item Otherwise it is not possible to change the size of the windows the window size is determined by the number of windows 1144 1400 12 3 11 E Display windows Special symbols The following table defines the individual symbols Window symbols Window 1 Window number Window name Close box operated with the key Measurement function AIR Rel Measurement function Relative measurement mode ON Correction functions Iw A Filter 4 Auto 64 Man 0 1000 dB S N S N Other Ze Limit Fail 1144 1400 12 Duty cycle correction ON Offset correction ON Twoport correction ON S parameter device Averaging filter Filter size with auto filter normal mode or for manual mode Noise component with auto filter in Fixed Noise mode Noise ratio exceeded Battery level indicator Battery charging Over limit Display values A 1 000 GHz B 1 000 GHz 14314dB R amp S NRP Frequency in the primary and sec ondary channel Auxiliary value here max min Auxiliary value symbol T 4 SO Max Mim
305. r is in the WAIT FOR TRG state i e waiting for a trigger event 6 Not used 7to9 Not used 10 Operation Sense Status Register summary bit This bit is set if a sensor is initialized 11 Operation Lower Limit Fail Status Register This bit is set if a displayed value has dropped below a lower limit value 12 Operation Upper Limit Fail Status Register This bit is set if a displayed value has exceeded an upper limit value 13to Not used 14 15 Bit 15 will never be used 1144 1400 12 6 80 E 3 R amp S NRP Operation Calibrating Status Register Remote Control Commands The CONDition register contains information as to whether a sensor is currently being calibrated and depending on the configuration of the transition register the EVENt register indicates whether a calibration was started or completed since the last readout of this register The Operation Calibration Status Register can be read by the following commands STATus OPERation CALibrating SUMMary CONDition STATus OPERation CALibrating SUMMary EV ENt Table 6 21 Meaning of bits used in the Operation Calibrating Status Register i Meaning 0 Not used 1 Sensor A is being calibrated 2 Sensor B is being calibrated 3 Sensor C is being calibrated 4 Sensor D is being calibrated 5to Not used 14 15 Bit 15 will never be used 1144 1400 12 6 81 E 3 Remote Control Commands
306. r must be measured in the primary channel and the re verse power in the secondary channel Remote Control CALCulate 1 8 MATH EXPRession string Selects the primary channel which is to be used to calculate the dis played value If the selected channel is operating in the Scope mode its power is automatically shown as a function of time Scope X function Ex cept for the graphical display it is the same as the Primary X func tion It is not possible to select another measurement function Selects the secondary channel which is to be used for the calculation 4 34 E 2 R amp S NRP Configuring measurements Measurement menu Expanded configuration for sensors in the Scope mode The measurement results of sensors operated in the Scope mode can be further processed and dis played in two ways a by a power time diagram measurement window in the Graph display mode Selecting the result display mode p 4 29 b in the form of gated measurement results measurement window in the Dig or D amp A display Whereas the Graph mode allows only an absolute display of the measured values gated measurement results can also be further processed like other measurement results as absolute values relative to a fixed reference value or another measurement channel For this purpose the Func amp Unit dialog box provides expanded configuration possibilities including the number of the gate and the type of meas urand Avg Peak
307. r part of the dialog box Under Nominal Width set the nominal value of the timeslot width Under Excluded from Start and Excluded from End define the portions to be excluded from the measurement Use No of Timeslots to set the number of timeslots in a TDMA frame v Tip Excluded from Start and Excluded from End can also be set interactively in the Scope display on the T slots page For a detailed description see Chapter 4 Measuring the power of TDMA signals 2 22 E 2 R amp S NRP Measuring average power in defined time interval O Settings to ensure reliable triggering gt Close the Mode dialog box Trigger T3 gt Open the Trigger dialog box The Timeslot mode provides not only the Source and Level parameters described in the section Settings for reli able triggering but also the Delay parameter which is used when the start of timeslot 1 Frame Start does not coin cide with to the trigger time Source gt Delay Level Define the start of timeslot 1 with reference to the triggering edge The value can be positive or nega tive Next Y Tip The Scope display shows physical and delayed trig ger times in the form of a triangle so that Delay can be interactively adjusted to the signal Simultaneous measurement in multiple timeslots Sensor KSE Measurement File System _ C Window l234 d e d gt Change to the Windows menu Close Expand gt Use t
308. rabad Office 302 amp 303 Millenium Centre 099 1100 Somajiguda Hyderabad 500 016 DE amp SCHWARZ India Pvt Ltd Okhla Industrial Estate Phase II 0020 DE amp SCHWARZ India Pvt Ltd RS India Mumbai Office B 603 Remi Bizcourt Shah Industrial Estate Off Veera Desai Road umbai 400 058 OHDE amp SCHWARZ Indonesia Graha Paramita 5th Floor Jin Jakarta 12940 ROH Groundfloor Khal 1511 Denpasar Raya Blok D 2 DE amp SCHWARZ IRAN o 1 14th Street ed Eslamboli Vozara Ave 7 Tehran siehe see United Kingdom EASTRONICS LTD Mes 11R stechnik T amp M Equipment ozanis St P 0 Box 39300 Tel Aviv 61392 J M Kommunikationstechnik Communications Equi 90d Moss Engineering Ltd pment ed Street P 0 Box 967 52109 Ramat Gan ROH Cen DE amp SCHWARZ ITALIA S p a ro Direzionale Lombardo Via Roma 108 20060 Cassina de Pecchi MI ROH Via DE amp SCHWARZ ITALIA S p a iburtina 1182 00156 Roma ADVANTEST Corporation RS Sales Department 1 32 1 Asahi cho Nerima ku Tokyo 179 0071 Jordan Crown Engineering amp Trading Co Jabal Amman Second Circle Youssef Ezzideen Street P 0 Box 830414 Amman 11183 ROH DE amp SCHWARZ Kazakhstan Representative Office Almaty PI R espubliki 15 480013 Almaty DE amp SCHWARZ India Pvt Ltd Bangalore Office 0 24 Service Road Domlur 91 80 535 23 62 91 80 5
309. re closely indicate the type of measurement result This is particularly rec ommended for settings to be stored in a setup memory The Window Name dialog box is used to assign names to windows File menu Window Name C E d d 1144 1400 12 4 52 E 2 R amp S NRP Window 1 Window 2 4 1144 1400 12 U A CR CA Management of settings File menu Assigns a name to window 1 Pressing the softkey will open an editor for entering a name Assign names to windows 2 to 4 Remote Control DISPlay WINDow 1 4 NAME string 4 53 E 2 System settings System menu R amp S NRP System settings System menu Remote VO Batt Test Configuring the remote control interfaces page 4 55 e Setting the analog outputs page 4 58 Selftest page 4 60 Power Ref EH on d Test generator page 4 62 Senser System System information page 4 62 Info Info Miscellaneous Misc d Operation at low ambient temperatures page 4 64 Fig 4 49 System menu 1144 1400 12 4 54 E 2 R amp S NRP System settings System menu Configuring the remote control interfaces System Remote Selecting a remote control interface System menu Remote C d GPIB Ethernet d Configuring the GPIB Remote dialog box GPIB C GPIB Address 1144 1400 12 xl Remote Interface o o o o Off GPIB Ethernet vse Fig 4 50 Re
310. rear of the meter Addressability check on the test generator Appears only if option R amp S NRP B1 is installed test generator Addressability test on the Ethernet interface The transmis sion rate is displayed Appears only if option R amp S NRP B4 is installed Ethernet The Ok below the network icon indicates that the inter face can be addressed If the R amp S NRP is not connected to a network hub or if a connection cannot be established during booting the mes sage NC Not Connected is displayed instead of OK It is however possible to establish a network connection later on at any time Addressability check on the battery and charging regulator Appears only if option R amp S NRP B3 battery is installed If an error occurs when an interface test is being performed the message failed is displayed under the appropriate icon and the icon is shown in inverse video When all the tests are completed booting is interrupted booting can be re started by pressing the continue softkey 1 9 E 2 Switching the meter on off R amp S NRP If an error is detected when the non volatile memory contain Nonvolatile RAM is empty or failure of EEPROM ing instrument settings is checked an error message is dis occured 1 played when booting is completed The non volatile memory is then re initialized completely and the R amp S NRP goes into the preset state All instrument settings that have been sav
311. ribed in Chapter 3 in the section Dialog boxes and their controls Remote Control MEMory TABLe MAP lt string gt 0 9 1144 1400 12 4 18 Se R amp S NRP Data acquisition and parameters Sensor menu Filter averaging Sensor Filter The averaging filter is used to reduce fluctuations in the measured result to the extent desired Such fluctuations can be caused by inherent noise of the measuring instrument modulation of the measure ment signal or beats from the superposition of adjacent carriers A more stable display has to be traded off against longer measurements Note In manual mode longer measurements does not mean that it takes longer to display a new result but rather that it takes longer for the result to settle when the power changes The measurement result is obtained from a two stage averaging process First a measured value is obtained for the time window specified in the Mode dialog box either by weighted summation of sam ples or by integration Mode Sensor Time window ContAv R amp S NRP Z1x or R amp S NRP Z2x Sampling Window page 4 10 Timeslot R amp S NRP Z1x or R amp S NRP Z2x Nominal Width page 4 13 Burst R amp S NRP Z1x or R amp S NRP Z2x Determined by the sensor according to the signal Gate R amp S NRP Z1x or R amp S NRP Z2x End of Gate Start of Gate Measuring power in gates page 4 14 Measurements are continuously repeated in the selected time window Repetitions are continuo
312. rmat to the controller as a response to a parallel poll The result can also be read without a parallel poll by the query 15T The parallel poll mode is mainly used to quickly find out which of the many devices connected to the IEC IEEE bus caused an SRQ For this purpose SRE and PPE must be set to the same value Queries Each part of a status register can be read out by queries The queries are specified in the description of the SCPI commands command system STATus The queries always yield a number representing the bit pattern of the queried register This number is evaluated by the controller program Queries are mainly used after an SRQ to obtain detailed information about the cause of the SRQ Error Queue Query Each error in the device causes an entry in the error queue The entries in the error queue are error messages in plain text If a sensor is connected sensor specific errors can be seen via manual control in the menu File Error List or in remote control via Error List Usually the error queue is read with the SCPI query SYSTem ERRor Each SYSTem ERRor query is answered by an entry from the error queue If there are no more error messages in the error queue 0 No error is returned by the device The error queue should be queried in the controller program after each SRQ since the queue entries provide a more precise description of the error cause than the status registers In particular in the test phase of
313. rmed across a number of sweeps Because of the chopper amplifier Sampling window p 4 10 two sweeps are always taken into account in calculating the measurement result even if the averaging filter is set to 1 Filter averag ing p 4 19 If the measurement points to be averaged originate from different trigger events this can produce a new perhaps totally unrealistic trace A noisy signal or a signal with more than one possible trigger point can result in different trigger events especially if internal triggering Trigger settings p 4 24 is used Using the Realtime mode helps to set stable trigger conditions as unstable trigger behaviour can be detected immediately Since the dynamic range in the Realtime mode is reduced because of larger zero offsets stronger noise and poorer linearity it should be switched off when triggering is stable If trigger ing is external the Realtime mode is generally unnecessary exception single shot measurement Trigger settings p 4 24 1144 1400 12 4 42 E 2 R amp S NRP Displaying data in the Scope mode Selecting a window The traces recorded by a sensor in the Scope mode can be displayed in an expanded or a half height window The most important thing is that the sensor that has been switched to the Scope mode is en tered in the Primary Channel of this window Functions and their use p 4 34 The window should be expanded so that the additional control elements of the Scope mode d
314. ror messages If the compute function of the associated calculate block is SWR RLOSs or REFLect ion then the unit cannot be changed and error message 26 State not supported is output 1144 1400 12 6 108 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands List of Remote Control Commands The R amp S NRP supports remote control commands to the SCPI 1999 0 standard Command High level measurement commands CONFigure CONFigure CONFigure 1 H G RELative CONFigure 1 S H DIFFerence CONFigure l DIFFerence RELative CONFigure l S SUM CONFigure l H SUM RELative CONFigure 1 RATio CONFigure l RATio RELative CONFigure 1 H SWR CONFigure 1 RLOSS CONFigure 1 H H REFLection CONFigure l1l i AVG CONFigure 1 AVG RELative CONFigure 1 E AVG DIFFerence CONFigure 1 AVG DIFFerence RELative CONFigure l AVG SUM CONFigure 1 AVG SUM RELative CONFigure l1l AVG RATio CONFigure l AVG RATio RELative CONFigure l AVG SWR CONFigure 1 S AVG RLOSS CONFigure 1 H G H AVG REFLection CONFigure l AVG CONFigure l S t RELative 1144 1400 12 6 109 E 3 Remote Control Commands CONFigure DIFFerence R amp S NR
315. s Limit monitoring page 4 40 Activates acoustic feedback to indicate when a key is pressed Remote Control SYSTem BEEPer NOTify KEY ON OFF Switches the rate at which the new measured values are displayed between Normal Slow and Freze The Slow setting has been provided with very low ambient temperatures in mind If one of the analog out puts is being used and a time resolution of a few milliseconds is needed the screen contents can be frozen Otherwise the picture setup leads to brief interruptions at the analog output Remote Control DISPlay UPDate NORMal SLOW FREeze 4 64 E 2 R amp S NRP Messages and alarms Sensor Windows Measurement File OVERLOAD Sensor s C 3 43 42 dBm Overrange 1144 1400 12 Messages and alarms Overload One or more sensors are subjected to overload Caution Overload can destroy the sensor de pending on amount and duration of overload The upper measurement limit is specified in the data sheet for the sensor The nominal value of the upper measurement limit is also displayed in the Sensor Info dialog box System information page 4 62 An alarm sounds when the message is displayed The alarm can be disabled in the Misc dialog box Miscellaneous page 4 64 Overrange This message is displayed only if the Auto range function is off It indicates that the permissible range has been exceeded Measurement ranges page 4 22
316. s Remote Control SENSe 1 4 CORRection DCYCle STATe ON OFF SENSe 1 4 CORRection DCYCle INPut MAGNitude float value To reduce result fluctuations caused by modulation this parameter should always be activated if the size of the sampling window cannot be exactly adjusted to the modulation period or if this is not required If the size of the sampling window is 5 to 9 times greater than a modula tion period in general the reduction in display fluctuation will be suffi cient With smoothing off 300 to 3000 periods are required to obtain the same effect sz Sampling Window Remote Control SENSe 1 4 POWer AVG SMOothing STATe ON OFF 4 9 E 2 Data acquisition and parameters Sensor menu R amp S NRP Background information Sampling window As the sensor amplifiers use chopping a measurement comprises at least two sampling windows and a sensor specific deadtime of a few 100 us Samples at equal time intervals over the duration of a sampling window are taken and a partial measurement result is formed from these samples The partial measurement results of two adjacent sampling windows are combined and the average is either output as the final result or is subjected to further averaging as one of a number of intermediate results Filter averaging page 4 19 In the remote control mode the sampling window determines the minimum measurement time that can be achieved 2 x sampling window
317. s are connected by inserting the male connector To disconnect hold the connector by its sleeve Pulling on the sensor ca ble will not release the sensor connector Test generator The test generator connector option R amp S NRP B1 pro vides a high precision unmodulated sine signal with a POWER REF power of 1 mW and a frequency of 50 MHz for checking the sensors The generator is turned on and off from the System menu see Chapter 4 6 System Settings 1144 1400 12 1 3 EE Front and rear views Keypad lj der DIT de EN 1144 1400 12 See Chapter 3 Manual Operation R amp S NRP E 2 R amp S NRP Rear panel TRIG OUT2 OUT1 OUT1 and TRIG OUT2 Ca Qe TRIG OUT2 OUT1 Ethernet Ethernet USB USB ee IEC IEEE bus IEEE 488 lt scPil gt oCo 1144 1400 12 Front and rear views The BNC connector OUT1 outputs an analog signal with a voltage between OV and 3 3 V It can be used to output a voltage that is proportional to the measured value e g for level regulation or a digital signal for threshold monitoring The BNC connector TRIG OUT2 can be used either as an external trigger input or as a second analog output The inputs outputs are configured from the System menu see Chapter 4 6 System Settings The Ethernet connector option R amp S NRP B4 is an RJ45 socket for remote controlling the R amp S NRP via a network The type B USB connector is used to
318. s available for use e Brightness contrast e Frequency entry e Preset and setups e Zeroing For further information on using the hardkeys see Chapter 4 section Hardkeys Cursor keypad The cursor key functions are context sensitive They can be used to Select the menu e Select the active window gt Ww B e Move the cursor in text boxes e Change the value of an entry in a text box e Select an element from a drop down list e Adjust the brightness and contrast of the display With the exception of moving the cursor the functions re ferred to above can also be activated using softkeys 1144 1400 12 3 1 E 2 Keys Enter MENU key ESC LOCAL DEL 1 TRIG 1144 1400 12 ESC LOCAL DEL 1TRIG R amp S NRP As the key i e Enter key it is used to confirm entries in text fields and dialog boxes and to confirm selections in the drop down lists As the key it is used to fold out and fold back the menus next to the softkeys The function of the key is determined according to context in other words the Enter or MENU function is always selected automatically for the operator by the instrument This key is used as an key to escape from the entry mode in text boxes and drop down lists It is also used to close dialog boxes and menus without losing any entries that have been made Title bar on p 3 8 As the key it is used to switch the R amp S NRP from remote control mode all controls disa
319. s been installed Caution If you want to completely isolate the meter from the AC supply pull out the AC supply plug Selecting the standby mode does not disconnect the AC supply Welcome screen and function test After switch on the R amp S NRP performs a selftest The con amp tents of all non volatile memories the RAM and the ad ROHDE amp SCHWARZ dressability of all interfaces is checked Messages indicate which options have been installed NRP Smart Sensor Technology Mem Keys WW L USB Net We co O T Fao Ok Ok Ok Ok Ok Ok 100 Mem Function test on the RAM 1010 Ok 1144 1400 12 1 8 EE R amp S NRP Switching the meter on off Keys pem Ok USB Ok Ok Ok 1 100 NC e 1144 1400 12 Addressability check on the interfaces for the sensor chan nels Only one of the icons shown on the left is displayed to show the number of channels that have been installed Channel A Appears if the device is single channel Channel A or channels A and B fitted on the front panel Appears only if option R amp S NRP B2 is installed second measurement input Channels A and B fitted on the rear panel Appears only if option R amp S NRP B6 is installed at the rear sensor connectors A B Channels A to D Appears only if option R amp S NRP B5 is installed 8rd and 4th measurement input Addressability check on the keypad controller Addressability check on the USB interface at the
320. s incomplete The R amp S NPP can be configured for measuring standardized signals with SYSTem STANdard PRESet lt string gt This command sets a number of predefined parameters If a sensor does not support a specific parameter e g a measurement mode execution error message 57 Standard settings incomplete is generated 1144 1400 12 9 7 E 2
321. s with two columns and up to 80 entries lines can be created Thus not only the sensors but also the frequency response of various test assemblies can be compensated for during the measurement The tables are selected with SENSe 1 4 CORRection FDOT SELect and then activated and deactivated with SENSe 1 4 CORRection FDOT STATe Names can be assigned to the tables Some commands which do not specify a table name affect the table currently selected with MEM TABL SEL name es Note Stored data is not affected by an RST command Table 6 7 Commands of the MEMory system command rss mm m O M EMory CATalog ALL Query only STATe Query only TABLe Query only Ear NAME name No query TABLe No query ALL Query only STATe Query only TABLe Query only NSTates Query only STATe CATalog Query only DEFine MAP tring gt 0 19 TABLe FREQuency R gt lt NRf gt POINts Query only GAIN MAGNitude Rf gt lt NRf gt DB PCT POINts Query only MAP tring gt 0 9 MOVE tring gt lt string gt No query SELect tring gt 1144 1400 12 6 39 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP MEMory CATalog ALL Lists the names of all stored device states and correction tables The length of the response depends on how many device states and tables are stored It has the following format
322. sage 0 No error is returned as a response The queue is cleared by CLS It is not changed by RST For further information on the error event queue see section gt STATus page 5 1 1144 1400 12 6 95 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP SYSTem ERRor EXTended STATe boolean SYST ERR EXT ON activates extended error messages SYST ERR The location of errors in the parsed command strings is also shown RST Wert OFF SYSTem KEY lt NR1 gt character value This command is used for testing purposes only and simulates a single stroke of an R amp S NRP front panel key The key to be simulated is described either in plain text character value or by a key code lt NR1 gt gt Table 6 32 Table 6 32 Valid parameter values for the SYSTem KEY command Simulated front panel key lt character_value gt Softkey toggle 1 left SKIL 1 Softkey toggle 1 right SK1R 2 Softkey toggle 2 left SK2L 3 Softkey toggle 2 right SK2R 4 Softkey toggle 3 left SK3L 2 Softkey toggle 3 right SK3R 6 Softkey toggle 4 left SK4L 7 Softkey toggle 4 right SK4R 8 Softkey toggle 5 left SK5L 9 Softkey toggle 5 right SK5R 10 Softkey toggle 6 left SK6L 11 Softkey toggle 6 right SK6R 12 PRESet 13 ZERO 14 FREQ 15 C CONTrast 16 POWer 17 1144 1400 12 6 96 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands Simulated front panel key character
323. sensor does not remain in the WAIT FOR TRG state but immediately changes to the MEASURING state HOLD A measurement can only be triggered when the command TRIG IMM is executed INTernal The sensor determines the trigger time by means of the signal to be measured When this signal exceeds TRIG SLOP POS or fall short of TRIG SLOP NEG the power set by TRIG LEV the measurement is started after the time set by TRIG DEL Similar to TRIG SOUR EXT waiting for a trigger event can also be skipped by TRIG IMM RST value depending on sensor 1144 1400 12 6 107 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP UNIT Table 6 35 Commands of the UNIT system UNIT 2 DBM W RATio DB PCT UNIT 1 8 POWer DBM W DBUV Selects the output unit for the measured power values This setting also determines the unit for the parameters of the following commands e CALC REL e CALC LIM UPP e CALC LIM LOW e DISP ME UPP e DISP MET LOW e OUTP REC LIM LOW e OUTP REC LIM UPP RST value DB UNIT 1 8 POWer RATio DB DPCT O Selects the output unit for the measured power ratio values This setting also determines the unit for the parameters of the following commands e CALC REL e CALC LIM UPP e CALC LIM LOW e DISP ME UPP e DISP MET LOW e OUTP REC LIM LOW e OUTP REC LIM UPP RST value DB Er
324. shows the relationships of the relevant protocol layers in the OSI reference model Application VXI11 Network Instrument XDR Data representation KSC The VXI11 protocol stack in the OSI reference model A VXI11 remote control connection consists of three channels core abort and interrupt which can be used to set up as many links as desired The concept of links makes it possible to connect a network instrument client in a controller with a number of logical measurement devices in a host computer via a single VXI11 remote control connection A link is then set up to each logical device It is also possible to set up several links to one logical device provided that several servers are running on the network instrument host or a network instrument client is being served by several controllers To prevent problems caused by several controllers simultaneously accessing one device links can be locked A locked link has exclusive access rights to a particular device Accesses via other links are then not possible An exception is an abort via the abort channel which can be executed at any time and also aborts the execution of commands via other links R amp S NRP Network Instrument Host Network Instrument Host Core Channel Controller Network Network Device Instrument p Instrument Client VA Abort Channel S Link 1 Server p BY Link 2 Link 1 Link 2 Link n Interrupt Channel Link 1 Link 2 Link n Diagram of a VXI11 connect
325. t Analog OUTP REC1 STAT ON System gt 1 O gt Out 1 gt Pass Fail OUTP L STAT ON System gt 1 O gt Out 1 gt Off OUTP RECI STAT ON OUTP TTL STAT ON System gt 1 O gt Out 10 V Equivalent if Analog is selected OUTP REC1 LIM LOW System gt 1 O gt Out 13 V Equivalent if Analog is selected OUTP REC1 LIM UPP System gt 1 O gt Out 1 gt Fail if Pass Fail is selected OUTP FAIL HIGH and OUTP HVOLT 1144 1400 12 5 20 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Fundamentals System I O Out 1 Pass if Pass Fail is selected OUTP FAIL HIGH and OUTP LVOLT System I O 1 O 2 1234 OUTP REC2 FEED System l O gt 1 O 2 Analog Out OUTP REC2 STAT ON System l O 1 O 2 Trigger In OUTP REC2 STAT OFF System gt 1 O gt 1 O 2 0 V Equivalent if Analog Out is OUTP REC2 LIM LOW selected System l O gt 1 0 23 V Equivalent if Analog Out is OUTP REC2 LIM UPP selected System Errorlist SYSTem ERRor DISP ERR STAT Menu item in manual control SCPI command in short form System Test 2 Sensor ABCD Init Test SYST SENS 1 4 TEST ATS LT System Power Ref OUTP ROSC System Display Update DISP UPD System Misc Beeper Key SYST BEEP NOT KEY System Misc Beeper
326. t channels A B C and D how the measured values are processed ratio difference the unit for the result additional information max min etc are also defined This procedure does not change the sensor operating modes that have been set in the Mode menu All key parameters are displayed along with the result in the appropriate window In the manual mode four measurements can be configured corresponding to the maximum number of windows 1 2 3 and 4 in the remote control mode additional measurements 5 to 8 can be configured not displayed on screen The Measurement menu The Measurement menu contains the functions required to configure measurements Window Dau K LJ Selecting a window page 4 32 Func e Selecting a measurement function and the unit page 4 33 tion dBpU mo zess Relative measurements page 4 39 Setting the reference value manually page 4 39 Refval Limits Limit monitoring page 4 40 Max Hold Reset e Resetting the extreme value display page 4 38 Fig 4 29 Measurement menu Selecting a window Measurement gt Window You can select one of the windows 1 to 4 as and when you want All Windows and Measurement menu functions act on the selected window Measurement menu Selects the window whose number is displayed in the menu If the Window 8 window is open this is also indicated by the window s title bar being in j2 34 dod inverse video and by the shadow al
327. t dialog DOox cete ee t Re pent eei 4 35 Measurement WIFIdOW 5 5 5 prin rr Parva capri teg ep Fuba do peak ae ceP rapa ra prak teg legi ees ap d dad ern ei pad 4 38 Ref Value dialog ee EE 4 39 Limits dialog DOK nter tette ete eres eter Peut inea egets teer bp tendon 4 40 Mode dialog box Scope mode enne entere nnne 4 41 Expanded window with control elements in the Scope mode 4 43 Mode dialogHalf height window in the Scope mode 4 43 Scope mode display Trace Page nennen nenne 4 44 Scope mode display Timeslot page ssssssesesnesiresrresirssrrssrrssrnssrnsstnssrnnsrnnsrnnsnnnnrnn nt 4 45 Scope mode display Gates Page nnne 4 46 Scope mode display Meas pDaue 4 47 File menu inepte oit ei eei ed 4 49 Recall Setup dialog BOX v tarte ete rds tfe ere eco te edere 4 49 Recall Setup dialog box rhe cede eni epe td arte ee 4 50 4 4 E 2 R amp S NRP Fig 4 45 Fig 4 46 Fig 4 43 Fig 4 48 Fig 4 49 Fig 4 50 Fig 4 51 Fig 4 52 Fig 4 53 Fig 4 54 Fig 4 55 Fig 4 56 Fig 4 57 Fig 4 58 Fig 4 59 Fig 4 60 Fig 4 61 Tables Table 4 1 1144 1400 12 List of Figures and Tables Chapter 4 Recall Setup dialog box sssssssssssesssseeseeneee enne nentes nnne nens 4 51 Errorlist dialog DOX EE 4 52 Menu bar in the remote control mode eene nennen nene 4 52 Window Name dialog DOK er ite eere etr pe RR Euer Eden Ee 4 52 System ment retia dee ne E e e DD Gad enn nes 4 5
328. t of a time window and the number 2 the end regardless whether the marker is active or passive Passive marker Hf Average Average power for the set time window A For the following two items please read Background information p 4 12 Peak power for the set window Peak Peak Avg Ratio of peak power to average power for the set time window Remote control configuration CALCulate 1 8 FEED POWer AVERage ON SWEep 1 4 CALCulate 1 8 FEED POWer PEAK ON SWEep 1 4 CALCulate 1 8 FEED POWer PTAVerage ON SWEep 1 4 Read result FETCh 1 8 Marker CC Swaps the roles of the active and passive marker Edit Select d Gate C Selects a time window dod Background information To ensure accurate measurement of the peak power and the Peak Avg ratio two factors must be taken into account 1 First of all the video bandwidth of the power sensor must be greater than the RF bandwidth of the test signal so that the display of the envelope power characteristic is not corrupted The video bandwidth of the Sensors R amp S NRP Z1x and R amp S NRP Z2x is about 100 kHz allowing the peak power of many amplitude modulated signals and also several TDMA signals such as NADC RF bandwidth approx 50 kHz to be measured If the RF bandwidth is considerably greater than the video bandwidth values displayed for the peak power and the Peak Avg ratio will generally be too low For the peak power measurement the horizont
329. tails refer to the documentation of the corresponding sensor Value range depending on sensor SYSTem SENSor 1 4 RESet From the point of view of the R amp S NRP base unit the sensors are stand alone measuring devices They communicate with the R amp S NRP via a command set complying with SCPI SYST SENS 1 4 RES prompts the base unit to send an RST to the sensor in question Measurements in progress are interrupted SYSTem SENSor 1 4 TEST Performs a sensor test and returns a list of strings separated by commas The contents of this test protocol is sensor specific For its meaning please refer to the sensor documentation SYSTem SPEed NORMal FAST The data processing speed of the R amp S NRP can be increased when FAST is selected The display is Switched off and the measured values are no longer displayed since the continuous update of the Screen content requires computation time RST value NORM SYSTem STANdard CATalog Returns a list of stored standards containing a series of strings separated by commas The strings can be used as parameters for the SySTem STANdard PRESet string command RST Value none 1144 1400 12 6 101 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP SYSTem STANdard PRESet string The R amp S NRP can be easily configured for measuring standardized signals e g mobile radio standards For this purpose the standards listed in the Annex Standard Configurations are stored
330. tected as the end of the burst Dropout Power Last falling slope A in the burst Trigger event ues Set I n d threshold 7 ILI L i i Time Exclude Start Exclude End Measurement interval 1144 1400 12 4 12 E 2 R amp S NRP Data acquisition and parameters Sensor menu Measuring the power of TDMA signals ple s eee The Timeslot mode is an easy to configure method for simultaneously measuring average power in multiple timeslots of a TDMA signal It is available only with sensors of the R amp S NRP Z1x and R amp S NRP Z2x families This measurement mode can be used only if all timeslots of the TDMA signal are equal in length Up to 26 timeslots are allowed A period to be excluded from the measurement can be defined at the begin ning and end of each timeslot by using the Excluded from Start and Excluded from End parameters Measurement can be started with an external trigger signal or automatically triggered by an internal signal Trigger settings p 4 24 Mode dialog box Burst Av T slot C D gt dod ContAv Burst T slot T gate Scope No of Timeslots Nominal Width 8 1 000 ms Excluded from Start from End 0 000 ps 0 000 us Fig 4 13 Mode dialog box Timeslot mode No of Timeslots C Number of timeslots on which a simultaneous meas is to be made d Remote Control SENSe 1 4 1 OWer TSLot COUNt int value Nominal Width C Timeslot le
331. ted measured values to be specified for test purposes SERV RCO specifies the number of SERV RES pairs to follow The first SERV RES command specifies the measured value in watts the second SERV RES command determines how often the measured value should be obtained The measurement sequences defined in this way are repeated until the sensor is disconnected from the R amp S NRP and reconnected Example The command sequence SERV2 RCO SERV2 RES SERV2 S S ERV2 ERV2 2 3 2 4 1 HW DW ES ES ES makes sensor 2 return the measured values 3 W 3 W 4 W 3 W 3 W AW from now on RST value none The simulation mode is not exited in the case of RST SERVice 1 4 UNLock 1234 Before other SERVice system commands are accepted they must be enabled with SERV UNL 1234 1144 1400 12 6 67 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP STATus The status registers of the R amp S NRP can be read and configured with commands of the STATus system The R amp S NRP uses the following status registers e Standard Event Status Register specified in IEEE 488 2 Reading and configuring with ESR and ESE This register is not handled by the STATus system Device Status Register Questionable Status Register Questionable Power Status Register Questionable Window Status Register Questionable Calibration Status Register Operation Status Register
332. ters used because a proportional font is used Lines that are too long are cut off which is indicated by at the end of the line RST value none DISPlay MESSage TYPE QUERy MESSage Sets the mode for the expected user response if the window with the user defined message is displayed QUERy The message window must be closed by pressing the key The execution of remote control commands is blocked until this has been done MESSage Remote control command processing is immediately continued The message window must be closed with DISP MESS OFF if it is no longer needed RST value MESSage 1144 1400 12 6 31 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP DISPlay PIXMap block data Supplies the display content as binary block data The content is sent line by line with one bit corresponding exactly to one pixel Example DISP PIXM returns 49600xxxxxxx x With x in binary format comprising the display contents DISPlay UPDate NORMal SLOW FREeze Adjust the update frequency of the measured values in the display In case of discontinuities in the voltage progress at the analog outputs display updates may be suspended with DISP UPD FREeze The display won t consume CPU time in this state RST Value NORMal DISPlay WINDow 1 4 AVALue MINimum MAXimum PTPeak OFF Determines which additional information about the measured values is shown in the display
333. the effect of source mismatch on the measured value gamma correction To do this the magnitude and phase of must be specified Sensor menu Source Match Source 7 consid for Enhanced Accuracy A B C D Source 7 Magnitude Source 7 Phase 1144 1400 12 0 0 0 0 Source J considered for Enhanced Accuracy Magnitude Phase Source F Fig 4 20 RF Source dialog box Increases measurement accuracy with gamma correction Remote Control SENSe 1 4 SGAMma CORRection STATe ON OFF Tabs for selecting the sensor Magnitude of the source reflection coefficient 7 Remote Control SENSe 1 4 SGAMma MAGNitude float value Phase of the source reflection coefficient Z Remote Control SENSe 1 4 SGAMma PHASe float value 4 23 E 2 Data acquisition and parameters Sensor menu R amp S NRP Trigger settings Sensor Trigger The trigger system which is required for the BurstAv Timeslot and Scope measurement modes is configured in the Trigger dialog box and the Trigger Adv dialog box Sensor menu Trigger C gt d d Delay Source Level Next Fig 4 21 Trigger dialog box A B C D C Tabs for selecting the sensor dod Delay C Trigger delay Setting a positive value delays the effect of the trigger d d event until the set time has elapsed Entering negative values allows pretriggering limited to a few ms dependin
334. their Use cere dle a ee pene dnte e nee og 4 34 Expanded configuration for sensors in the Scope mode e cceeceeeteeeeteeeeeeteaees 4 35 i em eI I MEER PIB ME 4 36 Setting the auxiliary value ennemis nint 4 38 Resetting the extreme value display sese 4 38 Additional ie e ITT 4 39 Relative measurements eeeeeeeesssiseeeesee enne entrent ennt AERAN REAA AT 4 39 Setting the reference value manually sse eee 4 39 T reT a uer cen Taro Em 4 40 Displaying data in the Scope mode nennen nennen 4 41 Switching the sensor to the Scope mode eene nene 4 41 Selecting a WindOoW idee tei bea eO tal eo ERE RE 4 43 Trigger settings ix scien i IIIa uie ae 4 43 xliii H 4 43 Setting parameters 2 all tei Len E erai Deni at oiu dis E dr od eae een 4 44 co H ID 4 44 RE 4 45 Gates aii EE 4 46 Meas EE 4 47 Management of settings File menu 4 49 Default setting Preset iine te E A E R A E S 4 49 Storing user defined settings Setups sssssssssssssssseeeeeeee eene 4 49 Loading user defined settings Setups eene 4 50 Loading settings for mobile radio standards sse eene 4 50 Programming aide cotton ete et bU de ete etuer 4 52 Assigning names to windOws eeeessesseseseseeeeesienne nenne ennt enne retinet nnne inrer 4 52 System settings System men
335. tical except for the opposite meaning of the parameters OUTPut TTL 1 FEED string Sets the calculate block whose limit handling controls the TTL voltage If the measured value of this calculate block violates a limit and limit monitoring is active the voltage specified in Table 6 9 first line is output Value range CALC1 LIM CALC2 LIM CALC3 LIM CALC4 LIM RST value CALC1 LIM OUTPut TTL 1 HVOLtage float value Sets the high voltage for the TTL output Unit v Value range 0 V to 3 3 V RST Value 3 3 V OUTPut TTL 1 LVOLtage float value Sets the low voltage for the TTL output Unit v Valuerange 0 V to 3 3 V RST value 0 V v Note The value for the lower TTL level may be greater than the value for the upper TTL level 1144 1400 12 6 48 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands OUTPut TTL 1 STATe ON OFF Activates ON or deactivates OFF the TTL operating mode of the OUT1 connector rear panel The magnitude of the two possible output voltages can range from 0 V to 3 3 V OUTP TTL HVOL and OUTP TTL LVOL Refer to gt Table 6 9 and gt Figure 6 6 to determine which voltage is available at the output SIN SINCE 2 BOU ANCE BULGE TL FAIL HIGH P TTL FAIL LOW Measured value violates limit Measured value is within limit Table 6 9 Voltage at TTL output
336. tions CONFigure The calculate blocks and the associated sensors are configured by means of the parameter list A measurement is not started A question mark at the end of the command provides information on the parameters transferred by the last CONFigure or MEASure command respectively Since the device settings can be changed after a CONFi gure the query does not return the current device setup CONFigure is performed internally by SENSe and CALCulate commands One or several measurement channels are configured as follows Measurement mode ContAv Burst Timeslot Scope CONT SOUR COUN DEL AUTO AVER COUN AUT AVER COUN AU AVER COUN AUT AVER STAT ON ON ON ON Is set as a function of the selected calculation function 1 See also Annex Compatibility Information 1144 1400 12 6 11 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP FETCh The last valid result is returned The command is only completed after a valid measurement has been performed When BUS is set as the trigger source a measurement cannot be started after the FETCh command and an SCPI error is output 214 Trigger deadlock In compliance with SCPI 1999 0 different results can be queried with FETCh without having to restart a measurement This is only possible if the SENSe block is not reconfigured This is the case if only the calculation function e g R
337. to other high level measurement commands CONF parameters list gt AS MEAS READ lt parameters list gt The CONF command configures the measurement whereas READ starts the measurement and calculates and provides the result This division offers two advantages 1 The measurement has to be configured only once and several measurements with several READ commands can be performed in succession This means better performance as compared to measurements performed with MEAS since the time for configuring the measurement is only used once 2 After CONF settings can be adapted to user s requirements by means of low level commands see below KEN Note If a list of parameters is indicated for the READ command it must correspond to the list for the preceding CONF command After a measurement has been completed i e the data from the sensors is available it is sometimes interesting to evaluate this data several times without starting a new measurement each time Since this is not possible with the above commands the READ command can be replaced by the INIT and FETCh commands INIT FETCh lt list of parameters gt READ FETCh evaluates existing data if the data is valid FETCh may select another calculation function if the measurement can be evaluated with the available measured data Example The following sequence of commands provides the difference between measure
338. tput unit of the measured value of the window Unit of measured value Value range for float value 1e 18 1e18 1e 18 1e22 Unit gt Table 6 3 on page 6 27 RST value 90 DBM or 120 DB DISPlay WINDow 1 4 METer ANALog LOWer POWer lt float_value gt Sets the lower limit value of the analog scale This value is used if the unit of the measurement result is Watt dBm or dByV i e the measurement result is a power Unit DBM W DBUV Default unit DBM Value range see DISPlay WINDow METer ANALog LOWer RST value 90 DBM DISPlay WINDow 1 4 METer ANALog LOWer RATio lt float_value gt Sets the lower limit value of the analog scale This value is used if the unit of the measurement result is dB percent or the number 1 i e the measurement result is a power ratio Unit DB DPCT O Default unit DB Value range see DISPlay WINDow METer ANALog LOWer RST value 120 DB 1144 1400 12 6 33 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP DISPlay WINDow 1 4 METer ANALog UPPer float value Sets the upper limit value of the analog scale The value range depends on the current output unit of the measured value of the window Unit of measured value 9 99999F 13 0103 Value range 9 99999E5 196 897 Unit gt Table 6 3 on page 6 27 RST value 30 DBM or 60 DB DISPlay WINDow 1 4 METer ANALog UPPer POWer
339. u 4 54 Configuring the remote control Intertarces eene 4 55 Selecting a remote control interface ssssssssssseeee eee 4 55 Gonfig ring the GPIB p teo e d e aee n eee teta uud 4 55 Remote control via UP 4 56 Configuring the Ethernet A 4 56 Setting the analog outputs crore eere ada eite i aE 4 58 SelfteSt eo MH W raia 4 60 Keyboard Stn enamine a ee ea ASEEN eE AAEE Ld nani Dead EG 4 61 Iure nro cc 4 62 1144 1400 12 I 4 2 E 2 R amp S NRP Table of Contents Chapter 4 System Information 4 62 Information About Sensors ctt ei dee aD ei Mn e EY GR ER APR eo vnda 4 62 Information about the HSGNbP eene enne enne nnne nnns 4 63 Miscellaneous Operation at low ambient temperatures ssseessssssressiresrresrnssrnssrnssrrssrnssrrssrns 4 64 Messages and alarms AAA 4 65 1144 1400 12 I 4 3 Gs List of Figures and Tables Chapter 4 R amp S NRP Figs Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig 1144 1400 12 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 13 4 14 4 15 4 16 4 17 4 18 4 19 4 20 4 21 4 22 4 23 4 24 4 25 4 26 4 27 4 28 4 29 4 30 4 31 4 32 4 33 4 34 4 35 4 36 4 37 4 38 4 39 4 40 4
340. ue to various marginal conditions An error message with a number between 200 and 300 denoting the error in greater detail will be entered in the error queue 5 Command Error This bit is set if an undefined command or a command with incorrect syntax is received An error message with a number between 100 and 200 denoting the error in greater detail will be entered in the error queue 6 User Request This bit is set upon pressing the LOCAL key i e when the device is switched to manual control 7 Power On This bit is set when the device is switched on 1144 1400 12 6 79 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP Operation Status Register The CONDition register contains information on the operations currently being performed by the device while the EVENt register contains information on the operations performed by the device since the last readout of the register These two registers can be read by the queries STATus OPERation CONDition or STATus OPERation EVENt Table 6 20 Meaning of bits used in the Operation Status Register Bit S No Meaning 0 Operation Calibrating Status Register summary bit This bit is set if one of the sensors is being calibrated 1t03 Not used 4 Operation Measuring Status Register summary bit This bit is set if one of the sensors is performing a measurement 5 Operation Trigger Status Register summary bit This bit is set if a senso
341. ult TO MTIM 10 S but does not measure more than 10 s All intermediate pushed values delivered by the first filter stage are stored in the filter The earliest measured value is ousted out of the filter since the filter has only a limited length SENS AVER TCON MOV REP is used to set when the filter algorithm is to be applied to the filter With the setting MOVing a new measure value is calculated for each new intermediate measured value This is the default setting in the LOCAL mode SENS AVER TCON REPeat is set in the REMOTE mode In this particular case new measured values are calculated when all intermediate measured values have been replaced by new ones E V Note 1144 1400 12 Changing from SENS AVER TCON MOV to REP in the LOCAL REMOTE transition causes the update rate of measured values to be reduced since the filter must be completely filled for each new measured value Annex 1 18 E 2 R amp S NRP Annex Remote Control Commands Measured value corrections The R amp S NRP offers different options for correcting measured values in the instrument These options all require an existing knowledge of the test setup or the time structure of the signal Offsets in the result can be corrected globally and depending on the frequency and it is possible to consider the duty cycle of a signal and the influence of the complex reflection coefficient 7 of the power source Global offset correction All measured values are mult
342. unction of a sensor on or off When the filter is switched on the number of measured values set with SENSe 1 4 AVERage COUNt is averaged This reduces the effect of noise so that more reliable results are obtained RST value depending on sensor SENSe 1 4 AVERage COUNt int value This command sets the filter length i e the number of readings to be averaged for one measured value The higher the count the lower the noise and the longer it takes to obtain a measured value Unit Value range depending on sensor RST value depending on sensor SENSe 1 4 AVERage COUNt AUTO ON OFF ONCE This command can be used to automatically determine a value for the filter legth SENSe 1 4 AVERage COUNt If the command is called with the parameter ONCE the filter length is automatically detected during the next measurement and set to that value Thereafter automatic filter length detection is switched off The setting can then be queried via SENS 1 4 AVER COUN If the automatic switchover is activated with the ON parameter the sensor always defines a suitable filter length which can also be queried via SENS 1 4 AVER COUN RST value depending on sensor 1144 1400 12 6 51 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP SENSe 1 4 AVERage COUNt AUTO MTIMe float value If the R amp S NRP has to determine the filter length automatically the filter length can become large an
343. up 1 Save Fig 4 43 Recall Setup dialog box C Selects a setting d d Edit Name C Used to rename the selected setting d d Remote Control MEMory STATe MAP lt string gt 1 19 1144 1400 12 4 49 E 2 Management of settings File menu R amp S NRP Save C Stores the current settings under the selected name After settings are d d stored successfully the dialog box is closed Another way to store settings and close the dialog box is to press the key A dialog can be cancelled by using ESC Remote Control SAV 1 19 Loading user defined settings The Recall Setup dialog box is used to load stored settings Setup C c Setup1 Recall d Recall Fig 4 44 Recall Setup dialog box C Selects a setting d d Recall C Loads the selected setting After the setting is loaded successfully the d d dialog box is closed The same effect can be achieved by pressing the C4 MENU key Pressing cancels the dialog Remote Control RCL 0 19 Loading settings for mobile radio standards Predefined settings for the most common mobile radio standards can be loaded in the Recall Standard dialog box for quick configuring of messages in the Timeslot and Scope modes In contrast to Recall Setup essentially only the parameters that affect the connected sensors are reconfigured Sensor menu The name of the set standard appears in the title bar of all open windows and is also treated like any other window
344. upper status line the keyboard including has been disabled via the LLO command In this case returning to local mode is only possible with the remote control command GTL or by a power on reset 1144 1400 12 5 1 E 3 Remote Control Fundamentals R amp S NRP Measurement Modes To simplify operation in the manual mode preset values are used in some cases for the trigger system TRIGger command and the timing of the measurement SENSe 1 4 TIMing EXCLude STARCt and STOP when the measurement mode ContAv Burst Timeslot Scope is selected Table 5 2 This is not the case in the remote control mode Here the trigger system and the timing can be configured by the user as required Calculate Blocks The R amp S NRP manages 8 internal calculate blocks Each calculate block has two input channels primary and secondary channel to which one of up to 4 power sensors can be assigned The channels can be processed together by means of a selectable function The result is available at the output of the calculate block In the manual mode the measurement results of the first four calculate blocks gt CALCulate System page 6 10 are shown in windows 1 to 4 while 8 calculate blocks are available in the remote control mode 1144 1400 12 5 2 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Fundamentals Connecting a Controller to the Base Unit Settings in Base Unit Before a link can be established between the controller and the R amp S NRP the
345. us in the ContAv mode and trigger controlled in the Burst Timeslot and Scope modes The measurement result is obtained by averaging the measured values for the last 2N time windows The number N is the filter length Length the factor of 2 arises because the output signals from the microwave detector to suppress low frequency noise are chopped at the same rate as the time windows which means that an independent measured value can only be obtained from two consecutive values The filter length can be selected automatically or can be manually set to a fixed value As a preliminary you should always check if the autofilter mode is giving satisfactory results because you will always have to adjust an optimal manual filter length setting if the power is not constant There are two autofilter operating modes The Normal mode finds a balance between measurement time and display noise Display noise can be adjusted using the Resolution parameter in the Windows menu Resolution page 4 30 A higher reso lution means greater filter lengths and so longer measurements In the Fixed Noise mode the filter length is selected so that the sensor s intrinsic noise 2 standard devia tions does not exceed the specified Noise Content To avoid very long settling times when the power is low the filter length can be limited with the Max Settling Time parameter If the display noise then exceeds this preset value the symbol is displayed 1144 1400 12 4 19 E 2
346. use al titude max 2000 m The unit may be operated only from supply net works fused with max 16 A Unless specified otherwise in the data sheet a tolerance of 10 shall apply to the nominal voltage and of 5 to the nominal frequency For measurements in circuits with voltages Vims 30 V suitable measures should be taken to avoid any hazards using for example appropriate measuring equipment fusing current limiting electrical Separation insulation If the unit is to be permanently wired the PE terminal of the unit must first be connected to the PE conductor on site before any other con nections are made Installation and cabling of the unit to be performed only by qualified techni cal personnel For permanently installed units without built in fuses circuit breakers or similar protective de vices the supply circuit must be fused such as to provide suitable protection for the users and equipment Prior to switching on the unit it must be ensured that the nominal voltage set on the unit matches the nominal voltage of the AC supply network If a different voltage is to be set the power fuse of the unit may have to be changed accordingly Units of protection class with disconnectible AC supply cable and appliance connector may be operated only from a power socket with earthing contact and with the PE conductor con nected 095 1000 Sheet 17 It is not permissible to interrupt the PE conduc tor int
347. uses as indicated by the type plate The fuses are accommodated in a fuse holder in the AC supply connector The holder can be pulled out to insert fuses The power supply has its own fuse Caution Only the service department may replace the internal fuse AC supply connector Fuse holder AC supply connector at the rear of the meter EMC To prevent EMI the meter must always be installed to meet the relevant EMC standards Never operate the instrument with its enclosure removed Only use shielded signal and control cables that meet the relevant EMC standards 1144 1400 12 1 7 E 2 Switching the meter on off R amp S NRP Switching the meter on off ON STANDBY key key The ON STANDBY key is used to toggle between the on and standby states Yellow LED AC suppl EES The yellow LED indicates that the AC supply is connected to the R amp S NRP Green LED ON The green LED indicates when the meter is on The following are therefore the possible operating states a c5 The meter is off and disconnected from the AC supply o e5 The meter is on standby The AC supply is connected and d the power supply is operating correctly If option R amp S NRP B3 battery has been installed auto matic charging will be started if the battery is low The meter is on and is being powered from the AC supply Z4 dw UE NS eo The meter is on and is being battery powered only applies SZ if option R amp S NRP B3 ha
348. ustomerSupport rohde schwarz com F r technische Fragen zu diesem Rohde amp Schwarz Ger t steht Ihnen die Hotline der Rohde amp Schwarz Vertriebs GmbH Support Center zur Verf gung Unser Team bespricht mit Ihnen Ihre Fragen und sucht L sungen f r Ihre Probleme Die Hotline ist Montag bis Freitag von 8 00 bis 17 00 Uhr MEZ besetzt Bei Anfragen auBerhalb der Gesch ftszeiten hinterlassen Sie bitte eine Nachricht oder senden Sie eine Notiz per Fax oder E Mail Wir setzen uns dann baldm glichst mit Ihnen in Verbindung O Um Ihr Ger t stets auf dem neuesten Stand zu halten abonnieren Sie bitte Ihren pers nlichen Newsletter unter http www rohde schwarz com www response nsf newsletterpreselection Sie erhalten dann regelmaBig Informationen ber Rohde amp Schwarz Produkte Ihrer Wahl ber Firmware Erweiterungen neue Teiber und Applikationsschriften Should you have any technical questions concerning this Rohde amp Schwarz product please contact the hotline of Rohde amp Schwarz Vertriebs GimbH Support Center Our hotline team will answer your questions and find solutions to your problems You can reach the hotline Monday through Friday from 8 00 until 17 00 CET If you need assistance outside office hours please leave a message or send us a fax or e mail We will contact you as soon as possible O To keep your instrument always up to date please subscribe to your personal newsletter at http Awww rohde schwarz
349. utputs are not overloaded or wrongly connected e the ventilation holes are not obstructed The meter may be damaged if these precautions are not observed Unpacking the meter When you have removed the meter from its packing check that nothing is missing using the delivery note and the accessory lists If there is any damage contact the carrier Keep all the packing to support any claims for compensa tion It is also best to use the original packing if the meter has to be shipped or transported at a later date 1144 1400 12 1 1 E 2 Notes on putting into operation Setting up the meter Carrying handle 1144 1400 12 R amp S NRP If the R amp S NRP is not installed in a rack it should be set up so that the viewing angle for the display is optimal The carrying handle can be locked in a variety of positions to act as a stand To adjust the handle pull the two side pieces of the handle outwards so that the handle can be rotated The handle locks at angles which are multiples of 60 1 2 E 2 R amp S NRP Front and rear views Front and rear views POWER REF _ ROHDE amp SCHWARZ NRP POWERMETER Sensor Measurement File System 1 Window 1 Select 1834 FROM ROHDE amp SCHWARZ A a yp Resolution dB 1 0 1 Elo ou d B siot Front panel Sensor connector The front panel accommodates a maximum of two sensor connectors for sensors A and B The power sensor
350. wer up has generated an error 10to Not used 13 14 Warning 15 Bit 15 will never be used 1144 1400 12 6 78 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands Standard Event Status Register ESR Standard Event Status Enable Register ESE The ESR is already defined in the IEEE 488 2 standard It is comparable to the EVEN register of an SCPI register The Standard Event Status Register can be read out by the query ESR The ESE forms the associated ENABle register It can be set by the command ESE and read out by the query ESE Table 6 19 Meaning of bits used in the Standard Event Status Register Bit No Meaning 0 Operation Complete When the OP C command is received this bit is set if all previous commands have been executed 1 Not used 2 Query Error This bit is set in either of the two following cases the controller wants to read data from the device but has not sent a query or it sends new commands to the device before it retrieves existing requested data A frequent cause is a faulty query which cannot be executed 3 Device dependent Error This bit is set if a device dependent error occurs An error message with a number between 300 and 399 or a positive error number denoting the error in greater detail will be entered in the error queue 4 Execution Error This bit is set if the syntax of a received command is correct but the command cannot be executed d
351. windows EECH Fie_systen CC Select the Measurement menu and then select Func Co dod tion from this menu tion EN Function e C d Function C2 gt Open the Function drop down list in the Function amp dod Unit dialog box Func amp Uni In this window you can select the function used to calcu Ee late the result in the active window For example Ratio A B yields the quotient from the measured power values in channels A and B Prim Channel Ratio A B SWR AB Unit dBm 4 Aux None i 1144 1400 12 2 16 E 2 R amp S NRP Function C 3 dod Unit C dod Fune amp Unit Function Ratio A B Prim Channel A Sec Channel B Unit dB Aux None E 1144 1400 12 Setting measurement functions gt Check whether Sensor A is selected in the drop down list for the primary channel and Sensor B in the drop down list for the secondary channel If not switch to the primary channel for example The secondary channel is then automatically set to the other sensor v Tip You can also operate the drop down lists by means of the cursor keys instead of the rocker switch gt Select Ratio A B from the drop down list for the measurement function and close the drop down list with C4 MENU gt Now press the Unit softkey The ratio of two powers is dimensionless this is why only dB
352. xiliary Value CO de d d T 8 amp 861dBm 1144 1400 12 Select the Measurement menu Select Function in this menu The measurement function unit sensors used and the auxiliary value can be selected in the Function amp Unit dialog box gt Open the Auxiliary Value drop down list Select Max gt Close the dialog box gt Press the Max Hold Reset softkey and close the menu with 4 MENU The updated maximum is now displayed on the right next to the measured value If you reduce the signal power the maximum should remain the same However if the signal power is in creased the maximum changes accordingly 2 15 E 2 Setting measurement functions R amp S NRP Setting measurement functions A multichannel meter with two sensors connected is required for this section If only one sensor is available you can only select the measurement functions Primary and Secondary Measuring one power relative to another Connect the two sensors to connectors A and B on the R amp S NRP and apply an unmodulated signal with a level between 10 dBm and 10 dBm to each of the sensors gt Press the key twice ESCH windows Measurement File system Now two display windows with the results in dBm from aa eee sensors A and B appear A 1 000 GHz A window for each sensor is opened with Preset 602a 2 B B 1 000 GHz T 08 55 Sensor
353. xpands to occupy the full display height and indicates all parameters relevant to the measurement The currently displayed values are the default values obtained after a preset System Instead of Expand the Arrange function is now available to arrange all opened windows 1 000 GHz gt Open the menu again d Close Arrange C gt Press the Arrange key d Window 1 returns to its previous size The following steps show the difference between the Open and Init functions You first have to change two set tings of window 1 Using the Dig D A softkey activate the analog display CD d of results C gt Goto the Measurement menu and select Relative On Return to the Windows menu 1144 1400 12 2 12 E 2 R amp S NRP sensor TEE Measurement File System RSR Rel 0 00dB v 120 dB 60 dB Close Arrange C d Window Hau d Open init 4 Open Init C d Close Arrange Open Init sensor RIEA Measurement File System 1 000 GHz 204 cm 1144 1400 12 Window handling Window 1 now displays the A Rel function on an analog scale gt Now close window 1 with the Close softkey Select in Window shows that window 1 is still selected The labelling next to the third softkey is now Open Init gt Now press the Open softkey not Init The appearanc
354. y be read by the user Reading this register clears its contents This register is frequently referred to as the overall register 6 71 E 3 Remote Control Commands R amp S NRP ENABle register Summary bit es Note 1144 1400 12 The ENABle register determines whether the associated EVENt bit influences the summary bit see below Each bit of the EVENt register is ANDed symbol amp with the associated ENABle bit The events of all logical operations of this register are ORed symbol and passed on to the summary bit ENABle bit 0 the associated EVEN bit does not affect the summary bit bit 1 if the associated EVENT bit is 1 the summary bit is also set to 1 This register can be written to and read as required Reading the register does not change its contents As stated above the summary bit for each register is derived from the EVENt and ENABle registers The result is entered into a bit of the CONDition register of the next higher register The device automatically generates the summary bit for each register An event may thus cause a service request through all hierarchical levels The Service Request Enable register SHE defined by IEEE488 2 can be viewed as the ENABle register of the STB Accordingly the ESE can be viewed as the ENABle register of the ESR 6 72 E 3 R amp S NRP Remote Control Commands Output Queue Device Status Dc output buffer Register Sensor A connected S
355. ystem Window Hau W Func EN tion BS 4 MENU Relative d Kon Reset RefVal Limits Max Hold Reset Window 234 LJ Func tion BS dB yu Relative Eon Reset RefVal Linits 4 Max Hold Reset 4 Window C 234 dod Wy HEB ERES w Func dBm d tion dBuV d 1144 1400 12 Measuring average power Cont Av mode gt Using the topmost rocker switch or the cursor keys select the Measurement menu The menu opens out automatically for this procedure gt Press the 4 MENU key if the menu is not dis played The results of post processing are summarized in the Measurement menu gt Use the Window softkey to select window 1 The functions in the Windows and Measurement menu are all defined for the selected window The dark title bar indicates the window that has been selected v Tip You can also select windows with the up down cursor keys gt Select the unit W with the adjacent rocker switch 2 5 E 2 Measuring average power Cont Av mode Sensor Windows DETE File System A d Ba 1 000 GHz 1144 1400 12 The result is displayed in W 2 6 R amp S NRP E 2 R amp S NRP Setting a fixed offset correction ENS windows Measurement File System CO Mode 4 dod Offset Filter d Mode d Offset Filter Range d RF Source 4

Power Meter

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents